Contents
Setting Up
Basic Operations
Printing
Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory
- Using Memory Media
Linking with Mobile Devices
Managing the Machine
Settings/Registration
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Implementing Security Measures
- Various Security Functions
Appendix
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

Canon LBP722Cdw User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for LBP722Cdw by Canon which is a product in the Laser Printers category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Canon EF 85mm f/1.8 USM Manual

Canon 5D + EF 24-105mm + EF 100-400mm Kit Manual

Canon MF3010 Manual

LBP722Cdw

User's Guide

USRMA-6269-01 2022-02 en Copyright CANON INC. 2022

Contents

Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................ 2

Preparations Required Before Use ............................................................................................................................. 3

Preventing Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................................................ 4

Setting up Using the Setup Guide ............................................................................................................................... 6

Setting the Date/Time ............................................................................................................................................... 7

Setting up the Network Environment ......................................................................................................................... 8

Selecting the Network Connection Method ............................................................................................................ 10

Connecting to a Wired LAN .................................................................................................................................. 12

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................... 14

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode .................................................................................. 16

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ...................................................................................... 17

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ....................................................................................... 18

Setting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings .................................................................................... 19

Checking the SSID and Network Key ............................................................................................................... 21

Setting an IP Address .......................................................................................................................................... 22

Setting an IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................. 23

Setting an IPv6 Address ................................................................................................................................. 25

Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line .......................................................................................................... 27

Adapting to the Network Environment .................................................................................................................. 28

Making Ethernet Settings .............................................................................................................................. 29

Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network ....................................................................................... 30

Making DNS Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 31

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ......................................................................................... 34

Setting Static Routing .................................................................................................................................... 38

Other Network Settings ................................................................................................................................. 40

Conguring System Data Communication ........................................................................................................ 43

Installing Drivers .................................................................................................................................................... 44

Conguring E-Mail Print Settings ............................................................................................................................. 45

Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 49

Parts and Their Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 51

Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 52

Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 55

Interior .............................................................................................................................................................. 57

Multi-Purpose Tray .............................................................................................................................................. 58

Paper Drawer ..................................................................................................................................................... 59

Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................................... 60

Turning ON the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 63

Turning OFF the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 64

Loading Paper ......................................................................................................................................................... 65

Basic Paper Loading Method ................................................................................................................................ 66

Loading Envelopes .............................................................................................................................................. 74

Loading Postcards .............................................................................................................................................. 78

Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................... 80

Using the Control Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 82

Basic Screens ..................................................................................................................................................... 83

Items Displayed on the <Home> Screen .......................................................................................................... 85

Basic Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 87

Entering Characters ............................................................................................................................................ 90

Logging into the Machine ........................................................................................................................................ 92

Specifying Paper Size and Type ................................................................................................................................ 93

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ............................................................................................... 94

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-purpose Tray ........................................................................................ 96

Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray ............................................................. 98

Registering Free Size Paper (Custom Size Paper) ................................................................................................... 100

Automatically Selecting the Appropriate Paper Source for a Specic Function .......................................................... 101

Customizing the Display ........................................................................................................................................ 102

Customizing the <Home> Screen ........................................................................................................................ 103

Switching the Displayed Language ..................................................................................................................... 104

Setting Sounds ...................................................................................................................................................... 105

Entering Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 106

Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 109

Printing From a Computer ..................................................................................................................................... 111

Canceling Printing ............................................................................................................................................ 114

Checking the Printing Status and History ............................................................................................................. 116

Advanced Functions for Printing ............................................................................................................................ 117

Printing Documents Held in the Machine ............................................................................................................. 118

Printing Out Secured Documents ........................................................................................................................ 121

Various Printing Methods ...................................................................................................................................... 123

Directly Printing Files without Opening Them ....................................................................................................... 124

Printing Using a Virtual Printer ........................................................................................................................... 126

Printing From Memory Media (Media Print) ......................................................................................................... 128

Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print) ................................................................................................................. 129

Printing Using the Microsoft Cloud Service (Universal Print) ................................................................................... 130

Conguring the Universal Print User Settings ................................................................................................. 134

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory ....................................................................... 137

Using Memory Media ............................................................................................................................................ 138

Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 144

Connecting with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................................ 145

Connecting Directly .......................................................................................................................................... 146

Utilizing the Machine through Applications ........................................................................................................... 149

Using AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 151

Printing with AirPrint ........................................................................................................................................ 155

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ................................................................................................................................. 158

Printing with Default Print Service (Android) .......................................................................................................... 159

Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................ 162

Applying a Security Policy to the Machine .............................................................................................................. 164

Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy Settings ........................................................................................ 165

Conguring the Security Policy Settings .............................................................................................................. 167

Security Policy Setting Items .............................................................................................................................. 169

Managing Users .................................................................................................................................................... 174

Conguring the Personal Authentication Management Settings ............................................................................. 176

Registering User Information in the Local Device ............................................................................................ 179

Importing/Exporting User Data .................................................................................................................... 183

Adding and Editing User Information in a CSV File .................................................................................... 186

Registering Server Information .................................................................................................................... 190

Conguring the Authentication Functions ...................................................................................................... 196

Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing via a Computer ................................................................... 200

Using Other Convenient Personal Authentication Management Functions ............................................................... 201

Setting the Department ID Management ....................................................................................................... 202

Changing the System Manager ID and PIN .............................................................................................. 203

Conguring the Department ID Management Settings .............................................................................. 205

Using Department IDs to Manage Printing via Computer .......................................................................... 208

Setting an Authentication/Password Policy .......................................................................................................... 209

Conguring the Network Security Settings ............................................................................................................ 212

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ..................................................................................................... 214

Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings ................................................................................................... 215

Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings ................................................................................................ 218

Conguring the Firewall of the Sub Line ........................................................................................................ 220

Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 223

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .......................................................................................................... 225

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 229

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ................................................................................... 231

Registering a Key and Certicate for Network Communication ......................................................................... 234

Conguring the Expiration Check Method for Received Certicates .................................................................. 237

Retrieving/Updating a Certicate from an SCEP Server .................................................................................... 240

Conguring the IPSec Settings ........................................................................................................................... 246

Conguring the IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ............................................................................................. 253

Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 256

Restricting Printing from a Computer .................................................................................................................. 257

Restricting the Use of Memory Media .................................................................................................................. 261

Restricting Use of the Operation Panel ................................................................................................................ 262

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ............................................................................................ 263

Starting the Remote UI ...................................................................................................................................... 265

Checking the Status and Logs ............................................................................................................................ 269

Turning OFF/Restarting the Machine ................................................................................................................... 272

Managing the Logs ........................................................................................................................................... 273

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data ................................................................................................................. 276

III

Importing/Exporting All Settings .................................................................................................................. 278

Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 282

Updating the Firmware (Distribution) .................................................................................................................. 284

Setting Scheduled Updates ................................................................................................................................ 287

Displaying Messages from the Administrator ....................................................................................................... 289

Setting the Website for Purchasing Consumables ................................................................................................. 290

Installing System Options ..................................................................................................................................... 292

Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 294

Settings/Registration ............................................................................................................................ 298

Settings/Registration Table ................................................................................................................................... 299

Preferences ..................................................................................................................................................... 301

Display Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 302

Timer/Energy Settings ................................................................................................................................. 303

Network .................................................................................................................................................... 305

External Interface ....................................................................................................................................... 324

Accessibility ............................................................................................................................................... 325

Volume Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 326

Adjustment/Maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 327

Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 328

Adjust Image Quality .................................................................................................................................. 329

Function Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 331

Common ................................................................................................................................................... 332

Printer ...................................................................................................................................................... 334

Custom Settings ................................................................................................................................... 335

UFR II .................................................................................................................................................. 338

PCL ..................................................................................................................................................... 339

PS ....................................................................................................................................................... 341

Imaging .............................................................................................................................................. 342

PDF ..................................................................................................................................................... 343

XPS ..................................................................................................................................................... 345

Utility .................................................................................................................................................. 346

Send ......................................................................................................................................................... 347

Receive ..................................................................................................................................................... 348

Access Files ................................................................................................................................................ 349

Print ......................................................................................................................................................... 350

Management Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 351

User Management ...................................................................................................................................... 352

Device Management ................................................................................................................................... 353

License/Other ............................................................................................................................................ 354

Data Management ...................................................................................................................................... 355

Security Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 356

Output Report .................................................................................................................................................. 357

<Preferences> ....................................................................................................................................................... 358

<Display Settings> ............................................................................................................................................ 359

<Timer/Energy Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 361

<Network> ....................................................................................................................................................... 365

<External Interface> .......................................................................................................................................... 377

<Accessibility> .................................................................................................................................................. 379

<Volume Settings> ............................................................................................................................................ 380

<Adjustment/Maintenance> .................................................................................................................................. 381

<Maintenance> ................................................................................................................................................ 382

<Adjust Image Quality> ..................................................................................................................................... 383

<Function Settings> .............................................................................................................................................. 387

<Common> ...................................................................................................................................................... 388

<Printer> ......................................................................................................................................................... 391

<Send> ............................................................................................................................................................ 393

<Receive> ........................................................................................................................................................ 394

<Access Files> .................................................................................................................................................. 395

<Print> ............................................................................................................................................................ 396

<Management Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 397

<User Management> ........................................................................................................................................ 398

<Device Management> ...................................................................................................................................... 399

<License/Other> ............................................................................................................................................... 401

<Data Management> ........................................................................................................................................ 403

<Security Settings> ........................................................................................................................................... 405

<Output Report> ................................................................................................................................................... 406

Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 410

Regular Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................. 412

Cleaning the Exterior ........................................................................................................................................ 413

Replacing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................................... 414

Replacing the Waste Toner Container .................................................................................................................... 418

Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 421

Replacement Parts ................................................................................................................................................ 423

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables .................................................................................................. 426

Adjusting Print Quality .......................................................................................................................................... 427

Adjusting Gradation .......................................................................................................................................... 428

Automatically Adjusting Color Registration and Color Intensity .............................................................................. 429

Adjusting the Print Position ............................................................................................................................... 430

Reducing Toner Used When Color Printing .......................................................................................................... 433

Paper Type Management Settings ......................................................................................................................... 434

Checking the Number of Pages for Print ................................................................................................................ 440

Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 441

Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 443

If the Machine Does Not Operate ........................................................................................................................... 444

Cannot Print ......................................................................................................................................................... 446

Problems with Printing Results .............................................................................................................................. 447

Problems with the Network ................................................................................................................................... 450

Problems with Security ......................................................................................................................................... 454

Other Problems .................................................................................................................................................... 455

A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed .................................................................... 456

A Message Saying to Contact Your Dealer or Service Representative Is Displayed ..................................................... 457

Countermeasures for Each Message ................................................................................................................... 458

Countermeasures for Each Error Code ................................................................................................................ 482

Clearing Paper Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 490

Paper Jams inside the Machine or in the Fixing Unit .............................................................................................. 492

Paper Jams in a Paper Source ............................................................................................................................. 496

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved ......................................................................................................................... 501

Implementing Security Measures ............................................................................................... 503

Various Security Functions .................................................................................................................................... 504

Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 508

Third Party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 510

Notice .................................................................................................................................................................. 511

Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 515

Productivity ..................................................................................................................................................... 516

Image Quality .................................................................................................................................................. 517

Manageability .................................................................................................................................................. 518

Building a Dual Network Environment ........................................................................................................... 519

Oce Compatibility .......................................................................................................................................... 522

Basic Windows Operations .................................................................................................................................... 523

System Specications ............................................................................................................................................ 527

Printer Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 528

Management Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 531

System Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 535

Network Environment ....................................................................................................................................... 536

System Options ................................................................................................................................................ 538

Hardware Specications ........................................................................................................................................ 539

Main Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 540

Available Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 542

Paper Feeder PF-D ............................................................................................................................................ 549

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV ................................................................................................................................... 550

Options ................................................................................................................................................................ 551

Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 552

Paper Feeder PF-D ...................................................................................................................................... 553

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV ............................................................................................................................. 554

Manuals and Their Contents .................................................................................................................................. 555

Using User's Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 556

Screen Layout of User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 557

Viewing User's Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 560

Setting Up

Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................... 2

Preparations Required Before Use ....................................................................................................................... 3

Preventing Unauthorized Access .......................................................................................................................... 4

Setting up Using the Setup Guide ......................................................................................................................... 6

Setting the Date/Time ........................................................................................................................................... 7

Setting up the Network Environment .................................................................................................................. 8

Selecting the Network Connection Method .................................................................................................... 10

Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 12

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 14

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ....................................................................... 16

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ............................................................................ 17

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ............................................................................. 18

Setting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ......................................................................... 19

Checking the SSID and Network Key ........................................................................................................ 21

Setting an IP Address ..................................................................................................................................... 22

Setting an IPv4 Address ........................................................................................................................... 23

Setting an IPv6 Address ........................................................................................................................... 25

Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line ................................................................................................. 27

Adapting to the Network Environment ........................................................................................................... 28

Making Ethernet Settings ......................................................................................................................... 29

Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network ............................................................................ 30

Making DNS Settings ............................................................................................................................... 31

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................... 34

Setting Static Routing .............................................................................................................................. 38

Other Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 40

Conguring System Data Communication ............................................................................................... 43

Installing Drivers ................................................................................................................................................. 44

Conguring E-Mail Print Settings ....................................................................................................................... 45

Setting Up

7KKL-000

Setting up the usage environment is required before using each function of the machine. First, conrm the processes

to complete "setting up" prior to actual setup. Preparations Required Before Use(P. 3)

◼Administrators and General Users

To manage the machine, it is recommended to construct a system in which someone is appointed as an administrator

and general users operate the machine under the management of an administrator. Administrators decide the rules

for using the machine and operate important setups such as networks and security.

Carrying out the initial setup of the machine (Setup Guide)

●You can easily set up to start using the machine, such as setting the date and time and networks, by

following the on-screen instructions. Setting up Using the Setup Guide(P. 6)

Setting Up

Preparations Required Before Use

7KKL-001

Set up the machine in order from steps 1 through 4. For details, click a link to display the corresponding pages. To use

the machine safely, at the same time, conrm Preventing Unauthorized Access(P. 4) .

Step 1 Setting up Using the Setup Guide(P. 6)

Step 2 Setting up the Network Environment(P. 8)

●Set up the network environment not included on the Setup Guide. If you do not start the

Setup Guide, start setting up from this procedure.

Step 3 Installing Drivers(P. 44)

Step 4 Conguring E-Mail Print Settings(P. 45)

Setting from the Remote UI

●When you complete setup for the network environment, you can set up the machine from Remote UI

eciently. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Saving setup time by importing data from other machines

●If you have any other Canon printer/multifunction printer and save (export) its registered setup data to a

computer beforehand, it can be immediately used by importing them to the machine. Importing/

Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

Setting Up

Preventing Unauthorized Access

7KKL-002

This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is

a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines

connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a

variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,

and sending scan documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to reduce

the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to threats,

such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary settings

you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected to the

network.

Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 4)

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 5)

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication(P. 5)

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 5)

Assigning a Private IP Address

An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is

used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication

within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/

multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage

due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,

your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local

area network, such as a LAN in the company.

【Global IP address】

Accessible from outside your network

【Private IP address】

Accessible only from within a local area network

Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,

assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is

found in one of the following ranges.

◼Ranges of Private IP Addresses

●10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255

●172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255

●192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

For information on how to conrm IP addresses, see Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23) .

●If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment

to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents

Setting Up

access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/

multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission

A rewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/

intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the

external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the

external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP

address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall

Settings(P. 215) .

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication

For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Conguring the Network Security Settings(P. 212) ,

and on the procedures to specify, see Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225) .

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine

If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to

information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines

enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.

Password for each function / PIN code setting

●Personal authentication management using User Authentication Conguring the Personal Authentication

Management Settings(P. 176)

●PIN code setting for system management contents Changing the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 203)

These are examples of preventing unauthorized access. For other details, see Managing the Machine(P. 162) and

carry out necessary settings according to your environment.

Setting Up

Setting up Using the Setup Guide

7KKL-0KA

PMW-STSG

When the machine is turned ON for the rst time ( Turning ON the Machine(P. 63) ), the initial setup of the

machine begins automatically. You can adjust the basic setup necessary to use the machine. Congure the basic setup

in accordance with each screen, or click a link to display the corresponding page and see details.

Step 1 Specify the display language.

Select the display language.

●Select the display language, and select the country/region where the machine will be used if

countries/regions are displayed.

Step 2 Set the time zone.

Select the time zone where the machine is used.

Step 3 Specify the date and time.

Specify the date and time of the machine.

Step 4 Set the "Administrator" password for Remote UI authentication.

Set the password used when logging into the Remote UI as the "Administrator" user.

●If you do not want to set a password, select <No> on the conrmation screen and proceed to

step 5.

●This machine is set to use the user authentication as the login service. For more information,

see Conguring the Personal Authentication Management Settings(P. 176) .

Step 5 Set the network connection method.

Specify the method for connecting the machine to a network.

●If you select <Wired LAN>, the Setup Guide nishes and the <Home> screen is displayed.

●For details on wireless LAN connections, see Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 14) .

◼Starting the Setup Guide later

The Setup Guide cannot be started in the following cases.

●If the user authentication or department ID authentication is set.

●If the authentication with a card is performed.

●If the Setup Guide was started after the "Administrator" password for Remote UI authentication was set,

step 4 is not displayed and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 5.

Setting Up

Setting the Date/Time

7KKL-005

Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time are used as the reference for the functions specifying the

time, therefore, they need to be set accurately.

Setting the Time Zone(P. 7)

Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 7)

Setting the Time Zone

What is UTC?

●Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and

time. Time differences exist depending on the country or area where the machine is used. The correct UTC

time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

Setting the Current Date and Time

<Set> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Current Date/Time

Settings>

●You can change the display format for the time.

<Time Format>(P. 361)

Setting Up

Setting up the Network Environment

7KKL-006

0YRY-006 0UUY-006 0UW1-006 1100-006 0X7F-006 0X7H-006 10XJ-006 0X6E-006 0X6W-006 1106-006 0X7C-006 0X7A-006 10YY-006 0WXY-006 0X7E-006 10H3-006 0WR6-006 0WR7-006 108A-006 1116-006 10H4-0JS 0WR5-006 0WR8-006 0YWJ-006 0YWH-006 0YWR-006 0YWK-006 0YWE-006 0YWF-006 0YAS-006 PMW-STNW

To connect the machine to a network, connect the machine to a router using a LAN cable or Wi-Fi and specify a unique

IP address in the network. To specify an IP address, there are two methods: automatic setting and manual setting.

Select one of the methods that is suitable for your communication environment and devices. The machine adopts not

only basic network functions, but also advanced technologies in order to exibly cope with various environments.

Carry out the necessary setup required for your environment.

For safe use

●If you connect the machine to a network without appropriate security measures, there are risks that the

machine might receive unauthorized access from third parties. Set up network security to secure important

data and information. Conguring the Network Security Settings(P. 212)

●You can connect the machine to a computer using a USB cable ( Parts and Their Functions(P. 51) ).

●You can establish a wireless direct connection between the machine and mobile devices. Connecting

Directly(P. 146)

◼Conrm before handling

Follow the procedure below to make a connection to a network.

Conrm rst.

●Are a computer and a router properly connected using a LAN cable? For details, see

the instruction manual for each device or contact the manufacturers.

●Is setup of the computer network completed? If the setup is not completed, you

cannot use the devices on a network even after completing the following steps.

●Depending on your environment, you may need to change the settings of the

network communication system (half-duplex/full-duplex) and Ethernet type

(1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T) ( Making Ethernet Settings(P. 29) ). For

details, contact the network administrator.

●To conrm the MAC address, see <Network>(P. 365) .

●To connect to a network employing IEEE802.1X, see Conguring the IEEE 802.1X

Authentication Settings(P. 253) .

Setting Up

Select a wired LAN or wireless LAN for connection.

Selecting the Network Connection Method(P. 10)

Connect the machine to a router.

●Is the LAN cable connector plugged into the proper place securely? Insert the

connector until it clicks.

●For a wireless LAN connection, check the connection between the machine and the

router.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 12)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 14)

Set an IP address as necessary.

●Normally, an IP address is automatically allocated by DHCP, so this setting is not

necessary. If you want to use a specic IP address or change the protocol of the

automatic setting of an IP address from DHCP (initial setting) to another, this setting is

necessary.

Setting an IP Address(P. 22)

Conrm that proper connection is completed.

●Start the Remote UI from a computer ( Starting the Remote UI(P. 265) ). If the

Remote UI screen is displayed, the connection is completed.

When <Sleep Mode Energy Use> is set to <Low>

●Depending on the utility software, communication may fail if the machine is in sleep mode. Press

(Energy Saver) to recover from the Sleep mode before conguring this setting. <Sleep Mode Energy

Use>(P. 363)

LINKS

Adapting to the Network Environment(P. 28)

Setting Up

Selecting the Network Connection Method

7KKL-008

You can select the method for connecting the machine to computers, etc. The following connection methods are

available.

●Wired LAN only

●Wireless LAN only

●Simultaneous wired LAN and wireless LAN

●Simultaneous wired LAN and another wired LAN

When using simultaneous wired LAN and wireless LAN or simultaneous wired LAN and another wired LAN, the line

connected from the LAN port of the machine is called the "main line" and the line connected from wireless LAN or

another wired LAN is called the "sub line."

<Set> <Preferences> <Network> <Select Interface> select the interface

●When using a sub line, see Feature Highlights(P. 515) .

If you selected <Wireless LAN> or <Wired LAN + Wireless LAN>

●The settings of <Wireless LAN Settings> are cleared.

●You cannot set wireless LAN as the main line and wired LAN as the sub line.

Setting Up

If you selected <Wired LAN + Wired LAN>

●Set <Sleep Mode Energy Use> to <High>. <Sleep Mode Energy Use>(P. 363)

LINK

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 12)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 14)

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wired LAN

7KKL-009

Connect the machine to a computer via a router using a LAN cable.

●A router and LAN cable are not included with the machine, so please prepare them separately.

●The machine supports 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T Ethernet.

●To make a connection using 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, use a category 5 twisted pair cable. It is recommended to

use an enhanced category 5 twisted pair cable to make a connection using 1000BASE-T.

●If devices supporting 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T are used together, a device (such as a switching

hub) supporting all of the Ethernet types you use is necessary. For more information, contact your dealer or

service representative.

1Connect the machine to a router using a LAN cable.

●Push the connector in until it clicks into place.

Connecting to a Wired LAN for the Sub Line

When <Wired LAN + Wired LAN> is selected in <Select Interface>, connect the wired LAN for the sub line.

<Select Interface>(P. 373)

1Connect the USB-LAN adapter to the USB port of the machine (front-right side of the machine). Parts

and Their Functions(P. 51)

●Multiple USB-LAN adapters cannot be connected.

Setting Up

●For information on the USB-LAN adapters that can be used, contact your dealer or service

representative.

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wireless LAN

7KKL-00A

Wirelessly connect the machine to a computer or mobile device via a wireless LAN router (access point). If the wireless

router is equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), conguring your network is automatic and easy. If the wireless

router does not support with WPS, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in detail, you need

to manually set up the connection. Congure connection on the computer or mobile device side in advance.

◼Setting Up the Connection Using WPS

If your wireless LAN router supports WPS, two setting modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 16)

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 17)

◼Setting Up the Connection Manually

There are two manual setting methods: manually congure the setting with a wireless LAN router selected, or

manually enter all the required information for wireless LAN connection. Regardless of the method, make sure that

you have the required setup information, including the SSID and network key.

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 18)

Setting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 19)

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 21)

◼Check the settings and information of the wireless LAN

Check the information you set.

●Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an

unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in

wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.

●The wireless LAN security that is supported by the machine is listed below. For the wireless security

compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact

your manufacturer.

128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP

Setting Up

WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

WPA-EAP (AES-CCMP)

WPA2-EAP (AES-CCMP)

However, WPA-EAP and WPA2-EAP cannot be used if <Wired LAN + Wireless LAN> is selected in <Select

Interface>.

●Depending on the network device, the operation of the wireless LAN router differs. See the instruction

manuals for your networking device for help.

●When [Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption] is selected ( Setting the Security Strength and Encryption

Method(P. 227) ), the machine cannot connect to a wireless LAN router if security settings are not

congured or only WEP or TKIP set.

●This machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready.

●The wireless router must conform to IEEE 802.11b/g/n and be able to communication in 2.4 GHz bandwidth.

For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your

manufacturer.

Connecting directly

●You can establish a direct wireless connection between a mobile device and the machine without using a

wireless LAN router. Connecting Directly(P. 146)

Reducing the power consumption

●If you set <Power Save Mode> to <On>, you can regularly set the machine to the power saving mode to

match the signal that the wireless LAN router sends. <Wireless LAN Settings> <Power Save

Mode>(P. 374)

Setting Up

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS Push Button

Mode

7KKL-00C

If your wireless router supports the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) Push Button mode, you can easily set up a connection

with the WPS button on the router.

select <Yes> on the conrmation screen press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router

➠When the wireless LAN router is detected and the conguration is complete, the screen <Connected.> will

be displayed.

●Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the WPS button for 2 seconds or

longer. See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.

●If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.

Setting Up

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode

7KKL-00E

Some WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) routers do not support the Push Button mode. In this case, register the PIN code

generated on the machine to the networking device.

Generating a PIN code on the machine

<Set> <Preferences> <Network> <Wireless LAN Settings> <WPS PIN Code Mode> select

<Yes> on the conrmation screen

➠A PIN code is generated.

Registering the PIN code to the wireless router

manual for your networking device.

1Access a wireless router from a computer.

2Display the screen for entering a WPS PIN code.

3Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.

➠When the wireless LAN router is detected and the conguration is complete, the screen <Connected.> will

be displayed.

●If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router

7KKL-00F

You can search the wireless routers available for connection and select one from the display of the machine. If the

security standard for your wireless LAN router is WEP or WPA/WPA2-PSK, enter a WEP key or PSK for the network key.

Conrm and write down in advance information regarding your SSID, network key, security standard, or

authentication/encryption method, etc. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 21)

Security settings

●If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to

<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2-PSK encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want

to select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2-PSK encryption, set up the

connection in <Enter Manually>. Setting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 19)

●If the security standard for your wireless LAN router is WPA/WPA2-EAP, the encryption method is set to AES-

CCMP. Also, specify the IEEE 802.1X authentication settings for the machine before connecting to the

wireless LAN. Conguring the IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 253)

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Preferences> <Network> <Wireless LAN Settings> <SSID Settings>.

3Select <Select Access Point>.

●The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.

4Select a wireless router, and connect to it.

If the security setting of your wireless LAN router is WEP or WPA/WPA2-PSK

1Select the wireless LAN router to use.

2Enter the network key.

3Select <Yes> on the conrmation screen.

➠When the conguration is complete, the screen <Connected.> will be displayed.

If the security setting of your wireless LAN router is other than WEP or WPA/WPA2-

PSK

1Select the wireless LAN router to use select <Yes> on the conrmation screen.

➠When the conguration is complete, the screen <Connected.> will be displayed.

Setting Up

Setting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings

7KKL-00H

If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other

procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Conrm and write down in

advance information regarding your SSID, network key, security standard, or authentication/encryption method, etc.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 21)

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Preferences> <Network> <Wireless LAN Settings> <SSID Settings>.

3Select <Enter Manually> enter the SSID that you have checked.

●Enter the SSID, and select <Apply>.

●For instructions on how to enter text, see Entering Characters(P. 90) .

4Specify the security settings in <Security Settings>.

Using WEP

1Select <WEP>.

2Select an authentication method.

●To use the WEP key as a password, select <Shared Key>.

●When <Open System> is selected, an authentication error occurs during connection if the wireless

router is using shared key authentication. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the

setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.

3Select the WEP key that you want to edit.

●Select <Edit WEP Key> select any of <WEP Key 1> to <WEP Key 4>.

●Up to four WEP keys can be registered.

4Enter the network key that you have checked.

●Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

5Select the WEP key to use.

●Select <Select WEP Key> select the WEP key you have edited.

Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK

1Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.

2Select an encryption method.

●To set the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless

router, press <Auto>.

3Enter the network key that you have checked.

●Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

Setting Up

Using WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP

1Select <WPA/WPA2-EAP>.

2Select <Yes> on the conrmation screen.

5Select <Yes> on the conrmation screen.

➠ When the wireless LAN router is detected and the conguration is complete, the screen <Connected.> will

be displayed.

Setting Up

Checking the SSID and Network Key

7KKL-00J

When manually setting up a wireless LAN router connection, it is necessary to specify the SSID, network key, and

security standard, etc., of the wireless LAN router. The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking

devices. Check your devices before setting up the connection. If the security standard for your wireless LAN router is

WPA/WPA2-EAP, specify the IEEE 802.1X authentication settings for the machine in advance ( Conguring the IEEE

802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 253) ). For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking

devices or contact your manufacturer.

SSID A name given for identifying a specic wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID

include "access point name" and "network name."

Network Key

A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other

terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"

"preshared key (PSK)."

Wireless Security

Protocols

(Authentication /

Encryption)

●Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK/WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP)

●Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key/IEEE 802.1X authentication)

●Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

●WPA/WPA2-EAP cannot be used if <Wired LAN + Wireless LAN> is selected in <Select Interface>.

Setting Up

Setting an IP Address

7KKL-00K

0YRY-00K 1100-00K 10XJ-00K 1106-00K 10YY-00K 10H3-00K 108A-00K 1116-00K 10H4-00K 0YAS-00K

To connect the machine to a network, a unique IP address on the network is required. The machine supports two

versions of IP addresses: "IPv4" and "IPv6." Set and use them according to your environment. You can use either IPv4

or IPv6. You can also use both of them at the same time.

When a connection method with a main line and sub line is selected in <Select Interface>, specify the IP address of the

sub line in <IP Address Settings> in <Sub Line Settings>.

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

Setting an IPv6 Address(P. 25)

Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line(P. 27)

Setting Up

Setting an IPv4 Address

7KKL-00L

There are two methods to set an IPv4 address: allocating automatically using DHCP and entering manually. Select

either of the two according to your environment. Conduct a connection test as necessary.

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv4 Address(P. 24)

Setting an IPv4 Address

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings>.

3Select <Use IPv4> <On> to enable IPv4 settings.

4Select <IP Address Settings> and set an IP address.

●You can also set both automatic retrieval and manual retrieval. If you set both and set <Release Address Last

Acquired from DHCP Server When Address Cannot Be Acquired> to <Off>, the manually entered IP address is

used when automatic IP address retrieval fails.

Automatically assigning an IP address

1Select <IP Address Settings> <Auto Acquire>.

2Select <Select Protocol> <DHCP>.

3Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.

●If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.

4Select <Apply>.

●If you press <Auto IP>, the available IP address is automatically searched in the network (LAN) and the

value for each item is allocated. This function allocates the IP address without using a DHCP server.

However, communication outside of the router range is not available.

●In an environment where both <DHCP> and <Auto IP> cannot be used, if either of the two is selected,

useless communication occurs because the machine tries to check if the service is provided on the

network.

●IP addresses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.

Setting by manual entry

1Congure a setting to disable auto-acquisition.

●Select <Auto Acquire>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.

Setting Up

2Select <Manually Acquire>.

3Enter the IP address, the subnet mask, and the gateway address.

●Enter these values in each screen using the numeric keys, and press .

Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv4 Address

When the machine is connected properly, the Remote UI login screen can be displayed from the computer ( Starting

the Remote UI(P. 265) ). You can conduct a connection test on the control panel of the machine.

<Set> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING

Command> Enter the address of any other in-use device

➠When the machine is connected correctly, the <Received response from host.> message is displayed.

●Even though IP addresses are properly set, if the machine is connected to a switching hub, the machine

might not be connected to the network. In this case, delay the timing of the machine's communication start

and try to connect again. Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network(P. 30)

LINKS

Setting an IPv6 Address(P. 25)

Setting Up

Setting an IPv6 Address

7KKL-00R

The following are the types of IPv6 addresses. Register as necessary. Up to four stateless addresses can be registered.

Conduct a connection test as necessary.

Type Explanation

Link local address Addresses that can be used only in the same link and that are automatically created without setting

anything. Cannot be used out of the router range.

Stateless address Addresses that are created automatically on the basis of the prex notied by a router and the MAC

address of the machine, even in an environment without a DHCP server.

Manual address Addresses that are manually entered. Prex length and a default router address are specied.

Stateful address Addresses that are acquired from the DHCP server.

Setting an IPv6 Address(P. 25)

Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv6 Address(P. 26)

Setting an IPv6 Address

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [IPv6 Settings].

4Select [Use IPv6] and congure the required settings.

Setting Up

[Use IPv6]

Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, deselect the check box.

[Use Stateless Address]

Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, deselect the check

box.

[Use Manual Address]

When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex

length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.

The following addresses cannot be used.

●IPv4-compatible addresses (IPv6 addresses in which the upper 96 bits are "0" with an IPv4 address

contained in the lower 32 bits)

●IPv4-mapped addresses (IPv6 addresses in which the upper 96 bits are "0:0:0:0:ffff:" with an IPv4 address

contained in the lower 32 bits)

[IP Address]

Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Prex Length]

Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.

[Default Router Address]

Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast

address) cannot be entered.

[Use DHCPv6]

Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, deselect the check box.

[Only Acquire Stateful Address Prex]

Select this check box to only retrieve the rst half of the stateful address from the DHCP server using

DHCPv6.

5　Click [OK].

Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv6 Address

When the machine is connected properly, the Remote UI login screen can be displayed from a computer ( Starting

the Remote UI(P. 265) ).

●Even though IP addresses are properly set, if the machine is connected to a switching hub, the machine

might not be connected to the network. In this case, delay the timing of the machine's communication start

and try to make a connection again. Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network(P. 30)

LINKS

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

Setting Up

Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line

7KKL-00S

Specify the IPv4 address to use for the sub line.

●Only IPv4 addresses can be used with the sub line.

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Preferences> <Network> <Sub Line Settings>.

3Select <IP Address Settings> and set the IP address of the sub line.

●You can also set both automatic retrieval and manual retrieval. If you set both and set <Release Address Last

Acquired from DHCP Server When Address Cannot Be Acquired> to <Off>, the manually entered IP address is

used when automatic IP address retrieval fails.

Automatically Assigning the IP Address with DHCP

1Select <IP Address Settings> <Auto Acquire>.

2Select <DHCP>.

●If <DHCP> is selected, communication is performed to check whether network services are being provided,

regardless of whether the environment can use DHCP. It is recommended that you deselect this item if

you are not using DHCP.

Manually Entering the IP Address

1Congure a setting to disable auto-acquisition.

●Select <Auto Acquire> <Off>.

2Select <Manually Acquire>.

3Enter the IP address and subnet mask.

●Enter these values in each screen using the numeric keys, and press .

●When connecting to another network via a router, enter the gateway address and also congure

<Static Routing Settings>. Setting Static Routing(P. 38)

Setting Up

Adapting to the Network Environment

7KKL-00U

The scale and form of a network varies depending on the purpose and use. The machine adopts various technologies

for adapting to as many environments as possible. Consult your network administrator and carry out necessary

settings according to your environment.

Making Ethernet Settings(P. 29)

Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network(P. 30)

Making DNS Settings(P. 31)

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 34)

Setting Static Routing(P. 38)

Other Network Settings(P. 40)

Conguring System Data Communication(P. 43)

Setting Up

Making Ethernet Settings

7KKL-00W

Ethernet is a standard that stipulates communication methods within a LAN. Normally, the communication system

(half-duplex/full-duplex) and Ethernet type (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T) can be set automatically. You can set

them separately by switching the setting to manual operation. Register the settings as necessary.

<Ethernet Driver Settings> exists for both the main line and sub line. Congure each as required.

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Preferences> <Network> <Ethernet Driver Settings>.

●To specify the Ethernet settings for the sub line, select <Preferences> <Network> <Sub Line Settings>

<Ethernet Driver Settings>.

3Select whether to congure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.

●Normally, set <Auto Detect> to <On>. The communication system and Ethernet type are detected and

automatically congured.

Conguring Ethernet settings automatically

1Select <Auto Detect> <On>.

Making Ethernet settings manually

1Congure a setting to disable Auto Detect.

●Select <Auto Detect> <Off>.

2Select <Communication Mode> select the communication mode.

Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a

networking device using half duplex.

Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.

3Select <Ethernet Type> select the Ethernet type.

●Select <10BASE-T>, <100BASE-TX>, or <1000BASE-T> in <Ethernet Type>.

LINKS

Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network(P. 30)

Setting Up

Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network

7KKL-00X

If you intend to implement network redundancy by connecting several switching hubs, a mechanism is necessary to

avoid packet looping. In this case, it is effective to determine the roles of the switching ports, but communication may

not be properly transmitted in cases just after changes such as adding a new device to the network. To connect the

machine to such a network, set the waiting time which is the time until the communication starts.

<Set> <Preferences> <Network> <Waiting Time for Connection at Startup> set the waiting

time

LINKS

Making Ethernet Settings(P. 29)

Setting Up

Making DNS Settings

7KKL-00Y

0YRY-00X 1100-00X 10XJ-00X 1106-00X 10YY-00X 10H3-00X 108A-00X 1116-00X 10H4-00X 0YAS-00X

DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP

address. Congure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring

DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6. Administrator privileges are required for this operation.

●The DHCP optional setting only applies to the main line.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings].

4Congure DNS settings.

Conguring IPv4 DNS

1Click [IPv4 Settings].

2Congure IPv4 DNS settings.

Setting Up

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Acquire Host Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.

[Perform DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP

server.

[Acquire DNS Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire Domain Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.

[Acquire POP Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP server address from the DHCP server.

[Release Address Last Acquired from DHCP Server When Address Cannot Be Acquired]

Deselect the check box to use the manually entered IP address when automatic IP address retrieval

fails.

[DNS Settings]

[Primary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.

[Host Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS

server.

[Domain Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as

"example.com."

[Perform DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is

changed.

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the

[mDNS Name] text box.

3Click [OK].

Conguring IPv6 DNS

1Click [IPv6 Settings].

2Congure IPv6 DNS settings.

●The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to congure the settings. Setting an IPv6

Address(P. 25)

Setting Up

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Acquire DNS Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire Domain Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.

[DNS Settings]

[Primary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be

entered.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast

address) cannot be entered.

[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.

[Host Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS

server.

[Domain Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as

"example.com."

[Perform DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is

changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the

check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless

Address].

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.

[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, deselect the

check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.

3Click [OK].

Setting Up

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP

7KKL-013

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a

network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced

SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.

You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your

network environment and the purpose of use.

SNMPv1

SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this

information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to

ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.

SNMPv3

With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.

Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before conguring SNMPv3 ( Conguring the Key and

Certicate for TLS(P. 225) ).

●SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,

monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction

manuals for your management software.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].

4Specify SNMPv1 settings.

●If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.

Setting Up

[Use SNMPv1]

Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box

is selected.

[Use Dedicated Community]

The exclusive community is a community (group) prepared for managers using device management

software. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and specify [MIB Access Permission]. If you do

not need to use Dedicated Community, deselect the check box.

[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]

Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, deselect

the check box.

[MIB Access Permission]

For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Community Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.

5Select [Use SNMPv3] and congure SNMPv3.

●If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.

1Click [Administrator Settings].

Setting Up

[Use Administrator]

Select the check box to use the Administrator user.

●[Authentication Algorithm] and [Encryption Algorithm] cannot be changed.

[Use Same Password as for Authentication]

Select the check box to use the same password as the password used in user authentication.

2Click [OK].

3Click [User Settings] [Register].

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[MIB Access Permission]

Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Security Settings]

Select [Auth. Yes/Encrypt. Yes], [Auth. Yes/Encrypt. No], or [Auth. No/Encrypt. No] for the desired

combination of authentication and encryption settings.

[Authentication Algorithm]

Select [MD5], [SHA1] or [SHA2] according to your environment. For [SHA2], select from four hash

lengths (224 bit, 256 bit, 384 bit, or 512 bit).

[Encryption Algorithm]

If you have selected [Auth. Yes/Encrypt. Yes] in [Security Settings], select the appropriate encryption

algorithm for your network environment.

[Authentication Password]／[Encryption Password]

Use alphanumeric characters to enter the password in [Authentication Password] or both [Encryption

Password] and [Conrm], depending on the settings in [Security Settings]. Set this for each algorithm

(authentication/encryption).

4Click [OK].

5Click [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].

6Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.

●With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be

monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.

Setting Up

Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via

SNMP. To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.

[Get Printer Management Information from Host]

Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.

To disable monitoring of the printer management information, deselect the check box.

7Click [OK].

Disabling SNMPv1

●If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine

information via the printer driver.

Using the control panel

●You can enable or disable the SNMP settings from <Set>. <SNMP Settings>(P. 370)

Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3

●If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to

[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in

SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features

that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

Setting Up

Setting Static Routing

7KKL-014

You can set static routing to manually specify the network route.

For example, when sending data from a machine connected to other networks via a router with both the main line and

sub line, the data can be sent via the gateway of the sub line instead of the gateway of the main line that is normally

used.

*1 Main line gateway

*2 Sub line gateway

*3 Static routing settings

●When connecting to another network via a router, enter the gateway address in [IPv4 Settings]/[Sub Line

Settings: Basic Settings] in advance. Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23) Setting the IPv4 Address of the

Sub Line(P. 27)

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Static Routing Settings].

4Select [Use Static Routing].

5Click [Register] in the line of the static routing information to register.

Setting Up

●[Edit] or [Delete] is displayed for lines that already have information registered.

6Enter [Destination Address] and [Gateway Address] click [OK] [OK].

●Press each button and enter the required setting.

●The route order is displayed in [Priority] on the static routing settings screen.

●You can register up to 16 devices that can be connected.

●The success/failure of the static routing settings is displayed in [Routing Registration].

●When failure is indicated in [Routing Registration], select the static routing settings that failed and set the

address and gateway address again.

Setting Up

Other Network Settings

7KKL-015

Set the following according to your network environment.

Making SNTP Settings(P. 40)

Monitoring the Machine From Device Management Systems(P. 41)

Specifying the Dedicated Port Settings(P. 41)

Making SNTP Settings

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network.

If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specied intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be

maintained. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before

conguring SNTP ( Setting the Date/Time(P. 7) ). SNTP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.

●The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [SNTP Settings].

4Select [Use SNTP] and specify the required settings.

[Use SNTP]

Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, deselect the check box.

[Polling Interval]

Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.

[NTP Server Address]

Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host

name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).

5Click [OK].

Setting Up

Monitoring the Machine From Device Management Systems

When Canon device management software is employed, you can collect/manage various information such as setting

information and device failure information on the network through a server.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Multicast Discovery Settings].

4Select [Respond to Discovery] and specify the required settings.

[Respond to Discovery]

Select the check box to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery

packets and enable monitoring by device management software.

[Scope Name]

To include the machine into a specic scope, enter alphanumeric characters for the scope name.

5Click [OK].

Specifying the Dedicated Port Settings

You can specify whether to congure/refer to detailed information of the machine from the Canon drivers or utility

software

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Dedicated Port Settings].

4Select [Use Dedicated Port] and set the authentication method.

[Mode 1]

Setting Up

Select the check box when the authentication settings mode cannot be selected in the software being used,

such as the driver or device management software.

[Mode 2]

Select the check box when the authentication settings mode can be selected in the software being used, such

as the driver or device management software.

5Click [OK].

●Some applications that use the dedicated port may become unable to be used if [Use Dedicated Port] is

deselected.

●If you select [Mode 2], communication using the dedicated port uses a secure mode. Accordingly, you may

not be able to connect from software such as drivers or device management software.

LINKS

<Network>(P. 365)

Setting Up

Conguring System Data Communication

7KKL-0K1

The settings described in this section are required to use the sub line for performing DNS name resolution and data

communication via a proxy. Administrator privileges are required to specify these settings.

●The DNS server address setting and proxy settings for the sub line can only be used for specic system data

communication, such as using the sub line to access a rmware distribution server. They cannot be used for

a regular internet connection. When using a DNS server or proxy server for the sub line for applications

other than system data communication, register the addresses and port numbers to use with the sub line in

the settings of the main line.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Settings for System Data Communication].

4Specify the required settings.

Setting the DNS of the sub line

1Enter the IP address of the DNS server in [IPv4 DNS Settings], according to your environment.

Setting the proxy of the sub line

1Select [Use Proxy].

2Enter the address and port number of the proxy server, according to your environment.

3To use proxy authentication, select [Use Proxy Authentication] and enter the user name and password.

5Click [OK].

Setting Up

Installing Drivers

7KKL-017

140K-015 PMW-INDR

Install the various drivers and associated software on your computer.

1Make preparations before installation.

●Equip the main unit with optional equipment ( Optional Equipment(P. 552) ).

●Install the drivers and software to use from the included CD/DVD-ROM or by downloading them from the

Canon website for your country/region accessed via the URL indicated below.

(https://global.canon/en/support/)

●The latest versions of drivers and software are uploaded to the Canon website when they become

available. Download them as needed after checking the operating environment for your machine.

●Some functions of drivers and software may not be available depending on the model of the machine or

operating environment.

●Some drivers may not be fully compatible with the operating system you are using. Check the driver

compatibility with latest versions of operating systems on the Canon website.

2Carry out installation of the drivers.

●For details on the installation, see the manuals for the drivers and software you want to use.

●If communication via the relevant IP address is not permitted in [Firewall Settings], you cannot install the

driver. For more information, see Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215) .

●After you have installed the driver, if communication via the IP address of the computer you have installed it

on is not permitted in [Firewall Settings], you cannot print from that computer.

Setting Up

Conguring E-Mail Print Settings

7KKL-019

0YRY-017 0UUY-00Y 0UW1-00Y 1100-017 0X7F-017 0X7H-017 10XJ-017 0X6E-017 0X6W-017 1106-017 0X7C-017 0X7A-017 10YY-017 0WXY-017 0X7E-017 10H3-017 0WR6-017 0WR7-017 108A-017 1116-017 10H4-017 0WR5-017 0WR8-017 0YWJ-016 0YWH-017 0YWR-016 0YWK-017 0YWE-017 0YWF-017 0YAS-017 PMW-STCM

This section describes how to specify the settings for receiving and printing e-mails on this machine. Use a computer

to specify the settings for receiving e-mails and the control panel of the machine to specify the settings for printing e-

mails. Administrator privileges are required in order to congure these settings.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Send] [Network Settings - E-Mail Settings].

4Specify the settings for E-Mail Print.

When performing E-Mail Print by using SMTP protocol

If e-mails are sent to the machine via SMTP, the machine prints the e-mails immediately after receiving them.

Enable this function when you want to forward fax documents from Canon multifunction printers to this

machine and print them on the machine.

[SMTP RX]

Select the check box to enable E-Mail Print by using the SMTP protocol.

Setting Up

When performing E-Mail Print from POP mail server

When the e-mail receiving starts, all e-mails stored in the mailbox of the mail server are printed. If you send

e-mails that you want to print to the machine in advance, you can automatically print the e-mails at regular

time intervals or print all stored e-mails in an arbitrary timing.

●We recommend using the mail address exclusively for E-Mail Print because all e-mails received into the

machine are deleted from the mail server.

Conditions of use for POP protocol

●The POP mail server must support the UIDL command. For details, contact your network administrator or

server administrator.

[POP RX]

Select the check box to enable E-Mail Print from the POP mail server. You can also specify this setting by

using <Use POP RX> in the setting menu of the control panel.

[POP Server]

Enter the mail server name or IP address for receiving e-mails.

[POP Login Name]

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the user name used to connect to the mail server.

[POP Password]/[Conrm]

When setting a password for connecting to the mail server, enter the same password in [POP Password] and

[Conrm] using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

[POP Interval]

Specify the interval for automatically connecting to the mail server in minutes. New e-mails in the mailbox of

the mail server are automatically received and printed at the specied time intervals. You can also specify this

setting by using <POP Interval> in the setting menu of the control panel.

Preventing E-mails from Being Automatically Received

●Set [POP Interval] to [0]. If you set [0], you must manually receive e-mails.

Setting Up

[POP RX]

Specify the port number of the mail server that receives e-mails.

Setting authentication and encryption

[Allow TLS (POP)]

Select the check box to encrypt the communication with the POP server using TLS.

[POP Authentication Method]

Set the authentication method of the POP server. Select [APOP] to encrypt the password when performing

authentication or [POP AUTH] to perform user authentication via e-mail reception (POP).

[Conrm TLS Certicate for POP RX]

Select the check box to conrm whether the TLS server certicate is valid when receiving with POP. The

machine veries that the certicate has not expired or been revoked and checks the certicate chain for

problems.

[Add CN to Verication Items]

Select the check box to also check the CN (Common Name) when checking the certicate used for POP

reception.

[Allow TLS (SMTP RX)]

Select [Always TLS] or [On] to encrypt communication with TLS when receiving e-mail or I-fax using the SMTP

server function.

5Click [OK].

Setting Up

Basic Operations

Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 49

Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 51

Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 52

Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 55

Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 57

Multi-Purpose Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 58

Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 59

Control Panel .................................................................................................................................................. 60

Turning ON the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 63

Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 64

Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................................................... 65

Basic Paper Loading Method .......................................................................................................................... 66

Loading Envelopes .......................................................................................................................................... 74

Loading Postcards .......................................................................................................................................... 78

Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................... 80

Using the Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 82

Basic Screens .................................................................................................................................................. 83

Items Displayed on the <Home> Screen .................................................................................................. 85

Basic Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 87

Entering Characters ........................................................................................................................................ 90

Logging into the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 92

Specifying Paper Size and Type ........................................................................................................................... 93

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ...................................................................................... 94

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-purpose Tray .............................................................................. 96

Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray ................................................ 98

Registering Free Size Paper (Custom Size Paper) .......................................................................................... 100

Automatically Selecting the Appropriate Paper Source for a Specic Function ............................................. 101

Customizing the Display ................................................................................................................................... 102

Customizing the <Home> Screen .................................................................................................................. 103

Switching the Displayed Language ............................................................................................................... 104

Setting Sounds ................................................................................................................................................... 105

Entering Sleep Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 106

Basic Operations

7KKL-01C

This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the control panel or how to load the paper, that are

frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.

◼Parts and Their Functions

This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys

on the control panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 51)

◼Turning ON the Machine

This section describes how to turn the machine ON or OFF. Turning ON the Machine(P. 63)

◼Using the Control Panel

This section describes how to use the keys on the control panel to perform various operations, such as adjusting and

checking the settings. Using the Control Panel(P. 82)

◼Logging into the Machine

This section describes how to log in when a login screen is displayed. Logging into the Machine(P. 92)

Basic Operations

◼Loading Paper

This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper(P. 65)

◼Customizing the <Home> Screen

This section describes how to rearrange the displayed items in order to make it easier to use screens shown in the

<Home> Screen. Customizing the <Home> Screen(P. 103)

◼Specifying the Sound Settings

This section describes how to adjust the volume of various machine sounds, such as those produced when an error

occurs. Setting Sounds(P. 105)

◼Entering Sleep Mode

This section describes how to set sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 106)

Basic Operations

Parts and Their Functions

7KKL-01E

This section describes the parts of the machine (front side and interior) and how they function. This section also

describes how to load paper, as well as the names and usage of the keys on the control panel. Read this section for

tips on how to use the machine properly.

Front Side(P. 52)

Back Side(P. 55)

Interior(P. 57)

Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 58)

Paper Drawer(P. 59)

Control Panel(P. 60)

Basic Operations

Front Side

7KKL-01F

Output tray

Printed paper is output to the output tray.

Control Panel

The control panel consists of numeric keys, a display, status indicators, etc. You can perform all the

operations and specify settings from the control panel.

Control Panel(P. 60)

Basic Screens(P. 83)

Power switch

Press the power switch to turn ON and turn OFF the machine.

Turning ON the Machine(P. 63)

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 64)

Front cover

Open the front cover when replacing toner cartridges. Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 414)

USB memory port (Front-right side of the machine)

You can connect devices such as a USB memory device to the machine. Connecting a USB Memory

Device(P. 53)

●Do not connect an IC card reader to this port. Connect it to the port on the back side of the machine which

is for connecting a USB device.

Basic Operations

●Some types of memory media may not be able to save data correctly.

●The USB port (front-right side of the machine) supports USB 2.0.

Right cover

Open the right cover when clearing paper jams. Clearing Paper Jams(P. 490)

Ventilation slot

Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in

front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.

Lift handles

Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 421)

Multi-purpose tray

Load the paper into the multi-purpose tray when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from

that which is loaded in the paper drawer.

Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 58)

Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66)

Paper drawer

Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer.

Paper Drawer(P. 59)

Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66)

Left cover

Open the left cover when replacing the waste toner container.

Connecting a USB Memory Device

You can connect a USB memory device to the USB port located on the right side of the machine, and directly

print data from the USB memory device.

Using Memory Media(P. 138)

●Make sure that the USB memory device is oriented properly when connecting it to the machine. If it is not

connected properly, it may cause the USB memory device or machine to malfunction.

Basic Operations

●Make sure to follow the proper procedure when removing the USB memory device. Inserting/Removing

Memory Media(P. 138) Failure to do so may cause the USB memory device or machine to malfunction.

●The machine only supports FAT32/exFAT format USB memory devices.

Unsupported devices and usages

●Memory media with security functions

●Memory media that does not meet the USB specication

●Memory card readers connected via USB

●Connecting memory media via an extension cable

●Connecting memory media via a USB hub

Basic Operations

Back Side

7KKL-01H

ACT indicator

The ACT indicator blinks while data is being sent or received.

LAN port

Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc. Setting up the Network

Environment(P. 8)

LNK indicator

The LNK indicator blinks green when the machine is properly connected to a network.

USB port (for computer connection)

Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.

●The USB port (for computer connection) supports USB 2.0.

USB port (for USB device connection)

You can connect devices such as an IC card reader or an external hard disk to the machine.

●The USB port (for USB device connection) supports USB 2.0.

Ventilation slot

Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in

front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.

Power socket

Connect the power cord.

Basic Operations

Rating label

The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. When a

Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 501)

Basic Operations

Interior

7KKL-01J

Toner Cartridge slots

Load the toner cartridges in these slots: Y (yellow) in the leftmost slot, followed by M (magenta), C (cyan), and

K (black). Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 414)

Transfer unit

If there is a paper jam inside the machine, raise the transport guide to remove the jammed paper.

Clearing Paper Jams(P. 490)

Transport guide

If paper has jammed inside the machine, lift up the transfer unit and open this guide to remove the jammed

paper. Clearing Paper Jams(P. 490)

Basic Operations

Multi-Purpose Tray

7KKL-01K

Use the multi-purpose tray when you want to print on a type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, such as

labels or envelopes.

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine. Press the lock release lever that is marked with arrow in the illustration to release the lock and slide

the paper guides.

Paper tray

Pull out the paper tray when loading paper.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 70)

Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 76)

Loading Postcards in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 78)

Basic Operations

Paper Drawer

7KKL-01L

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine. Press the lock release levers that are marked with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks

and slide the paper guides.

Paper level indicator

Indicates the remaining amount of paper. The mark moves downward as the remaining amount of paper

decreases.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 66)

Basic Operations

Control Panel

7KKL-01R

This section describes the names and usage of the keys on the control panel.

Display

You can view the operation and error statuses of this machine, the amount remaining in the toner cartridges,

and other conditions. Basic Screens(P. 83)

Home key

Press to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as Memory

Media Print and paper settings. Items Displayed on the <Home> Screen(P. 85)

Back key

Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the

settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.

Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)

Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Characters(P. 90)

[*] key

Press to switch the type of text that is entered.

Data indicator

Blinks while an operation is being performed, such as data transmission or printing. Remains steadily lit

when there are documents waiting to be processed.

Basic Operations

Error indicator

Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.

●If the Error indicator blinks, follow the instructions that appear on the display. Troubleshooting(P. 443)

●If the Error indicator remains steadily lit, contact your dealer or service representative.

Energy Saver key

Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press

the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 106)

Status Monitor key

Press to check the printing status, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such as the IP

address of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the remaining amount of

paper and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether any errors occurred. <Status

Monitor> Screen(P. 83)

[ID] key

Press after entering the ID and PIN to log on when Department ID Management is enabled. After you nish

using the machine, press this key again to log off. Logging into the Machine(P. 92)

Clear key

Press to delete the entered numbers and text.

Stop key

Press to cancel printing and other operations.

[#] key

Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".

NFC (Near Field Communication) mark

You can also use functions such as printing by waving a mobile device with Canon PRINT Business installed

over this mark. Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 145)

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen. When entering numbers, press to move the

cursor to the left.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately above the currently selected item. When

changing setting values, press to increase a value.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen. When entering numbers, press to move the

cursor to the right.

Basic Operations

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately below the currently selected item. When

changing setting values, press to decrease a value.

[ ] key

Press to apply settings or specied details.

Basic Operations

Turning ON the Machine

7KKL-01S

This section describes how to turn ON the machine.

1Make sure that the power plug is rmly inserted into the power outlet.

2Press the power switch.

➠The startup screen appears on the display.

●You can select the screen displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON. <Default Screen After

Startup/Restoration>(P. 359)

●The response of the keys on the control panel may not be optimal immediately after the machine is turned

ON.

●If the machine is connected to a powered off Mac computer by USB cable, the computer may turn on

automatically when this machine does. In this case, disconnect the USB cable from the machine. You may

also be able to solve this problem by using a USB hub between the machine and the computer.

LINKS

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 64)

Basic Operations

Turning OFF the Machine

7KKL-01U

This section describes how to turn OFF the machine.

●You can shut down the machine from the Remote UI. Turning OFF/Restarting the Machine(P. 272)

1Press the power switch.

●The machine may take some time to completely shut down. Do not remove the power plug until the display

and indicators turn OFF.

●To restart the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds after the system is turned off, and then turn the machine

back ON. When <Quick Startup Settings for Main Power> is enabled, wait for at least 20 seconds to restart

the machine. <Quick Startup Settings for Main Power>(P. 361)

LINKS

Turning ON the Machine(P. 63)

Basic Operations

Loading Paper

7KKL-01W

You can load the paper into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. For more information about available paper types

and sizes, see Available Paper(P. 542) . To obtain the optimum printing results, make sure to correctly specify the

size and type of paper that is loaded. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 93)

Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66)

Loading Envelopes(P. 74)

Loading Postcards(P. 78)

Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 80)

●Before using any paper, conrm the precautions regarding paper and the correct way to store it.

Available Paper(P. 542)

●Loading paper while stock remains may cause a multiple sheet feed or a paper jam. If there is paper

remaining, it is recommended that you wait until all of it has been used before loading more paper.

●Do not load different sizes or types of paper together.

LINKS

Registering Free Size Paper (Custom Size Paper)(P. 100)

Paper Feeder PF-D(P. 553)

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV(P. 554)

Basic Operations

Basic Paper Loading Method

7KKL-01X

This section describes the general method for loading paper such as plain or recycled paper. Load frequently used

paper types or sizes in the paper drawer. When temporarily using paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load it

in the multi-purpose tray.

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 66)

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 70)

●For the optional Paper Feeder PF-D or Cassette Feeding Unit-AV, follow the procedure of paper drawer to

load paper.

●If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load, follow those

instructions.

●Paper may overlap when it is fed or a paper jam may occur, depending on the cut surface of the paper.

Changing the paper orientation and loading it again may reduce the effect of the cut surface.

●If paper runs out and printing is stopped, load a new paper stack. Printing restarts after the new paper stack

is loaded.

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer

Loading Standard Size Paper(P. 66)

Loading a Custom Size Paper(P. 68)

Paper Orientation

See the table below to load available paper in correct orientation.

Paper Orientation

A4, B5, A5 (landscape), A6, Legal*, Letter, Statement, Executive, Ocio*, Brazil-Ocio*, Mexico-Ocio*,

Goverment Letter, Goverment Legal*, Australia Foolscap*, Foolscap/Folio*, 16K, F4A*, Indian-Legal*, Custom

(landscape), Free (landscape)

A5 (portrait), Custom (portrait), Free (portrait)

* Can be loaded only in the optional Paper Feeder PF-D or Cassette Feeding Unit-AV.

◼Loading Standard Size Paper

To load paper whose size is found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure. For

paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings, see Loading a Custom Size Paper(P. 68) .

1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

Basic Operations

2Adjust the positions of the paper guides to the paper size you want to use.

●Press the lock release lever ( ) to align the projection ( ) to the appropriate paper size marking.

3Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the paper guide

on the left side of the paper drawer.

●Insert the paper with the print side face up.

●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.

Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper

●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can

cause paper jams.

Basic Operations

●When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 80) .

4Set the paper drawer.

»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 94)

When changing the paper size or type

●The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Free>, respectively. If you load a

different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the setting. If you do not change the

paper size or type setting, the machine cannot print properly.

Printing on the back side of printed paper (2nd Side of 2-Sided Page)

●You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

multi-purpose tray, with the side to print face down (previously printed side face up). Then select the paper

type and select <Yes> for <Enable settings for 2nd side of 2-sided page?>.

●Use only the paper printed with this machine.

◼Loading a Custom Size Paper

To load custom size paper or other paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use

the following procedure.

1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

Basic Operations

2Slide the paper guides apart.

●Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.

3Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the right side of

the paper drawer.

●Place the paper stack with the print side face up.

●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.

Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper

●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can

cause paper jams.

●When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 80) .

4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.

Basic Operations

●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the

edges of the paper.

Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper

●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

5Set the paper drawer.

»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 94)

When changing the paper size or type

●If you load a different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do

not change the paper size or type setting, the machine cannot print properly.

Printing on the back side of printed paper (2nd Side of 2-Sided Page)

●You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

multi-purpose tray, with the side to print face down (previously printed side face up). Then select the paper

type and select <Yes> for <Enable settings for 2nd side of 2-sided page?>.

●Use only the paper printed with this machine.

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray

Paper Orientation

See the table below to load available paper in correct orientation.

Paper Orientation

A4, B5, A5 (landscape), A6, Legal, Letter, Statement, Executive, Ocio, Brazil-Ocio, Mexico-Ocio, Goverment

Letter, Goverment Legal, Australia Foolscap, Foolscap/Folio, 16K, F4A, Indian-Legal, Custom (landscape), Free

(landscape), Postcard, Reply Postcard, 4 on 1 Postcard, Envelope

A5 (portrait), Custom (portrait), Free (portrait)

Basic Operations

1Open the cover.

2Pull out the paper tray.

3Spread the paper guides apart.

●Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.

4Insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray until the paper stops.

●Insert the paper with the print side face down.

●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.

Do not exceed the load limit guide when loading paper

●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guide ( ). Loading too much paper can

cause paper jams.

Basic Operations

●If you use envelopes, postcards or paper with a logo mark, pay attention to the orientation when loading

them in the paper source.

Loading Envelopes(P. 74)

Loading Postcards(P. 78)

Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 80)

5Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.

●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the

edges of the paper.

Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper

●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 96)

When changing the paper size or type

●If you load a different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the setting. If you do

not change the paper size or type setting, the machine cannot print properly.

Printing on the back side of printed paper (2nd Side of 2-Sided Page)

●You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

multi-purpose tray, with the side to print face down (previously printed side face up). Then select the paper

type and select <Yes> for <Enable settings for 2nd side of 2-sided page?>.

●Use only the paper printed with this machine.

Basic Operations

LINKS

Available Paper(P. 542)

Basic Operations

Loading Envelopes

7KKL-01Y

Load envelopes in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. When printing on envelopes, to prevent paper jams and

wrinkles, make sure to atten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of

envelopes and which side is face up.

Before Loading Envelopes(P. 74)

Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 76)

●This section describes how to load envelopes with the proper orientation, as well as procedures that you

need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading

envelopes in the multi-purpose tray, see Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66) .

Before Loading Envelopes

Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.

●Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their aps, as the glue may melt due to the heat and

pressure of the xing unit.

●Envelopes may become creased, depending on the type of envelopes or the conditions in which they are

stored.

●Streaks may appear where envelopes overlap.

1Flatten any curls.

●Pick up about ve envelopes. Flatten any curls, and loosen the stiff areas in the four corners.

Basic Operations

●Repeat this step ve times for each set of ve envelopes.

2Smooth the envelopes out, and remove any air inside them.

●Place the envelopes on a at surface, and move your hands in the direction of the arrows to remove the air

inside the envelopes.

●Repeat this step ve times for each set of ve envelopes.

3Press down on the four sides.

●Press down rmly on all four sides. In particular, carefully press down on the side facing the direction in

which the envelopes will be fed. Press down rmly so that the ap stays at.

●Failure to rmly press down on the ap may result in a paper jam. If this happens, press down rmly on all

four sides of each individual envelope.

Basic Operations

4Align the envelopes on a at surface.

●Check that no envelopes are tucked underneath the ap of the envelope above or below them.

Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray

Load the envelopes as indicated below, with the front side of the envelopes (the side without the glued areas)

face down (recommended).

Yougatanaga 3, ISO-5, Monarch, No.10, DL

Close the aps, and load the envelopes so that their aps are on the near side.

Nagagata 3

Load the envelopes so that their aps are on the right side.

Basic Operations

●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guide. If the envelopes are not fed properly

even if they have been prepared according to the procedures, load the envelopes individually in the multi-

purpose tray instead of loading several envelopes together.

●Do not print on the reverse side of the envelopes (the side with the glued areas).

●When you print on envelopes, remove them from the output tray 10 at a time.

Basic Operations

Loading Postcards

7KKL-020

Before loading postcards, make some preparations such as attening any curls on them. Also pay attention to the

orientation of postcards and which side is face up.

Before Loading Postcards(P. 78)

Loading Postcards in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 78)

●This section describes how to load postcards with the proper orientation, as well as procedures that you

need to complete before loading postcards. For a description of the general procedure for loading postcards

in the multi-purpose tray, see Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66) .

Before Loading Postcards

Before loading the postcards, atten any curls on them. With curls remaining, printouts may be skewed or images may

be printed distorted. If the postcards curl downward, a paper jam is more likely to occur.

●The inkjet printable postcard cannot be used.

Loading Postcards in the Multi-Purpose Tray

Like the images below, insert the postcard with the print side face down.

Postcard

Insert the postcard with the upper end to the left.

Basic Operations

Reply Postcard

Unfold the postcard and insert it with the upper end toward you.

4 on 1 Postcard

Insert the postcard with the upper end to the left.

●Do not exceed the load limit guide when loading postcards. If the postcards are not fed properly, even if

they have been prepared according to the procedures, load the postcards individually in the multi-purpose

tray instead of loading several sheets together.

Basic Operations

Loading Preprinted Paper

7KKL-021

When you load paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper regardless of

whether you use the paper drawer or the multi-purpose tray. Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on

the same side as the logo.

Loading Paper with Logos in the Paper Drawer(P. 80)

Loading Paper with Logos in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 81)

●This section describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper orientation. For a description of the

general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see Basic Paper Loading

Method(P. 66) .

●Proper manner of loading preprinted paper when <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>

- Paper drawer: the logo side face down

- Paper source other than the paper drawer: the logo side face up

Loading Paper with Logos in the Paper Drawer

The loading method varies depending on whether the orientation of the logo printed paper is portrait or landscape.

Load the paper with the logo printed side (the side to print) face up, as shown in the following illustrations.

Portrait orientation paper The printing results

Landscape orientation paper The printing results

Basic Operations

Loading Paper with Logos in the Multi-Purpose Tray

The loading method varies depending on whether the orientation of the logo printed paper is portrait or landscape.

Load the paper with the logo printed side (the side to print) face down, as shown in the following illustrations.

Portrait orientation paper The printing results

Landscape orientation paper The printing results

Basic Operations

Using the Control Panel

7KKL-022

You can use the display and keys of the control panel to congure machine settings or operate functions. This section

describes basic usage of the display and keys.

Basic Screens(P. 83)

Basic Operation(P. 87)

Entering Characters(P. 90)

Adjust the brightness of the display

Backlight Brightness

If it is hard to see the content of the display, adjust the brightness by operating the control panel.

<Set> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Backlight Brightness> adjust the brightness

with or

LINKS

Control Panel(P. 60)

Basic Operations

Basic Screens

7KKL-023

This section describes the various screens displayed on the display.

Home

<Home> Screen

The <Home> screen is displayed when you press (Home). The <Home> screen or settings screen appears on

the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as <Memory Media> and <Mobile Portal>. You can also use

the display to check information such as error messages and the machine's operation status. Items

Displayed on the <Home> Screen(P. 85)

<Menu> Screen

Select <Set> to display the <Menu> screen. Press this button rst to make changes for each setting, such as

management settings, display settings, and network settings.

Current menu level

The screen name of the current level is displayed.

Setting item list

Setting items that belong to the current menu level are displayed in a list.

●When there is no menu under the lower level, the setting screen is displayed.

Status Monitor

<Status Monitor> Screen

When you press (Status Monitor), the <Status Monitor> screen is displayed. On this screen, you can check

the printing status, as well as the remaining amount of toner and paper.

Basic Operations

Error Screen

In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-

screen instructions to solve the problem. Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 458)

Example: When a paper jam occurs

●Select <Display Order (Home)> to customize the <Home> screen by rearranging the buttons. Customizing

the Display(P. 102)

●You can change settings regarding the screen display, such as which screen appears immediately after

turning ON the machine, and whether the message appears for remaining paper and toner. <Display

Settings>(P. 359)

●You can set the screen to be displayed when a certain amount of time has passed without operation.

<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 362)

LINKS

Control Panel(P. 60)

Basic Operations

Home

Items Displayed on the <Home> Screen

7KKL-0KC

This section describes the items displayed on the <Home> screen.

Wi-Fi icon

This icon is displayed when the machine is connected to wireless LAN.

Amount remaining in the toner cartridges

The toner levels of the toner cartridges are displayed. They are not displayed when operating the <Home>

screen.

<Set>

<Function Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other machine settings start from this button. Settings/

Registration(P. 298)

This button enables you to specify the size and type of paper loaded in the paper drawer and multi-purpose

tray. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 93)

Select this to print les on USB memory. Using Memory Media(P. 138)

<Print>

You can print documents held in the machine and check the status of print jobs.

Select this to connect the machine to a mobile device. Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 144)

You can change the display order of the buttons on the <Home> screen. Customizing the <Home>

Screen(P. 103)

You can update the rmware via the Internet. Updating the Firmware(P. 282)

Basic Operations

You can display the total number of sheets printed in color and black-and-white. Checking the Number of

Pages for Print(P. 440)

You can also check the serial number of the machine, the IP address, and other device information such as

information on optional equipment.

Basic Operations

Basic Operation

7KKL-025

Even though functions and settings are different, the operation methods for buttons displayed on the screen and the

procedure to select items are the same. This section describes the operation methods for buttons frequently displayed

on the screen as well as how to select items.

Using /

Scrolling the Screen

The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information ts on one screen. If

the scroll bar is displayed, use / to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are

inverted when it is selected.

Changing Setting Values

Use / to enter values. If is displayed at the upper left of the screen, you can enter values directly

using the numeric keys. Entering Characters(P. 90)

Basic Operations

●Values in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.

Using /

Proceeding to the Next Screen/Returning to the Previous Screen

Press to proceed to the next screen. Press to return to the previous screen.

●You can also proceed to the next screen by pressing , and return to the previous screen by pressing

(Back).

Changing Setting Values

Use / to adjust the slider scale.

Moving the Cursor

Use / to enter text and values. Entering Characters(P. 90)

Using

Press to apply a setting.

Using the Numeric Keys

Use the numeric keys to enter text and values. Entering Characters(P. 90)

●You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language: <Display

Settings>(P. 359)

Basic Operations

●You can change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specied

length of time: <Function After Auto Reset>(P. 362)

●You can change a variety of accessibility-related settings, such as the scroll speed: <Accessibility>(P. 379)

LINKS

Control Panel(P. 60)

Entering Characters(P. 90)

Basic Operations

Entering Characters

7KKL-026

Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.

Switching the Type of Text

Press to switch the type of text that is entered.

●You can also select <Entry Mode> and press to switch the type of text.

Types of Text That Can Be Entered

Text that can be entered is listed below.

Key A a 12

@ . - _ / 1

ABC abc 2

Basic Operations

DEF def 3

GHI ghi 4

JKL jkl 5

MNO mno 6

PQRS pqrs 7

TUV tuv 8

WXYZ wxyz 9

(Not available) 0

(space) -.*#!",;:^`_=/|'?$@%&+\~()[]{}<> (Not available)

●Press or select <Symbol> and press when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to

display enterable symbols in the screen. Use / / / to select the symbol you want to enter,

and press .

Deleting Text

One character is deleted each time (Clear) is pressed. Press and hold (Clear) to delete all of the entered

text.

Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)

Press or to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and press .

Example of Entering Text and Numbers

Example: "Canon-1"

1Press repeatedly until <A> is selected.

2Press repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.

3Press repeatedly until <a> is selected.

4Press repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.

5Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.

6Press repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.

7Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.

8Press repeatedly until the symbol "-" is selected.

9Press repeatedly until <12> is selected.

10 Press .

11 Select <Apply> and press .

Basic Operations

Logging into the Machine

7KKL-027

0YRY-022 1100-022 10XJ-022 1106-022 10YY-022 10H3-022 108A-022 1116-022 10H4-022 0YAS-022

If Department ID Management is enabled or System Manager IDs are enabled, you must log in before using the

machine. When the login screen appears, use the procedure below to enter the Department ID and PIN.

●If <Auto Reset Time> is set, the user is automatically logged out when no operations are performed for a

specied period. <Auto Reset Time>(P. 362)

1Select <Department ID> or <System Manager ID>.

2Enter the ID and press .

3Select <PIN>.

4Enter the PIN and press .

5Press .

➠When login is successful, the machine functions become available.

●Log out after use.

LINKS

Using the Control Panel(P. 82)

Customizing the Display(P. 102)

Managing Users(P. 174)

Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Basic Operations

Specifying Paper Size and Type

7KKL-028

You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper

settings when you load paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 94)

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 96)

Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 98)

Registering Free Size Paper (Custom Size Paper)(P. 100)

Automatically Selecting the Appropriate Paper Source for a Specic Function (P. 101)

●If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.

Batch importing/batch exporting

●<Paper Settings> can only be imported from/exported to the same series machines. Importing/Exporting

the Setting Data(P. 276)

●<Paper Settings> is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting.

Importing/Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Basic Operations

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer

7KKL-029

PMW-SPDR

1Load the paper in the paper drawer. Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66)

When you open the paper drawer, the current paper settings are displayed on the top of the screen.

●If <Conrm When Loading Paper in Drawer> is set to <On>, the screen prompting the user to check the

paper settings is displayed when the paper drawer is inserted into the machine. <Conrm When Loading

Paper in Drawer>(P. 359)

●To congure the paper settings later, select <Paper Settings> on the <Home> screen.

2Check the paper size that is displayed.

●If the displayed paper size is different from the loaded paper size, the paper may not be loaded properly.

Load the paper again.

3If the displayed paper size/type is different from the loaded paper size/type, select

<Paper Settings>, and select the paper source in which paper is loaded.

4Select the paper size .

About <Free Size>

●If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in

the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper. <Ppr Size Mismatch for

Free Size Ppr Src>(P. 391)

When loading custom size paper

0UUY-023 0UW1-023 0YRY-02C 0X7F-02A 0X7H-02A 1100-02C 0X6E-02A 0X6W-02A 10XJ-02C 0X7C-02A 0X7A-02A 1106-02C 0WXY-02A 0X7E-02A 10YY-02C 10H3-02C 0WR6-02A 0WR7-02A 108A-02C 1116-02C 10H4-02C 0WR5-02A 0WR8-02A 0YWJ-029 0YWH-02A 0YWR-029 0YWK-02A 0YWE-02A 0YWF-02A 0YAS-02E

Basic Operations

Specify the size of paper loaded in the paper drawer.

1Select <Custom Size>.

2Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

●Select <X> or <Y> to specify the length of each side using the numeric keys or / .

●By registering frequently used paper sizes to the <S1> to <S5> buttons, they can be recalled by

selecting <Registered Sizes>. Registering Free Size Paper (Custom Size Paper)(P. 100)

3Select <Apply>.

5Select the paper type.

About <Free>

●If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine

perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the

paper type actually loaded in the machine.

●When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when

the paper type is [Plain 1].

●To check the detailed settings for a paper type, select <Details> select the paper type to check.

LINKS

Hardware Specications(P. 539)

Basic Operations

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-purpose

Tray

7KKL-02A

PMW-SPMT

●A paper jam or other printing problems may occur if the size and type of paper specied in the printer driver

do not match those of the actual paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.

1Load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose

Tray(P. 70)

➠The screen for specifying the paper size and type is displayed.

2Specify the paper size.

About <Free Size>

●If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in

the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper. <Ppr Size Mismatch for

Free Size Ppr Src>(P. 391)

●If the displayed paper size is different from the loaded paper size, the paper may not be loaded properly.

Load the paper again.

When loading standard size paper

Select the paper size from <Paper Size>.

When loading custom size paper

0UUY-024 0UW1-024 0YRY-02E 0X7F-02C 0X7H-02C 1100-02E 0X6E-02C 0X6W-02C 10XJ-02E 0X7C-02C 0X7A-02C 1106-02E 0WXY-02C 0X7E-02C 10YY-02E 10H3-02E 0WR6-02C 0WR7-02C 108A-02E 1116-02E 10H4-02E 0WR5-02C 0WR8-02C 0YWJ-02A 0YWH-02C 0YWR-02A 0YWK-02C 0YWE-02C 0YWF-02C 0YAS-02F

1Select <Custom Size>.

2Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

Basic Operations

●Select <X> or <Y> to specify the length of each side using the numeric keys or / .

●By registering frequently used paper sizes to the <S1> to <S5> buttons, they can be recalled by

selecting <Registered Sizes>. Registering Free Size Paper (Custom Size Paper)(P. 100)

3Press <Apply>.

When loading envelopes

1Select the type of envelopes.

3Select the paper type.

About <Free>

●If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine

perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the

paper type actually loaded in the machine.

●When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when

the paper type is [Plain 1].

●To check the detailed settings for a paper type, select <Details> select the paper type to check.

LINKS

Hardware Specications(P. 539)

Basic Operations

Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for

the Multi-purpose Tray

7KKL-02C

You can register default paper settings for the multi-purpose tray. Registering default settings can save yourself the

effort of having to specify the settings each time you load the same paper into the multi-purpose tray.

●After the default paper setting is registered, the paper setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded,

and the same setting is always used. If you load a different paper size or type without changing the paper

settings, the machine may not print properly. To avoid this problem, select <Specify When Loading Paper> in

step 3, and then load the paper.

1Select <Paper Settings> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Multi-Purpose Tray>.

3Select the paper size.

About <Free Size>

●If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in

the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper. <Ppr Size Mismatch for

Free Size Ppr Src>(P. 391)

When registering standard size paper

1Select the standard size paper.

When registering custom size paper

1Press <Custom Size>.

Basic Operations

2Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

●Select <X> or <Y> to specify the length of each side using the numeric keys or / .

●By registering frequently used paper sizes to the <S1> to <S5> buttons, they can be recalled by

selecting <Registered Sizes>. Registering Free Size Paper (Custom Size Paper)(P. 100)

3Select <Apply>.

When registering envelopes

1Select the type of envelopes.

4Select the paper type.

About <Free>

●If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine

perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the

paper type actually loaded in the machine.

●When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when

the paper type is [Plain 1].

●To check the detailed settings for a paper type, select <Details> select the paper type to check.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 70)

Hardware Specications(P. 539)

Basic Operations

Registering Free Size Paper (Custom Size Paper)

7KKL-02E

You can register up to ve frequently used free sizes of paper. The paper sizes registered here are displayed on the

paper size selection screen for the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray ( Specifying Paper Size and Type in the

Paper Drawer(P. 94) or Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 96) ).

1Select <Paper Settings> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Register Custom Size>.

3Select a button from <S1> to <S5> select <Register>.

●You can assign an easy to remember name to the button by selecting <Rename>.

●If you have selected the registered button, select <Edit>.

4Set the paper size.

●Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side. Select <X> or <Y> to specify the length of each side using the

numeric keys or / .

5Select <Apply>.

LINKS

Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66)

Basic Operations

100

Automatically Selecting the Appropriate Paper Source

for a Specic Function

7KKL-02F

You can enable or disable the automatic paper source selection function for each paper source. If this function is set to

<On>, the machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with paper of the appropriate size for each print

job. Also, when the paper in the selected paper source runs out, this function enables continuous printing by switching

from that paper source to another that is loaded with paper of the same size.

●Always specify <On> for at least one of the paper sources. If you select <Off> for all the paper sources, then

you cannot nish the setting procedure.

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Function Settings> <Common> <Paper Feed Settings> <Paper Source

Auto Selection>.

3Select the function.

●<Other> enables you to make settings for a paper source that is used for outputting reports.

●If you set <Optimal Productivity> to <On>, the machine automatically switches from one paper source to

another before the paper in the rst paper source runs out.

4Select <On> for each paper source that you want to be selected automatically.

If you selected <Printer> in step 3

Set whether to put multiple paper sources in a group. If paper source grouping is specied, paper source

selection is automatically performed within a group when you print by specifying any paper source

belonging to that group. To specify paper source grouping, select <Group Settings> set <Use Group> to

<On> select the paper source select a group which you want to put each paper source in select

<Apply>.

Basic Operations

101

Customizing the Display

7KKL-02H

In order to make the <Home> screen easier to use, you can customize it.

Customizing the <Home> Screen

You can rearrange the displayed items and customize the screen to make it easier to select functions.

Customizing the <Home> Screen(P. 103)

Changing the Displayed Language

You can change the language displayed on the screen.

Switching the Displayed Language(P. 104)

LINKS

Using the Control Panel(P. 82)

Basic Operations

102

Customizing the <Home> Screen

7KKL-02J

You can freely change the display order of items to make the buttons easier to use.

1Select <Display Order (Home)> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Use / to select the item to be moved, and press .

3Use / to move to the target position, and press .

4When the buttons are rearranged in the way you want, press (Back).

●Operating this setting requires administrator privileges.

Basic Operations

103

Switching the Displayed Language

7KKL-02K

You can change the language displayed on the screen.

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language>.

3Select a language from the list.

Basic Operations

104

Volume Settings

Setting Sounds

7KKL-02L

The machine produces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when control panel keys are pressed, or when a

malfunction occurs. You can specify whether or not set each sound individually.

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Preferences> <Volume Settings>.

3Select a setting select <On> or <Off>.

Setting Items Description

<Entry Tone> Sound produced each time a key on the control panel is pressed

<Invalid Entry Tone> Sound produced when an invalid key operation is performed, or when you enter a

number outside the valid setting range

<Restock Supplies Tone> Sound produced when the amount of toner is low

<Warning Tone> Sound produced when a malfunction such as paper jam or operational error occurs

<Job Done Tone> Sound produced when an operation such as printing is complete

<Energy Saver/Sleep Tone> Sound produced when the machine enters sleep mode, or when the machine is

turned OFF if you set <Quick Startup Settings for Main Power> to <On>. (Depending

on the situations, the machine does not startup quickly and the tone does not sound.)

<Login Tone> Sound produced when login is successful

Basic Operations

105

Entering Sleep Mode

7KKL-02R

The sleep mode function reduces power consumption by temporarily disabling some internal operations of the

machine. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can save

power simply by pressing (Energy Saver) on the control panel.

When in sleep mode

●When the machine enters the sleep mode, (Energy Saver) lights up yellow green.

Situations in which the machine does not enter the sleep mode

●When the machine is in operation

●When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking

●When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning

●When a paper jam occurs

●When the menu screen is displayed

●If <Energy Saver/Sleep Mode Exit Time Set.> is set to <Off> when an error occurs

●When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed

●When settings are being imported or exported

Basic Operations

106

Exiting Sleep Mode

You can press (Energy Saver) or any other key on the control panel to exit the sleep mode.

When You Want to Set the Auto Sleep Timer

You can use the <Auto Sleep Time> setting to automatically put the machine into sleep mode. If you want to

change the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode, follow the procedure

below.

<Set> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> or to select the

amount of time that elapses before the machine automatically enters the sleep mode.

●You can set the time range to automatically enter the sleep mode by the day of the week. <Auto

Sleep Weekly Timer>(P. 364)

Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode

You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the sleep mode. Follow the

procedure below to set the amount of energy consumed in the sleep mode.

<Set> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Sleep Mode Energy Use> select <Low> or

<High>.

Changing the Sleep Mode Setting at the Specied Time

You can congure a setting so that the machine is placed into the sleep mode at the specied time. You can also

congure a setting so that the sleep mode is released at the specied time.

or to select the amount of time that elapses before the machine automatically returns

from the sleep mode.

Basic Operations

107

Printing

Printing ................................................................................................................................................................ 109

Printing From a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 111

Canceling Printing ........................................................................................................................................ 114

Checking the Printing Status and History ..................................................................................................... 116

Advanced Functions for Printing ...................................................................................................................... 117

Printing Documents Held in the Machine ..................................................................................................... 118

Printing Out Secured Documents ................................................................................................................. 121

Various Printing Methods ................................................................................................................................. 123

Directly Printing Files without Opening Them .............................................................................................. 124

Printing Using a Virtual Printer ..................................................................................................................... 126

Printing From Memory Media (Media Print) ................................................................................................. 128

Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print) .......................................................................................................... 129

Printing Using the Microsoft Cloud Service (Universal Print) ........................................................................ 130

Conguring the Universal Print User Settings ........................................................................................ 134

Printing

108

Printing

7KKL-050

PMW-PTIG

You can print documents and images prepared on a computer. This section introduces basic procedures and

convenient printing functions.

◼Introduction of basic operations

This section describes the basic operation methods when printing from a computer.

Printing From a Computer(P. 111)

Canceling Printing(P. 114)

Checking the Printing Status and History(P. 116)

◼Advanced functions for printing

This section introduces functions used when you want to print a sample set or edit the document before printing large

quantities, avoid to leave or to be copied printed paper, etc.

Printing Documents Held in the Machine(P. 118)

Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 121)

◼Printing in various environments

This section introduces printing methods for printing without the printer driver of the machine such as printing

without your computer during a business trip, etc.

Directly Printing Files without Opening Them(P. 124)

Printing Using a Virtual Printer(P. 126)

Printing From Memory Media (Media Print)(P. 128)

Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)(P. 129)

Printing Using the Microsoft Cloud Service (Universal Print)

(P. 130)

Printing

109

●You can print photographs, PDF les, etc. from a mobile device such as a smart phone, tablet, etc. For more

information, see Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 144) .

Printing

110

Printing From a Computer

7KKL-051

This section describes basic printing from a computer with the printer driver installed.

Help for Printer Drivers(P. 111)

Basic Printing Operations(P. 111)

Help for Printer Drivers

Clicking [Help] (Window) or (Mac OS) on the printer driver setting screen displays the Help screen. For information

that is not in the User's Guide, including about driver features and how to set up those features, see Help.

Basic Printing Operations

This section describes the basic ow when printing from a computer.

In case of Windows(P. 111)

In case of Mac OS(P. 112)

In case of Windows

1Open a document and display the print screen.

2Select the machine and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

3Specify the print settings as necessary and click [OK].

●Switch tabs as necessary to specify the desired print settings.

Printing

111

4Click [Print] or [OK].

➠Printing starts.

●If you want to cancel, see Canceling Printing(P. 114) .

In case of Mac OS

1Open a document and display the print screen.

2Select the machine.

3Specify the print settings as necessary.

●After selecting the setting panel from the drop-down list, set for printing on each panel.

4Click [Print].

➠Printing starts.

●If you want to cancel, see Canceling Printing(P. 114) .

Printing

112

LINKS

Checking the Printing Status and History(P. 116)

Printing

113

Canceling Printing

7KKL-052

You can cancel printing before it has nished. You can also cancel a print job on the control panel of the machine.

Checking the Printing Status and History(P. 116)

In case of Windows(P. 114)

In case of Mac OS(P. 115)

In case of Windows

1Double-click the printer icon on the system tray in the lower-right of the screen.

When the printer icon is not displayed

●Open the printer folder, and click or double-click the icon for the machine.

2Select the document to cancel and click [Document] [Cancel].

●If you cannot nd the document to cancel, the document is already sent to the machine. In that case, you

cannot cancel the printing on the computer.

3Click [Yes].

➠Printing is canceled.

Printing

114

In case of Mac OS

1Click the printer icon displayed on the Dock.

2Select the document to cancel and click [Delete] or .

➠Printing is canceled.

Printing

115

Checking the Printing Status and History

7KKL-053

You can check the wait status for print jobs and whether or not an error has occurred during printing. Operations such

as printing the document ahead of other documents and temporarily suspending or canceling printing are possible as

well.

●When personal authentication management is used, you can restrict users from performing operations on

the jobs of other users on the <Status Monitor> screen. <Restrict Access to Other User Jobs>(P. 399)

1Press (Status Monitor).

2Select <Print Job>.

3Select the print statuses and logs.

Checking the status of printing

1In <Job Status>, select the document to check the status of.

➠Display detailed information about the document.

Checking the printing history

1In <Job Log>, select an item select the document to check the history of.

●<OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a

document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

LINKS

Canceling Printing(P. 114)

Printing

116

Advanced Functions for Printing

7KKL-054

This section introduces methods for printing with increased security.

Printing Documents Held in the Machine(P. 118) Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 121)

Printing

117

Printing Documents Held in the Machine

7KKL-0JR

You can temporarily hold print data in the machine and print it from the control

panel when required.

You can also set the machine to always hold print data. The Secure Print function can

be used even when the Forced Hold setting is disabled.

Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 257)

●Up to 200 users can use this mode. If a document which is shared with several people is retained in the

machine, only the user who sends the job is counted.

●You can store up to 2,000 jobs.

●At least 1 GB is guaranteed for storing retained documents.

●The maximum size of a retained document that can be stored is 2 GB.

●The documents retained in the machine are saved even if the machine is turned OFF.

●Note that documents are automatically deleted after a specied period of time passes. Please consult your

administrator regarding the length of this time period.

Forced Hold Settings

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Printer] [Print].

4Select [Force Hold].

5Congure the other settings as required.

Printing

118

●[Enable Auto Print Function When Logging In] cannot be selected if [Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs] is

selected.

6Click [OK].

7Select <Print> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

8Select <Job Type> and <Print Status> on the <Switch Job List> screen.

●<Personal>: Displays the documents sent by the user who is logged in.

●<Shared>: Documents held based on specic conditions according to forced hold settings are displayed.

All users can display/print these documents.

When selecting an unprinted document, conrm that <Jobs to Be Printed> is selected.

9Select <Apply>.

10 On the <Select Job> screen, select the document press .

●If a document is not selected, <Select All> is displayed, which enables you to select all the documents in the

document list. When documents are selected, <Clear Selection> is displayed enabling you to cancel the entire

selection.

11 Select <Apply>

Printing

119

12 Select <Start Printing>.

➠Printing starts.

●To cancel printing, select the job to cancel in <Jobs Printed>, and select <Delete Job>. You can also press

(Stop) on the control panel and select the job to cancel from <Print Jobs>.

Automatically Printing Forced Hold Print Jobs after Logging In

When [Enable Auto Print Function When Logging In] is selected in the Remote UI, jobs can be automatically printed

when a user logs in.

●The following jobs are not automatically printed even if this setting is enabled.

- <Personal> jobs of other users and <Shared> jobs

- Printed jobs

- Encrypted secure printing jobs

●When multiple jobs are held, they are printed in the display order of <Date>.

●A maximum of 100 jobs can be printed with a single login operation.

Printing More Safely with Encrypted Secure Print

By using Encrypted Secure Printing, you can send encrypted printing data to a machine from your computer. This

enables you to reduce the risk of information leaks when sending printed data, and to print more safely. Use this

especially when printing highly condential documents.

●To print the encrypted document, you must enter the password. The password must be the same as the

password you set on the printer driver.

●For information on setting items, see "Help" by clicking [Help] on the printer driver setting screen (Windows

only).

●Encrypted Secure Print cannot be used with Mac OS.

●To use encrypted secure printing, display the printer folder right-click the icon for the machine select

[Printer properties] see the [Help] on the ［Encrypted-P］tab. For information on displaying the printer

folder, see Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 523) .

Printing

120

Printing Out Secured Documents

7KKL-0JS

This section describes how to print a document from an application as a secured

document.

Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 121)

Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine

1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

2Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

3Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method].

➠The [Information] pop-up screen is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No].

4Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].

●Switch the tab according to the settings.

5Click [Print] or [OK].

Printing

121

➠After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be

printed.

LINKS

Checking the Printing Status and History(P. 116)

Printing

122

Various Printing Methods

7KKL-057

This section introduces printing method using the Remote UI, or how to print a le stored in memory media.

Directly Printing Files without

Opening Them(P. 124)

Printing Using a Virtual

Printer(P. 126)

Printing From Memory Media

(Media Print)(P. 128)

Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)(P. 129) Printing Using the Microsoft Cloud Service

(Universal Print)(P. 130)

Printing

123

Directly Printing Files without Opening Them

7KKL-058

By using remote UI, it is possible to print les saved on a computer or network

directly from the machine without using the printer driver. You do not need to open

les on the computer for printing.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Direct Print] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Select a le format and then a le.

4Specify the print settings as necessary.

●If a password is set for the PDF le, press [Specify PDF File] enter the password in [Document Password].

When printing PDF les linked to the policy server, select [Specify PDF File] enter the policy server user

name in [Policy Server User Name] and the policy server password in [Policy Server Password].

●To print the PDF le which is prohibited for printing, or to print PDF les that only allow low-resolution

printing in high resolution, enter the master password.

●Depending on the selected paper size, PDF/XPS les may be canceled on printing.

5Click [Start Printing].

➠Printing starts.

Printing

124

●Do not click [Start Printing] repeatedly during le transfer. Otherwise, le malfunction may occur and the le

may not be transferred.

●Printing may not be performed properly depending on the data.

●If printing with Direct Print is not possible or the printing position deviates, opening les from the

application and using the printer driver may enable proper printing.

Printing

125

Printing Using a Virtual Printer

7KKL-0JU

A virtual printer enables you to use LPD printing or FTP printing with the print

settings registered as a virtual printer in advance. For example, registering

settings such as the paper type, number of copies, and two-sided printing in

advance eliminates the need to specify these settings for each job.

Adding a Virtual Printer(P. 126)

Printing with a Virtual Printer(P. 127)

●For Secure Print and Encrypted Secure Print, the virtual printer is disabled and the job is held in the

machine.

●Set <LPD Print Settings>(P. 367) to <On> to perform LPD printing.

●Set <FTP Print Settings>(P. 367) to <On> to perform FTP printing.

●The page description language and le format that can be used with a virtual printer is PS and PDF.

Adding a Virtual Printer

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Printer] [Virtual Printer Management].

4Click [Add Virtual Printer].

●Operations cannot be performed from multiple browsers at the same time.

5Enter the virtual printer name and specify the required settings.

Printing

126

●Multiple virtual printers with the same name cannot be registered.

●A maximum of 20 virtual printers can be registered.

6Click [Add].

●You are required to log in to the Remote UI with any of the following privileges to perform this

setting. For more information, see the items in [Select Role to Set:] in Registering User

Information in the Local Device(P. 179) .

- Administrator

- DeviceAdmin

- NetworkAdmin

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.　

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting.　

Importing/Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Printing with a Virtual Printer

For LPD printing

●LPR -S [IP address of the machine] -P [virtual printer name] [le name]

Example: Printing "sample.pdf" with a virtual printer named "001"

lpr -S IP address of the machine -P 001 sample.pdf

For FTP printing

●put [le name] [virtual printer name]

Example: Printing "sample.pdf" with a virtual printer named "001"

> put sample.pdf 001

Printing

127

Printing From Memory Media (Media Print)

7KKL-05A

It is possible to print les saved on memory media directly from the machine

without using a computer. This is convenient when printing after bringing data

back from an outside location or when printing data you have brought with you

to a business destination.

Using memory media

●For available memory media and information on inserting/removing memory media, see Connecting a

USB Memory Device(P. 53) .

●For instructions on using memory media, see Using Memory Media(P. 138) .

●Depending on the le format, an optional product may be required. System Options(P. 538)

Printing

128

Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)

7KKL-0JW

E-Mail Print allows you to print the message and attached TIFF image les of an e-

mail received from the POP3 mail server without using a computer. E-mails can be

manually received as well as being automatically received at regular intervals.

When the SMTP protocol is used, e-mails directly sent to the machine via no mail

server are printed.

Manually Receiving E-Mails(P. 129)

●Some les are unavailable depending on the le structure.

●For information on the settings for receiving and printing e-mail with the machine, see Conguring E-

Mail Print Settings(P. 45) .

●For information on the specication of the e-mail print, see Printer Functions(P. 528) .

◼Outline of E-Mail Print

General

●An e-mail message is printed with e-mail header information.

●If the text in the e-mail body eld does not t in one line, a line break is automatically inserted.

●When the toner cartridge is nearly empty, no e-mails can be received.

Manually Receiving E-Mails

If e-mail printing from the POP3 mail server is enabled, you can manually receive and print e-mails as well. When you

want to connect to the mail server before automatically receiving e-mails or the machine is congured to prevent e-

mails from being automatically received, follow the procedure below to manually receive the e-mails.

1Press (Status Monitor).

2Select <RX> <Check E-Mail RX>.

➠The machine is connected to the mail server. E-Mail Print is started for new e-mails in the mailbox of the

mail server if any.

LINKS

Checking the Printing Status and History(P. 116)

Printing Reports and Lists(P. 441)

Printing

129

Printing Using the Microsoft Cloud Service (Universal

Print)

7KKL-05C

Universal Print is a service that enables you to print documents via the Microsoft

cloud. Universal Print drivers are included as a standard feature in Windows 10, so

there is no need to install printer drivers for each computer. This also eliminates the

need for printer servers, thereby enabling cost reductions and reducing the workload

on network administrators.

Conditions of Use

To use Universal Print, you must rst register as a Microsoft 365 service user and use the Azure Active Directory

Service.

●Printing Using the Microsoft Cloud Service (Universal Print)

- For communication using a sub-line

Required Settings

Administrator settings

Use the Remote UI to register this machine in Azure Active Directory. Registering This Machine in Azure

Active Directory(P. 131)

User settings

Congure your computer so that Universal Print can be used. Conguring a Printer Registered in Azure

Active Directory on the Computer(P. 133)

When a proxy server is used

●To use Universal Print via a proxy server, you must also congure the proxy settings on your

computer.

Associating Users and Universal Print Jobs

You can associate Universal Print jobs with users authenticated through User Authentication. You can still use

Universal Print without conguring these settings. Conguring the Universal Print User Settings(P. 134)

Printing with Universal Print

See the Microsoft website for information on printing with Universal Print.

Printing

130

●In some operating systems, print errors or problems with the print results may occur. See Universal

Print Troubleshooting on the Microsoft website for information on the compatibility of your operating

system.

Registering This Machine in Azure Active Directory

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Settings for Universal Print].

4Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings].

5Select the [Use Universal Print] checkbox and enter the printer name in the [Printer

Name] eld.

●To verify the server certicate sent from the server, select the [Verify Server Certicate] checkbox.

●To add CN (Common Name) to the items to be veried, select the [Add CN to Verication Items] checkbox.

●Change the [Application ID], [Azure Active Directory Authentication URL] or [Azure Active Directory

Registration URL] settings according to your cloud environment.

6Click [OK].

7Click [Register] in [Registration Status].

8Wait a few seconds, and then click .

9Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration].

Printing

131

10 Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine.

11 Wait a few minutes, and then click in the Remote UI screen.

➠Once registration is completed, [Registered] appears in [Registration Status].

12 View the Universal Print management screen of Azure Active Directory in your web

browser.

13 Select the registered machine and click [Share Printer].

●To change the name displayed on the computer, enter the new name in [Printer Share Name], and then click

[Share Printer].

➠[Printer shared.] appears at the top right of the screen.

14 Click [Members], and then click [Add].

15 Select the members and groups who will use the registered printer from the list.

●The selected members and groups will be able to use the printer.

◼To Delete a Registered Printer

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Settings for Universal Print].

4Click [Registration Status] for [Unregister].

5Click [OK].

6View the Azure Active Directory device management screen in your web browser.

7Select the model to be deleted and click [Delete].

Printing

132

Conguring a Printer Registered in Azure Active Directory on the Computer

1Click [Settings] [Accounts].

2Click [Access work or school] [Connect].

3Follow the on-screen instructions to sign in to your Microsoft 365 account.

4Click [Home] [Devices].

5Click [Printers & scanners] [Add a printer or scanner].

6Select a registered printer from the list.

Printing

133

Conguring the Universal Print User Settings

7KKL-05E

Congure these settings if you want to manage users authenticated through User Authentication and their associated

Universal Print jobs. Universal Print can still be run without conguring these settings.

Set by the User(P. 134)

Set by the Administrator(P. 134)

Set by the Administrator Using a CSV File(P. 135)

Set by the User

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Authentication Management].

4Enter [User Name for Universal Print:] in [Information for Universal Print].

●In [User Name for Universal Print:], enter the email address or phone number used in the Microsoft 365

account.

Set by the Administrator

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Authentication Management].

4Click [Edit] for the user to be set.

If the Universal Print user is not registered

●Click [Add User] and register the user information. When registering the user information, enter the [User

Name for Universal Print:] in [Information for Universal Print].

5Enter [User Name for Universal Print:] in [Information for Universal Print].

Printing

134

●In [User Name for Universal Print:], enter the email address or phone number used in the Microsoft 365

account.

6Click [Update].

Set by the Administrator Using a CSV File

You can associate User Authentication users with a Microsoft 365 account by editing a CSV le.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Authentication Management] [Settings for Universal

Print].

4Click [Start Exporting].

●If there is no user information that is associated with a Microsoft 365 account, you cannot congure the

settings using a CSV le. Click [Add Association...], add the associated user and then click [Start Exporting].

5Editing the exported CSV le

●Enter a registered user name in "mcp_uid".

●In "azureaccount_name", enter the email address or phone number used in the Microsoft 365 account.

6Click [Import] and specify the le edited in step 5.

7Click [Start Importing].

Printing

135

Using Memory Media Such as USB

Memory

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory ................................................................................... 137

Using Memory Media ........................................................................................................................................ 138

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory

136

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory

7KKL-06H

You can also use the data on a computer not connected to the network via memory media compliant with the USB

standard. Preparations are required for using memory media. Using Memory Media(P. 138)

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory

137

Using Memory Media

7KKL-06K

You can directly insert memory media to the machine and use it.

Memory media compliant with the USB 2.0 standard is supported. FAT32/exFAT format memory media is supported.

The following devices and usage methods are not supported.

●Memory media with security functions

●Memory card readers connected via USB

●USB extension cables or USB hubs

Preparing to Use Memory Media(P. 138)

Inserting/Removing Memory Media(P. 138)

Printing Files on Memory Media(P. 139)

Preparing to Use Memory Media

When using memory media, perform the following preparations in advance.

◼Enabling Memory Media for Printing

<On>

If memory media is not recognized although it is connected correctly, set <Use AddOn Driver for USB Storage Device>

to <Off>. <Use AddOn Driver for USB Storage Device>(P. 377)

Displaying the print settings screen when memory media is inserted

●Set <Select Option When Connecting Mem. Media> to <On>. When memory media is inserted, a

conrmation screen is displayed and printing can be immediately executed. <Select Option When

Connecting Mem. Media>(P. 395)

*To display the print settings screen from memory media, insert the memory media after canceling the

Sleep mode. Exiting Sleep Mode(P. 107)

Inserting/Removing Memory Media

Inserting memory media incorrectly or in the wrong direction may cause problems with the machine or the memory

media.

◼Inserting Memory Media

Insert the USB memory into the USB port on the right side of the machine with the correct orientation.

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory

138

◼Removing Memory Media

Perform one of the following operations to remove the media.

●Select <Remove Memory Media> on the memory media print screen <Yes> for <Remove Memory Media>.

●Select (Status Monitor) <Device Status> <Remove Memory Media>.

Printing Files on Memory Media

1Insert the memory media into the USB port of the machine. Inserting/Removing

Memory Media(P. 138)

2Select <Memory Media> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

3Select <Select File and Print>.

●Select <Select All> to select all the les.

●If there are multiple le types, select <PDF>, <XPS>, or <JPEG/TIFF>.

You can deselect a le by selecting the le again. To deselect all les, select <Clear Selection>.

4Select <Apply>.

When using a print ticket to print an XPS le

When printing a le in the XPS le format, you can print according to the print ticket (print settings)

embedded in the le.

1Select <On> for <Use Print Ticket>.

2Select <Start Printing>.

➠Printing starts. Remove the memory media when printing is complete. Inserting/Removing

Memory Media(P. 138)

5Specify the print settings as necessary.

Select the item to set.

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory

139

Specify the number of copies. Enter a quantity using numeric keys, and press .

Select whether to print data in black and white or color.

<Paper>

Select the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing.

●The icon indicates the multi-purpose tray.

●The number icon indicates the paper drawer position.

●For information on paper sources, see Parts and Their Functions(P. 51) and Optional

Equipment(P. 552) .

●<N on 1> cannot be used for JPEG les or TIFF les.

Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number

of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to　print four pages on one side of a sheet of

paper, select <4 on 1>.

<2-Sided>

You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.

Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally when bound.

Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically when bound.

●<2-Sided> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper. Available Paper(P. 542)

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory

140

Set <1200 dpi> to print more clearly.

When printing a le with two pages or more, specify the pages to print.

●<Print Range (TIFF)> cannot be used for PDF les, XPS les, or JPEG les.

When printing a le with two pages or more, specify the pages to print.

●<Fit Paper Size> cannot be used for JPEG les or TIFF les.

Set this mode to automatically enlarge/reduce when printing PDF/XPS les.

●<Enlarge/Reduce> cannot be used for PDF les or XPS les.

Set this mode to automatically enlarge/reduce the image size according to the paper size when printing image

les.

Set this mode to narrow the blank borders at each side of the page and enlarge the print area.

●<Collate> cannot be used for JPEG les or TIFF les.

Set this mode to sort when printing PDF/XPS les.

●<Image Orientation> cannot be used for PDF les or XPS les.

Set this mode to automatically detect the aspect ratio of the image le and print it vertically or horizontally as

required. You can also manually specify to print vertically or horizontally.

●<Print Position> cannot be used for PDF les or XPS les.

You can set the print area to the center or the top left when printing an image le.

Set the printing method for reproducing halftones (the intermediate areas between the light areas and dark

areas of an image) with the optimal image quality.

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory

141

For JPEG les or TIFF les

Set this mode to enable ne printing so that the outlines of text data, etc. are clearer. This mode is optimal for

printing data containing a lot of text or ne lines.

Prints images with ne gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth nish.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

For PDF les or XPS les

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

●This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be specied for

each image type in any one document.

6Select <Start Printing>.

➠The selected le is printed.

●If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel> <Yes>.

7Correctly remove the memory media. Inserting/Removing Memory Media(P. 138)

Incorrectly removing the memory media may cause problems with the machine or the memory media.

Using Memory Media Such as USB Memory

142

Linking with Mobile Devices

Linking with Mobile Devices .................................................................................................................... 144

Connecting with Mobile Devices ...................................................................................................................... 145

Connecting Directly ...................................................................................................................................... 146

Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 149

Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 151

Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 155

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 158

Printing with Default Print Service (Android) .................................................................................................. 159

Linking with Mobile Devices

143

Linking with Mobile Devices

7KKL-06R

Linking the machine with mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets enables you to easily print using

applications. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile devices via remote control to conrm printing

status and change the settings of the machine.

Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 145)

Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 149)

Using AirPrint(P. 151)

Printing with Default Print Service (Android)(P. 159)

●Depending on your mobile device, the machine may not operate correctly.

Linking with Mobile Devices

144

Connecting with Mobile Devices

7KKL-06S

There are two methods to connect the mobile devices with the machine, "Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router" and

"Direct connection." Select a connection method in accordance with the communication environment and the device

you are using.

Perform communication with mobile devices from <Mobile Portal> ( <Home> Screen(P. 83) ). You can conrm the

information of connected mobile devices, etc., from here.

◼Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router

For information on how to connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the manuals provided with the

devices, or contact the manufacturer.

Connect with the machine using either a wired LAN or wireless LAN router. Setting up the Network

Environment(P. 8)

●If you connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router, you can conrm the information of

the machine on the <Device Name/IP Address> screen by selecting <Mobile Portal> ( <Home>

Screen(P. 83) ) <Display Device Name/IP Address>.

●If <Use Direct Connection> is set to <On>, you can conrm the information of the machine on the <Device

Name/IP Address> screen by selecting <Mobile Portal> ( <Home> Screen(P. 83) ) LAN Connection

<Display Device Name/IP Address>.

◼Connecting Directly

Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately

connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment. Connecting Directly(P. 146)

Linking with Mobile Devices

145

Connecting Directly

7KKL-06U

Even in an environment without a wireless LAN router, you can still directly connect your mobile device to the machine

via "Access Point Mode" or "Wi-Fi Direct," which enable connections between the device and the machine without the

need to congure complicated settings.

Preparing to Connect Directly(P. 146)

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 147)

Connecting Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)(P. 147)

Preparing to Connect Directly

Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order.

Check the network settings of the machine.

●Select <Set> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings>

set <Use IPv4> to <On>.

Prepare the mobile device.

●Congure the mobile device to enable Wi-Fi connection.

Prepare the machine for connection.

●Select <Set> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> set

<Use Direct Connection> to <On>.

●Select <Set> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> select

the type of direct connection to use in <Direct Connection Type>.

●Press <Mobile Portal> ( <Home> Screen(P. 83) ) <Direct Connection>

<Connect>.

●If <Wireless LAN> or <Wired LAN + Wireless LAN> is selected in <Select Interface>,

<Wi-Fi Direct> cannot be used in <Direct Connection Type>. <Select

Interface>(P. 373)

●For details on using Canon PRINT Business, see the related manuals. (https://global.canon/gomp/)

Linking with Mobile Devices

146

●If the message <Cannot be used with current settings. Contact the system manager.> is displayed on

the top of the control panel and Connect cannot be selected, conrm that <Use Direct Connection> is

set to <On>. If <Use Direct Connection> is set to <On> but <Connect> cannot be pressed, change the

IP address in <Direct Connection IP Address Settings>. <Use Direct Connection>(P. 374)

<Direct Connection IP Address Settings>(P. 375)

●When using the Access Point Mode, if the machine is started with <Keep Enabled If SSID/Net. Key

Specied> set to <On>, direct connections are possible without selecting <Mobile Portal>

<Connect>. <Keep Enabled If SSID/Net. Key Specied>(P. 375)

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)

●It may take some time for connection between the machine and the mobile device to be established.

◼Connecting Manually

1With the machine as the connection destination, congure the wireless LAN settings

on your mobile device, using the SSID and network key information shown on the

screen of the machine.

2After completing the desired operations, select Disconnect.

Connecting Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)

◼Connecting to the Machine from a Mobile Device

1Start a direct connection on the mobile device.

●Open the Wi-Fi Direct screen from the Wi-Fi settings screen of the mobile device, and tap the machine from

the list of Wi-Fi Direct devices that have been detected.

➠A message indicating that a connection request has been received from the mobile device is displayed on

the screen of the machine.

2Select <Yes> on the screen of the machine.

➠A connection between the machine and the mobile device is started.

3After completing the desired operations, select Disconnect.

Linking with Mobile Devices

147

◼Connecting to a Mobile Device from the Machine

1Select the name of the device to directly connect to from the list displayed on the

screen, and select Connect.

➠A screen for selecting whether to allow a connection to the mobile device is displayed.

2Tap [Yes] on the screen of the mobile device.

➠A connection between the machine and the mobile device is started.

3After completing the desired operations, select Disconnect.

●To check the connected mobile devices, select <Connection Information> on the <Direct Connection> screen.

●While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the

mobile device you are using.

●The connection standby status ends if a wireless connection is not performed from the mobile device within

ve minutes of the device name being displayed.

●If the status without data transmission between a mobile device and the machine continues during

communication by direct connection, the communication may end.

●Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.

●When you nish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the

mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.

●If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may

prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.

Linking with Mobile Devices

148

Utilizing the Machine through Applications

7KKL-06W

Print by using applications from a mobile device connected to the machine. Various applications including those

exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the application, and the situation.

◼Canon PRINT Business

An application for printing, etc. from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. No operations on the machine are

necessary to perform printing. For information on supported operating systems, detailed setting methods, and

operational procedures, see the Help of the application or the Canon website (https://global.canon/gomp/).

●Canon PRINT Business can be downloaded free of charge, but the customer is responsible for any fees

regarding internet connection.

◼Printing with Canon Print Service

You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on

supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (https://global.canon/

gomp/).

◼Printing with Mopria®

The machine also supports Mopria®. Using Mopria® enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android

using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using

printers supporting Mopria® made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria® that is located in a

place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For

more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.

Conrming Mopria® settings

[Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [Mopria Settings] select the [Use Mopria] check

box [OK]

◼Printing from Windows Phone (Windows 10 Mobile and Later)

You can perform printing from a Windows Phone without downloading a dedicated application or installing a driver.

Make sure that the <Use WSD Printing>, <Use WSD Browsing>, and <Multicast Discovery Settings> are enabled.

Linking with Mobile Devices

149

<WSD Settings>(P. 367)

<Multicast Discovery Settings>(P. 368)

Linking with Mobile Devices

150

Using AirPrint

7KKL-06X

This section describes the settings required to use AirPrint and the procedure for printing from Apple devices.

AirPrint Settings

Conguring AirPrint Settings(P. 151)

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 153)

Functions of the AirPrint

Printing with AirPrint(P. 155)

Troubleshooting

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 158)

Conguring AirPrint Settings

You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying

the machine. The settings required for using AirPrint can be congured remotely using the Remote UI.

◼Conguring Settings Using the Remote UI

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting the Remote

UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

●If you are using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.

3Click [Network Settings] [AirPrint Settings].

4Specify the required settings, and click [OK].

Linking with Mobile Devices

151

[Use AirPrint]

Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, deselect the check box.

[Display Errors for AirPrint]

Specify whether to display an error screen on the control panel if printing cannot be performed as

expected due to a problem with the print data when printing with AirPrint.

[Printer Name]

Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings]

([Network Settings] in [Preferences] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.

[Location]

Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information

Settings] ([Device Management] in [Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is

displayed.

[Latitude]

Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.

[Longitude]

Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.

5Restart the machine.

●Turn OFF the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON.

◼Conguring Settings from the Control Panel

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Preferences> <Network> <Use AirPrint>.

●The Administrator PIN must be entered in order to congure this setting.

Linking with Mobile Devices

152

3Select <On> <OK>.

If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings in <TCP/IP Settings> are set to <On>.

●Use HTTP

●IPP Print Settings

●Use IPv4 mDNS

●Use IPv6 mDNS

●If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any more from the

Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name> (

Making DNS Settings(P. 31) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the

Mac again.

●When AirPrint is in-use, <Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4> is xed to <On> for the mDNS name of IPv6.

●Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint

You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view

information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can congure security function

settings.

◼Displaying from a Mac

1Click [System Preferences] in the Dock on the desktop [Printers & Scanners].

2Select the machine, and click [Options & Supplies].

3Click [Show Printer Webpage].

4Logging in to the Remote UI

●To change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.

◼Conguring the Screen for AirPrint

If you log in with administrator privileges, you can also change the AirPrint settings from the page for AirPrint.

Linking with Mobile Devices

153

[AirPrint]

Enables you to check the values entered in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the

machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.

[Print Security Settings]

Specify the settings required to print using TLS and authentication.

If <IPP Print Settings> is already set, the existing settings are displayed. The values registered in [Print

Security Settings] change according to the values in <IPP Print Settings>.

[User Management]

You can add/edit users to authenticate. Managing Users(P. 174)

[TLS Settings]

Enables you to change the key and certicate used for TLS. Conguring the Key and Certicate for

TLS(P. 225)

[Key and Certicate Settings]

Enables you to generate and install a key and certicate, or request a certicate to be issued. Conguring

the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

◼Checking Consumables and the Device Version

You can check information regarding the paper sources of the machine, the remaining amount of toner, and the

device version.

Trademarks

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

Linking with Mobile Devices

154

Printing with AirPrint

7KKL-06Y

You can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.

Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 155)

Printing from a Mac(P. 156)

System Requirements

One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint.

●iPad (all models)

●iPhone (3GS or later)

●iPod touch (3rd generation or later)

●Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*

* OS X 10.9 or later when using a USB connection

Network Environment

One of the following environments is required.

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly

●An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting up the Network Environment(P. 8) .

●For information on the Direct Connection, see Connecting Directly(P. 146) .

2From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.

3Tap [Print].

4Select this machine from [Printer].

➠The printers connected to the network are displayed here. Select this machine in this step.

Linking with Mobile Devices

155

●The screen for selecting the machine in [Printer] is not displayed for applications that do not support

AirPrint. In this case, printing cannot be performed.

5Specify the print settings as necessary.

●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

6Tap [Print].

➠Printing starts.

Checking the print status

●During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].

Printing from a Mac

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting up the Network Environment(P. 8) .

2From your Mac, add the machine in [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual for the application you are using.

4Select the machine in the print dialog box.

➠The printers added to the Mac are displayed. Select the machine in this step.

5Specify the print settings as necessary.

●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

6Click [Print].

➠Printing starts.

Linking with Mobile Devices

156

●You can specify whether to display an error screen on the control panel if printing cannot be performed as

expected due to a problem with the print data. For details, see <Display Errors for AirPrint>(P. 373) .

Linking with Mobile Devices

157

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used

7KKL-072

If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.

●Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10

seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.

●Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.

●Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may

take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.

●Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.

●Make sure that the machine is congured to enable operations from a computer even when no department ID and

password are entered.

●For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has sucient toner levels

remaining. Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 153)

Linking with Mobile Devices

158

Printing with Default Print Service (Android)

7KKL-073

If your Android terminal supports Default Print Service, you can print from the Default Print Service of your Android

terminal.

To print with the machine using Default Print Service, it is necessary to enable Mopria®.

Conrming Mopria® settings

[Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [Mopria Settings] select the [Use Mopria] check

box [OK]

●In order to use the Canon machine/printer from the Default Print Service of your Android terminal, you must

rst congure the following settings on your Android terminal.

●Enable Default Print Service.

●Disable or uninstall Mopria®.

●Disable or uninstall Canon Print Service.

Linking with Mobile Devices

159

Managing the Machine

Managing the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 162

Applying a Security Policy to the Machine ....................................................................................................... 164

Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy Settings .............................................................................. 165

Conguring the Security Policy Settings ....................................................................................................... 167

Security Policy Setting Items ......................................................................................................................... 169

Managing Users ................................................................................................................................................. 174

Conguring the Personal Authentication Management Settings .................................................................. 176

Registering User Information in the Local Device .................................................................................. 179

Importing/Exporting User Data ............................................................................................................. 183

Adding and Editing User Information in a CSV File .......................................................................... 186

Registering Server Information ............................................................................................................. 190

Conguring the Authentication Functions ............................................................................................. 196

Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing via a Computer ...................................................... 200

Using Other Convenient Personal Authentication Management Functions .................................................. 201

Setting the Department ID Management .............................................................................................. 202

Changing the System Manager ID and PIN ..................................................................................... 203

Conguring the Department ID Management Settings ................................................................... 205

Using Department IDs to Manage Printing via Computer ............................................................... 208

Setting an Authentication/Password Policy .................................................................................................. 209

Conguring the Network Security Settings .................................................................................................... 212

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 214

Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings ........................................................................................... 215

Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings ...................................................................................... 218

Conguring the Firewall of the Sub Line ................................................................................................ 220

Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 223

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .................................................................................................. 225

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 229

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ........................................................................ 231

Registering a Key and Certicate for Network Communication ............................................................. 234

Conguring the Expiration Check Method for Received Certicates ...................................................... 237

Retrieving/Updating a Certicate from an SCEP Server .......................................................................... 240

Conguring the IPSec Settings ..................................................................................................................... 246

Conguring the IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ................................................................................... 253

Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 256

Restricting Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................... 257

Restricting the Use of Memory Media .......................................................................................................... 261

Managing the Machine

160

Restricting Use of the Operation Panel ......................................................................................................... 262

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 263

Starting the Remote UI ................................................................................................................................. 265

Checking the Status and Logs ....................................................................................................................... 269

Turning OFF/Restarting the Machine ............................................................................................................ 272

Managing the Logs ....................................................................................................................................... 273

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data .......................................................................................................... 276

Importing/Exporting All Settings ........................................................................................................... 278

Updating the Firmware ................................................................................................................................ 282

Updating the Firmware (Distribution) ........................................................................................................... 284

Setting Scheduled Updates ........................................................................................................................... 287

Displaying Messages from the Administrator ............................................................................................... 289

Setting the Website for Purchasing Consumables ........................................................................................ 290

Installing System Options ................................................................................................................................ 292

Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 294

Managing the Machine

161

Managing the Machine

7KKL-074

To reduce the various risks associated with using this machine, such as the leakage of personal information or

unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. Designate an administrator

to handle important machine settings, such as the user management and security settings, to ensure that the machine

is used safely.

◼Conguring the Basic Management System

Applying a Security Policy to the Machine(P. 164)

Managing Users(P. 174)

Conguring the Network Security Settings(P. 212)

◼Limiting Risks from Negligence, Operation Errors, and Misuse

Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 256)

◼Ensuring Effective Management

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)(P. 263)

Managing the Machine

162

◼Managing the System Conguration and Settings

Installing System Options(P. 292)

Initializing Settings(P. 294)

Managing the Machine

163

Applying a Security Policy to the Machine

7KKL-075

It is a common practice for organizations to adopt a security policy that denes basic information security objectives

and standards, which requires information devices such as computers and printers/multifunctional printers to be

operated accordingly. On this machine, multiple settings related to security policy can be managed in batch via the

Remote UI, and a dedicated password can be set up so that only the information security administrator is able to

modify the settings. Before conguring these settings, make sure that the Remote UI is set up to use TLS. Starting

the Remote UI(P. 265)

Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy Settings(P. 165)

Conguring the Security Policy Settings(P. 167)

Security Policy Setting Items(P. 169)

●The purpose of the security policy settings is to manage all functions and settings related to information

security, and not to actually prevent information leakage itself.

Managing the Machine

164

Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy Settings

7KKL-076

It is recommended that you use a password to protect the machine settings related to security policy. By setting a

password, the privilege for modifying the security policy settings can be restricted only to the information security

administrators who know the password.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Security Settings] [Security Policy Settings].

➠The [Conrm Security Policy] page is displayed.

4Click [Password Settings].

5Enter a password and click [OK].

●Use alphanumeric characters or symbols for the password.

●Make sure that the password is entered correctly, and enter the new password again in [Conrm:].

To change the password

●Enter the current password in [Current Password:] and the new password in [New Password:], then enter

the new password again in [Conrm:] and click [OK].

To remove the password

●Enter the current password in [Current Password:], and click [OK] without entering any value for [New

Password:] or [Conrm:] (leave them blank). If an input character limit has been congured in [Password

Settings Policy], a value must be entered for this setting. Cancel the limit before removing the password.

Security Policy Setting Items(P. 169)

●Make sure that you do not forget your password. If you forget your password, contact your dealer or service

representative.

Managing the Machine

165

●To set/change the password, it is necessary to log in to the Remote UI with Administrator privileges.

●If a password is set, it will be required for authentication in order to initialize the machine. After

authentication is performed and the machine is initialized, the password will be deleted. Initializing

Settings(P. 294)

Managing the Machine

166

Conguring the Security Policy Settings

7KKL-077

Machine settings related to information security can be applied and managed in batch. It is recommended that the

information security administrator in charge of managing your security policy apply the security policy to the machine

in accordance with the policy of your organization. To congure the security policy, log in to the Remote UI with

Administrator privileges.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Security Settings] [Security Policy Settings].

4Click [Security Policy Settings].

➠The setting precautions are displayed. Make sure to read and understand the contents.

●If no password has been congured ( Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy

Settings(P. 165) ), read the contents and click [OK] to proceed to step 6.

5Enter the password and click [Log In].

6Congure the necessary items and click [OK].

●For information on the settings, see Security Policy Setting Items(P. 169) .

●The settings related to items indicated with a check mark here cannot be changed using <Set> or the

Remote UI.

Managing the Machine

167

●For any machine settings that were changed when the security policy settings were applied, you cannot

simply clear the check box to restore the previously set value. To change the settings, use <Set> or the

Remote UI.

7Click [OK].

●If a security policy has been congured, a message indicating that functions and operations are restricted

is displayed when the [Settings/Registration] screen is displayed on the control panel or the Remote UI.

◼Applying the Security Policy Settings to Another Device

You can import and export the machine's security policy settings. By applying the same policy to multiple devices*, you

can manage all of the devices in your organization using identical settings. Importing/Exporting the Setting

Data(P. 276)

* Only Canon devices that are compatible with security policy settings

●The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting password on the exporting

machine matches that of the importing machine, or if no password has been set for the importing machine.

If no password has been set for the importing machine, the password congured for the exporting machine

is set to the importing machine.

Managing the Machine

168

Security Policy Setting Items

7KKL-078

The setting items related to the security policy of the machine are described below. Select the check boxes for the

items that you want to apply on the setting screen.

◼[Interface]

[Wireless Connection Policy]

Prevent unauthorized access by prohibiting wireless connections.

[Prohibit Use of Direct Connection] <Use Direct Connection> and <Keep Enabled If SSID/Net. Key

Specied> are set to <Off>. It is not possible to access the machine

from mobile devices.

Connecting

Directly(P. 146)

<Network>(P. 365)

[Prohibit Use of Wireless LAN] If <Select Interface> is set to <Wireless LAN> or <Wired LAN +

Wireless LAN>, it changes to <Wired LAN>. Wireless connections can

no longer be made via a wireless LAN router or access point.

<Select

Interface>(P. 373)

[USB Policy]

Prevent unauthorized access and data breaches by prohibiting USB connection.

[Prohibit use as USB device] <Use as USB Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

connect to a computer via USB.

<Use as USB

Device>(P. 377)

[Prohibit use as USB storage device] <Use USB Storage Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

use USB storage devices.

<Use USB Storage

Device>(P. 377)

◼[Network]

[Communication Operational Policy]

Increase the security of communications by requiring the verication of signatures and certicates.

Always verify signatures for SMS/

WebDAV server functions]

There are no setting items that the security policy is applied

to for the machine.

[Always verify server certicate

when using TLS]

The following settings are set to <On>, and a check mark is

added to <CN>.

●<Conrm TLS Certicate for POP RX>

●<Conrm TLS Certicate Using AddOn App>

During TLS communication, verication will be performed

for digital certicates with common names.

<Conrm TLS Certicate

for POP RX>(P. 393)

<Conrm TLS Certicate

Using AddOn App>(P. 401)

[Prohibit cleartext authentication for

server functions]

●<Use FTP Printing> in <FTP Print Settings> is set to <Off>.

●<SMTP RX> in <E-mail Settings> <Communication

Settings> is set to <Always Use TLS>.

●[Authentication Method] in [Network Settings]

[Dedicated Port Authentication Method] is set to [Mode

2].

When using the machine as a server, plain text

authentication and functions that use plain text

authentication are not available.

<FTP Print

Settings>(P. 367)

<Communication

Settings>(P. 393)

Specifying the Dedicated

Port Settings(P. 41)

Managing the Machine

169

[Prohibit use of SNMPv1] In <SNMP Settings>, <Use SNMPv1> is set to <Off>. It is not

possible to use SNMPv1 when obtaining device information

from the computer.

<SNMP Settings>(P. 370)

●This setting does not apply to communication with IEEE 802.1X networks, even if the check box is selected

for [Always verify server certicate when using TLS].

●If [Prohibit cleartext authentication for server functions] is selected and your device management software

or driver version is old, it may not be possible to connect to the machine. Ensure that you are using the

latest versions.

[Port Usage Policy]

Prevent external breaches by closing unused ports.

[Restrict LPD port (port number: 515)] <LPD Print Settings> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

perform LPD printing.

<LPD Print

Settings>(P. 367)

[Restrict RAW port (port number: 9100)] <RAW Print Settings> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

perform RAW printing.

<RAW Print

Settings>(P. 367)

[Restrict FTP port (port number: 21)] In <FTP Print Settings>, <Use FTP Printing> is set to <Off>.

It is not possible to perform FTP printing.

<FTP Print

Settings>(P. 367)

[Restrict WSD port (port number: 3702,

60000)]

In <WSD Settings>, <Use WSD Print> and <Use WSD

Browsing> are all set to <Off>. It is not possible to use

WSD functions.

<WSD

Settings>(P. 367)

[Restrict BMLinkS port (port number: 1900)] There are no setting items that the security policy is

applied to for the machine.

[Restrict IPP port (port number: 631)] The <IPP Print Settings> and <Use Mopria> options are all

set to <Off>. It is not possible to print using IPP or

Mopria™.

<IPP Print

Settings>(P. 368)

<Use

Mopria>(P. 372)

[Restrict SMB port (port number: 139, 445)] There are no setting items that the security policy is

applied to for the machine.

[Restrict SMTP port (port number: 25)] [SMTP RX] in [Network Settings - E-Mail Settings]

[SMTP/POP Settings] is deselected and cannot be set.

SMTP reception is not possible.

Conguring E-Mail

Print Settings(P. 45)

[Restrict dedicated port (port number: 9002,

9006, 9007, 9011-9015, 9017-9019, 9022,

9023, 9025, 20317, 47545-47547)]

[Use Dedicated Port] is deselected and cannot be set. It is

not possible to use dedicated ports.

Specifying the

Dedicated Port

Settings(P. 41)

[Restrict Remote Operator's Software port

(port number: 5900)]

There are no setting items that the security policy is

applied to for the machine.

[Restrict SIP (IP Fax) port (port number: 5004,

5005, 5060, 5061, 49152)]

There are no setting items that the security policy is

applied to for the machine.

[Restrict mDNS port (port number: 5353)] The following settings are set to <Off>.

●<Use IPv4 mDNS> and <Use IPv6 mDNS> in <mDNS

Settings>.

●<Use Mopria>

<mDNS

Settings>(P. 367)

<Use

Mopria>(P. 372)

Managing the Machine

170

It is not possible to search the network or perform

automatic settings using mDNS. It is also not possible to

print using Mopria™.

[Restrict SLP port (port number: 427)] In <Multicast Discovery Settings>, <Response> is set to

<Off>. It is not possible to search the network or perform

automatic settings using SLP.

<Multicast Discovery

Settings>(P. 368)

[Restrict SNMP port (port number: 161)] In <SNMP Settings>, the <Use SNMPv1> and <Use

SNMPv3> options are set to <Off>. It is not possible to

obtain device information from the computer or congure

settings using SNMP.

<SNMP

Settings>(P. 370)

◼[Authentication]

[Authentication Operational Policy]

Prevent unregistered users from performing unauthorized operations by implementing secure user authentication.

[Prohibit guest users to use device] <Set Administrator PIN> is set to <On>.

It becomes [Standard Authentication Mode] if [Guest

Authentication Mode] is set for [Authentication Mode:] in

[Remote UI Authentication].

In addition, [Guest Authentication Mode] can no longer be

selected for [Authentication Mode:] in [Remote UI

Authentication].

Unregistered users cannot access settings that require

Administrator privileges, and print jobs from computers are

canceled.

<Set Administrator

PIN>(P. 398)

Conguring detailed

settings for

authentication

functions(P. 197)

[Force setting of auto logout] <Auto Reset Time> is enabled. The user is automatically logged

out if no operations are performed for a specied period of time.

Select [Time Until Logout:] on the Remote UI setting screen.

<Auto Reset

Time>(P. 362)

[Password Operational Policy]

Impose strict limits for password operations.

[Prohibit caching of password for

external servers]

[Prohibit Caching of Authentication Password for Access to

External Servers] is selected and [Save authentication

information for login users] is deselected. Users will always

be required to enter a password when accessing an external

server. The authentication information of the login user is no

longer retained.

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

Registering Server

Information(P. 190)

[Display warning when default password

is in use]

[Display Warning When Default Password Is in Use] is

selected. A warning message will be displayed whenever the

machine's factory default password is used.

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

[Prohibit use of default password for

remote access]

[Allow Use of Default Password for Remote Access] is

deselected. It is not possible to use the factory default

password when accessing the machine from a computer.

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

[Password Settings Policy]

Prevent third parties from easily guessing passwords by setting a minimum level of complexity and a period of validity

for user authentication passwords.

Managing the Machine

171

[Set minimum number of characters for

password]

[Set Minimum Number of Characters for Password] is

deselected. It is not possible to set a password with

fewer characters than the number specied for

[Minimum Number of Characters].

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

[Set password validity period] [No Expiry for Password] is deselected.

[Set Password Validity Period] is selected. Specify the

password expiration period in [Validity Period:].

Registering User

Information in the Local

Device(P. 179)

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

[Prohibit use of 3 or more identical

consecutive characters]

[Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive

Characters] is selected. It is not possible to set a

password that includes the same character repeated

three or more times consecutively.

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

[Force use of at least 1 uppercase

character]

[Force Use of at Least 1 Uppercase Character] is

selected. Passwords are required to include at least one

uppercase alphabetic character.

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

[Force use of at least 1 lowercase

character]

[Force Use of at Least 1 Lowercase Character] is

selected. Passwords are required to include at least one

lowercase alphabetic character.

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

[Force use of at least 1 digit] [Force Use of at Least 1 Digit] is selected. Passwords are

required to include at least one numeric character.

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

[Force use of at least 1 symbol] [Force Use of at Least 1 Symbol] is selected. Passwords

are required to include at least one symbol.

Setting a Password

Policy(P. 210)

[Lockout Policy]

Block users from logging in for a specied period of time after a certain number of consecutive invalid login attempts.

[Enable lockout] [Enable Lockout] in [Authentication Function Settings] is selected.

Specify the values for [Lockout Threshold] and [Lockout Period].

Setting a Lockout

Policy(P. 209)

◼[Key/Certicate]

Protect important data by preventing the use of weak encryption, or by saving encrypted user passwords and keys in a

designated hardware component.

[Prohibit use of weak encryption] [Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption] is selected. It is not

possible to use weak encryption. When the check box is

selected, [Prohibit use of key/certicate with weak

encryption] can be selected.

Setting the Security

Strength and

Encryption

Method(P. 227)

[Prohibit use of key/certicate with weak

encryption]

[Prohibit Use of Key/Certicate with Weak Encryption] in

[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption] is selected. It is not

possible to use a key or certicate with weak encryption.

Setting the Security

Strength and

Encryption

Method(P. 227)

[Use TPM to store password and key] There are no setting items that the security policy is applied

to for the machine.

◼[Log]

You can periodically survey how the machine is used, by requiring logs to be recorded.

Managing the Machine

172

[Force recording of audit log] The following settings are set to <On>.

●<Display Job Log>

●<Save Audit Log>

●<Retrieve Network Authentication Log>

●<Rtrv Log w/Mngt Sftwr> in <Display Job Log> is set to

<Allow>.

Audit logs are always recorded.

<Display Job Log>(P. 399)

<Save Audit Log>(P. 399)

<Retrieve Network

Authentication Log>(P. 399)

[Force SNTP settings] In <SNTP Settings>, <Use SNTP> is set to <On>. Time

synchronization via SNTP is required. Enter a value for [NTP

Server Address] on the Remote UI setting screen.

<SNTP Settings>(P. 367)

◼[Job]

[Printing Policy]

Prevent information leakage from occurring when printing.

[Prohibit immediate printing of

received jobs]

[Force Hold] is selected. Only [Hold as Shared Job] in

[Condition Settings] can be set for [Action].

Printing does not occur immediately, even when printing

operations are performed.

Conguring the Forced

Hold Printing

Settings(P. 257)

[Sending/Receiving Policy]

Limit the sending operations for destinations, and limit how received data is processed.

[Allow sending only to registered addresses] There are no setting items that the security policy is applied to for the machine. -

[Force conrmation of fax number] There are no setting items that the security policy is applied to for the machine. -

[Prohibit auto forwarding] There are no setting items that the security policy is applied to for the machine. -

◼[Storage]

Delete unnecessary data in the memory of the machine to prevent information leaks.

[Force complete deletion of data] There are no setting items that the security policy is applied to for the machine. -

Managing the Machine

173

Managing Users

7KKL-079

You can ensure a higher level of security and eciency by utilizing a user authentication application (login service) to

manage the users of the machine ( Login Service(P. 174) ). It is recommended that the administrator manage all

users in accordance with your operating environment and required security measures. User Management

Functions(P. 174)

Conguring the Personal Authentication Management Settings(P. 176)

Using Other Convenient Personal Authentication Management Functions(P. 201)

A user authentication application (login service) called "User Authentication" is used as the primary method of

managing the users of the machine. With the User Authentication login service, personal authentication can be

performed for users based on the user name and password registered for each user. The user information is checked

either on the database inside the machine or on an external authentication server. With the ability to precisely dene

which functions are available to each user, you can personalize machine operations and improve security by limiting

access to certain functions. It may also be possible to use Department ID Management to manage groups, depending

on the device used for authentication.

User Management Functions

User management can provide the advantages described below. To protect important data and reduce costs, you can

limit access to the machine and dene the range of operations that are available to users.

Preventing Unauthorized Use by Third Parties

Because machine usage is limited to approved users, information leakage due to unauthorized use by third

parties is prevented, even if the machine is located in a busy area that is open to outside parties.

Setting the Privilege Levels

With personal authentication management, you can dene the range of available operations by specifying the

role (privilege level) for each user. Roles include the "Administrator" role, with full access privileges, and

the"GeneralUser" role that cannot use items that require Administrator privileges.

Managing the Machine

174

Setting Usage Restrictions

Personal authentication management enables a user with Administrator privileges to manage the range of

operations that are available to users.

Managing Groups of Users

Users can be assigned to groups based on Department ID (Department ID Management), enabling you to check

the total number of printed pages for each Department ID. You can also set specic limits for each Department

ID, such as a maximum of 500 printed pages. This function can help boost cost awareness and provide hints on

how to improve your operations.

Associating User Accounts with Keychains for Smooth Operations

●When authentication information different from the authentication information used when logging in is

required, the authentication information has to be entered once, but does not need to be entered again

once authentication is successful. This authentication information is called a keychain. Since keychains are

associated with user accounts, authentication information does not need to be entered again, even if the

power of the machine is turned OFF.

Associating User Accounts with Department IDs to Restrict the Number of Prints

●User Authentication user accounts can be associated with Department IDs. By specifying print restrictions

for Department IDs in advance, you can apply restrictions on the number of prints for each department that

a user belongs to. For information on associating user accounts with Department IDs, see Registering

User Information in the Local Device(P. 179) . For information on specifying restrictions according to

department, see Conguring the Department ID Management Settings(P. 205) .

Managing the Machine

175

Conguring the Personal Authentication Management

Settings

7KKL-07A

The User Authentication login service performs personal authentication based on the information registered for each

user, enabling you to limit the users who can access the machine. User information registration (authentication) can

be performed on this machine and on an external server. You can congure the authentication system to use only this

machine as the authentication device, or you can additionally specify an Active Directory or LDAP authentication server

on the network as an authentication device to utilize the existing user information registered on the server (

Authentication Device(P. 176) ). For the user login method, you can enter authentication information ( Login

Method(P. 176) ). Before conguring the user authentication settings, decide the authentication device and login

method. Conguring Personal Authentication Management with User Authentication(P. 177)

Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

Importing/Exporting User Data(P. 183)

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

Conguring the Authentication Functions(P. 196)

Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing via a Computer(P. 200)

Authentication Device

The authentication devices described below can be used for personal authentication management. Each type of

authentication device requires a different environment and settings. Conrm your system environment before

conguring. System Specications(P. 527)

Local Device (This Machine)

User information is managed on the database inside the machine. User information is registered and edited

from the Remote UI. When the local device is congured as a standalone authentication device, Department ID

Management can also be performed at the same time. Registering User Information in the Local

Device(P. 179)

Active Directory/LDAP Server

In addition to the local device, you can specify an LDAP server or Windows Server with Active Directory installed

as the authentication device. One advantage of using this type of device is that the users registered on the

server can be added as general users without any changes. To provide administrator privileges to a user, the

user must be assigned to a specic administrator group on the Active Directory or LDAP server. To specify the

additional authentication device, you must register the information of the server used for authentication.

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

The user login methods described below are available for personal authentication management.

Managing the Machine

176

Keyboard Authentication (Remote UI Only)

With this method, users log in by

entering a user name and

password. This method is available

regardless of the authentication

device that is used.

●Users cannot log in from the control panel of the machine with a user name and password.

Conguring Personal Authentication Management with User Authentication

Congure the personal authentication management settings in the order described below.

Check the basic conguration.

●Is the machine properly connected to the computer? Setting up the Network

Environment(P. 8)

●If you are using an authentication server, have the DNS settings been congured for

the machine?

●If you are using an authentication server, have the date and time been properly set?

Setting the Date/Time(P. 7)

Check the login service.

●Log in to the Remote UI with Administrator privileges, click [Settings/Registration]

[User Management] [Authentication Management] [Authentication Service

Information], and check that the login service is indicated as User Authentication.

Congure the authentication server settings.

●Register user information on the local device and specify the authentication server.

Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

Managing the Machine

177

Select the user authentication system.

Conguring the Authentication Functions(P. 196)

Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing via a Computer(P. 200)

●Make sure to log out after you nish using the Remote UI. If you close the Remote UI without logging out, it

may take a long time to log in next time.

Managing the Machine

178

Registering User Information in the Local Device

7KKL-07C

To perform personal authentication management, you must rst register user

information in the database of the machine.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Authentication Management].

Disabling "Administrator"

●"Administrator" is registered as the default administrator name (user name). This user cannot be deleted

but it can be disabled after adding a user with "Administrator" privileges. If the "Administrator" user is

disabled, you cannot change settings that only the "Aministrator" user can congure, on the control panel

of the machine.

4Click [Add User].

To edit user information

●Click [Edit] for the user information that you want to edit, make the necessary changes, and click [Update].

To delete user information

●Select the check box for the user information that you want to delete, and click [Delete] [OK].

5Enter the necessary information.

Managing the Machine

179

[User Name:] / [Password:] / [Conrm:]

Enter the user name and password. For conrmation, enter the password again in [Conrm:]. Single-byte

or double-byte characters can be used for the user name.

●When a detailed password policy is set, enter a password that complies with the password policy.

Setting a Password Policy(P. 210)

[No Expiry for Password]

Select the check box to set the password of the user to register to have no expiration date.

[Displayed As:]

Enter the name of the user. The display name is displayed as the user name for forced hold printing.

[E-Mail Address:]

Enter the e-mail address that the user is using on devices such as computers.

●It is also possible for general users to change their own password.

●Selecting the [Allow e-mail address settings] check box enables general users to specify e-mail addresses.

Conguring the User Login Methods and Authentication Devices(P. 196)

6Specify other required settings.

[User Name for Universal Print:]

If [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [Settings for Universal Print] is enabled, you can enter

the email address or phone number used in the Microsoft 365 account of the user with which Universal

Print jobs are associated.

[Department ID:]

When using Department ID Management, you must click [Department ID Settings...] and select the

Department ID from the list to assign to the user. First, register the necessary Department IDs in [Register

Managing the Machine

180

New Department...] on the list screen. If the Department ID that you specify here is later deleted, make

sure to change this setting. Conguring the Department ID Management Settings(P. 205)

[Select Role to Set:]

The user privileges (roles) listed below can be selected. Also specify the settings here when adding an

administrator. The available setting items vary depending on the privileges ( Settings/

Registration(P. 298) ).

[Administrator] Allows all operations as an administrator of the machine.

[GeneralUser] Allows general user privileges.

[Set expiration for the user account]

When setting a period of validity for the account, select the check box and enter a value for [Expiration].

[Disable the user account]

Select the check box to temporarily disable the account.

7Click [Add].

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Check for unregistered Department IDs

●If you click [Check Unregistered Department ID...] on the screen displayed in step 4, you can nd out

Department IDs that are not registered in the machine by checking Department IDs assigned to the users

against Department IDs registered in the machine.

Batch settings for Department IDs

●If you click [Batch Settings for Department ID...] on the screen displayed in step 4, you can create new

Department IDs and apply settings for all users.

●If the user name is comprised of numbers and is seven digits or fewer, the same number is assigned to the

same user as the Department ID. If the password of the same user is registered as a number that is seven

digits or fewer, it is also set as the PIN for that Department ID.

●If the user name and password do not meet the above conditions, a Department ID is automatically

assigned starting from 0000001, and 0 (none) is set for the PIN.

Registering the Department ID as the User Name

●If you click [Add User Using Department ID...] on the screen in step 4, a new user with the same name as the

Department ID is registered. When keyboard authentication is used, authentication can be performed using

numeric key entry only.

LINKS

Managing the Machine

181

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

Conguring the Authentication Functions(P. 196)

Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing via a Computer(P. 200)

Managing the Machine

182

Importing/Exporting User Data

7KKL-07E

You can save user information stored in the machine to a computer (export), as well as load user information from

other machines into the machine you are using (import). This is useful when you want to register multiple users at

once.

Exporting User Data(P. 183)

Manually Importing User Data(P. 183)

●For information on editing a CSV le for importing, see Adding and Editing User Information in a CSV

File(P. 186) .

●If duplicates of data exist in a CSV le for importing, the version of the data that was read rst will be

prioritized and registered.

●It is recommended that you export the registered/edited user data to make a backup copy.

Exporting User Data

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Authentication Management].

4Click [Export].

5Select the le format, and click [Start Export].

●User information created in the le format that can be used with User Authentication is exported. The le

extension is "csv."

6Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location to store the le.

➠The csv le is stored.

Manually Importing User Data

You can manually specify data for importing and update user information.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Managing the Machine

183

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Authentication Management].

4Click [Import] [Manual Import Settings...]

5Specify the required settings.

[File Path:]

Specify the path of the le for importing.

[File Format:]

Select the le format for importing.

●<User Authentication Format>:

Imports user information created in the le format that can be used with User Authentication. The le

extension is "csv."

[Import Method:]

Select whether to import only updated or added user data, or all user data.

●If you select [Perform full import] and a user with the same user name is already registered, the user

information is overwritten.

●When importing information of a user who accesses the Advanced Space with SMB, specify the

appropriate value in the "password" column. If you export the data from the machine and import it to the

other machine without performing the above operation, authentication may fail. (The value is "********"

when exported.)

●When performing a complete import, any users not listed in the imported les are deleted from the

machine. However, "-----" and "Administrator", which are registered by default, will remain even if they are

not listed in the imported les.

[Application Timing:]

Select [Apply immediately] or [Specify the date and time]. If you select [Specify the date and time], enter

the desired date and time or the time only.

Managing the Machine

184

●If the user information cannot be reected at the specied time because the machine is turned OFF or is

completely in the Sleep mode, the information is reected when the machine recovers.

6Click [Start Import]

●If the Department ID (dept_id) and PIN (dept_pin) are written in the imported CSV le, [Check Unregistered

Department ID] will be displayed after importing is complete. Perform Department ID registration.

Managing the Machine

185

Adding and Editing User Information in a CSV File

7KKL-07F

This section describes the content of each column in a CSV le used for importing or exporting. Refer to this section

when editing CSV les.

However, if "No" is written in the "Change Required" section for a particular column, do not change the content of that

column.

Column Name Change

Required

Valid

Characters

Invalid

Characters

Compatibility

With Remote

UI Screen

Notes

uid Yes 1 to 32

characters

Control

characters,

single-byte

spaces, and

the following

characters:

\ / : * ? | < >

[ ] ; , = + @ "

●Must be input when importing.

●"@" may be available depending on a

setting. Conguring the User

Devices(P. 196)

password Yes 0 to 32

characters

within the

ISO885915

character set

Control

characters

●Output as "********" (* x 8) when

exporting.

●When updating the password,

"********" will be deleted and

overwritten by the new password.

However, when importing changes,

even if you leave the eld unspecied

(blank), it will not be overwritten as

empty (blank), but will instead retain

the existing value.

●If this item is omitted when importing

changes, the existing user will carry

over the original password.

cn Yes 0 to 32

characters

Control

characters

N/A

cn;lang-ja;phonetic Yes 0 to 32

characters

Control

characters

See "Notes." Displayed as "phonetic" if the display

language is set to "Japanese."

mail Yes Combination

of 0 to 256

alphanumeric

characters and

symbols

Control

characters

N/A

dept_id Yes A number up

to seven digits

Non-single-

byte

numeric

characters

N/A

dept_pin Yes A number up

to seven digits

Non-single-

byte

numeric

characters

N/A

Managing the Machine

186

Column Name Change

Required

Valid

Characters

Invalid

Characters

Compatibility

With Remote

UI Screen

Notes

roleName Yes 0 to 32

characters

Control

characters,

single-byte

spaces, and

the following

characters:

\ / : * ? | < >

[ ] ; , = + @ "

If this item is omitted, or if a name is

specied that is not registered in role

management, it will be changed to the

initial role setting.

accountExpires Yes See "Notes." See "Notes." YYYYMMDD format. "235959" is

automatically added as the time after

importing.

accountDisabled Yes 1 or 0 Any

character

besides "1"

(disable) or

"0" (enable)

N/A

createDate Yes See "Notes." See "Notes." -

(N/A)

●Output in the

"TYYYYMMDDhhmmssmmm" format

when exporting. (The "T" is added in

order to prevent corruption of the

text.)

●When importing, input the

information in one of the following

formats.

●YYYYMMDDhhmmssmmm

●TYYYYMMDDhhmmssmmm

●YYYYMMDD

●TYYYYMMDD

●If you omit this item, the date and

time of importing is used for the date

and time of registration for new

users. For existing users, the original

registration date and time are carried

over.

lastLoginDate Yes See "Notes." See "Notes." -

(N/A)

●The date and time that the user last

logged in are stored.

●Output in the

"TYYYYMMDDhhmmssmmm" format

when exporting. (The "T" is added in

order to prevent corruption of the

text.)

●When importing, input the

information in one of the following

formats.

●YYYYMMDDhhmmssmmm

●TYYYYMMDDhhmmssmmm

●YYYYMMDD

●TYYYYMMDD

Managing the Machine

187

Column Name Change

Required

Valid

Characters

Invalid

Characters

Compatibility

With Remote

UI Screen

Notes

●Used for determining whether a user

has logged in and whether to

perform automatic user deletion.

●If you omit this item, the date and

time that the user last logged in are

blank for new users. For existing

users, date and time that the user last

logged in are carried over.

dc No 0 to 32

characters

Control

characters

(N/A)

Cannot be changed. It will be

automatically assigned for the following

users.

●Users registered following server

authentication

uuid No - - - Cannot be changed. Automatically

assigned during user registration.

sdl_digest No - - - Cannot be changed. Automatically

generated when registering/changing

password.

uac_advbox_digest1 No - - - Cannot be changed. Automatically

generated when registering/changing

password.

uac_advbox_digest2 No - - - Cannot be changed. Automatically

generated when registering/changing

password.

pin_digest No - - - Cannot be changed. Automatically

generated when registering/changing

PIN.

server_user_g No - - - Cannot be changed. This is an

identication ag for the user registered

after completing server authentication.

server_user_gp_key No - - - Cannot be changed. This is the group to

which the user who is registered after

completing server authentication

belongs.

server_user_gp_value No - - - Cannot be changed. This is the group to

which the user who is registered after

completing server authentication

belongs.

CharSet - - - - For UTF8, "CharSet:UTF8" will be written

in the column line.

Managing the Machine

188

●The line at the beginning of the le is the column line.

●Items names may not appear in sequence.

●The encodings supported by CSV les are UTF-8, SJIS, BIG5, GB2312, and Korean.

●Text strings in exported CSV les are surrounded by ″[″ and ″]″ if any of the following conditions apply. When

editing a CSV le and adding new text strings that meet the following conditions, surround any such text

strings with "[" and "]".

- Numbers starting with "0"

- Numbers greater than 12 digits

- Text strings surrounded by "[" and "]"

Managing the Machine

189

Registering Server Information

7KKL-07H

To specify an Active Directory or LDAP server as an additional authentication device,

you must register the information of the server used for authentication. Conduct a

connection test as necessary.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Authentication Management].

4Click [Server Settings] [Edit...].

5Set the authentication server and domain information.

[Use Active Directory]

Select the check box when using Active Directory.

[Set Domain List:]

Select whether the Active Directory information of the login destination is retrieved automatically or

entered manually. To enter it manually, select [Set Manually] and add the domain of the login destination

in [Active Directory Management...].

Managing the Machine

190

[Use access mode within sites]

Select the check box if there are multiple Active Directory servers and you want to assign access priority to

the Active Directory located in the same site as the machine. Change the settings for [Timing of Site

Information Retrieval:] and [Site Access Range:] as necessary.

●Even when [Only site to which device belongs] in [Site Access Range:] is set, the machine may access sites

outside the site it belongs to when performing domain controller access during the startup process.

However, access to domain controllers in the same site as the machine is prioritized. As an exception, if

domain controllers in the same site cannot be accessed but domain controllers outside the site can be

accessed, priority is given to accessing domain controllers outside the site.

[Number of Caches for Service Ticket:]

Specify the number of service tickets that the machine can hold. A service ticket is an Active Directory

function that acts as a record of a previous login, which reduces the amount of time it takes for the same

user to log in next time.

[Use LDAP server]

Select the check box when using an LDAP server.

[Period Until Timeout:]

Specify the time limit for attempting to connect to the authentication server and the time limit for waiting

for a response. When [Save authentication information for login users] is enabled, if you cannot log in

within the time limit specied here, login is attempted using the authentication information saved in the

cache.

[Default Domain of Login Destination:]

Specify the domain that has connection priority.

Manually specifying the Active Directory domain

1Select the check box for [Use Active Directory] and select [Set Manually] for [Set Domain List:].

2Click [Active Directory Management...] [OK].

3Click [Add Domain...].

4Enter the necessary information.

[Domain Name:]

Enter the domain name of the Active Directory that is the login destination (Example:

company.domain.com).

[NetBIOS Name]

Enter the NetBIOS domain name (Example: company).

Managing the Machine

191

[Primary Host Name:] / [Secondary Host Name:]

Enter the host name of the Active Directory server (Example: ad-server1). When using a secondary

server, specify the name in [Secondary Host Name:].

[User Name:] / [Password:]

Enter the user name and password to use for accessing and searching the Active Directory server.

[Login Name:] / [Displayed As:] / [E-Mail Address:]

Specify the data elds (attribute names) for the login name, display name, and e-mail address of each

user account on the Active Directory server (Example: sAMAccountName, cn, mail).

5Click [Test Connection] to conrm that connection is possible, and then click [Add].

To edit server information

●Click [Edit] for the server information that you want to edit, make the necessary changes, and click

[Update].

Registering LDAP server information

1Select the check box for [Use LDAP server] and click [LDAP Server Management...] [OK].

2Click [Add Server...].

3Enter the LDAP server information.

[Server Name]

Enter the name for the LDAP server. The name "localhost" cannot be used. The server name may not

include spaces.

[Primary Address]

Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server (Example: ldap.example.com). The loopback

address (127.0.0.1) cannot be used.

[Port:]

Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server. Use the same setting that is

congured on the server. If you do not enter a number, it is automatically set to "636" when the check

box is selected for [Use TLS], or it is set to "389" when the check box is cleared.

[Secondary Address:] / [Port:]

Managing the Machine

192

When using a secondary server in your environment, enter the IP address and the port number.

[Comments]

Enter a description or note as necessary.

[Use TLS]

Select the check box when using TLS encryption for communications with the LDAP server.

[Use authentication information]

Clear the check box to allow anonymous access to the LDAP server, only if the LDAP server is set to

allow anonymous access. When using the user name and password for authentication, select the check

box and enter values for [User Name:] and [Password:].

[Starting Point for Search:]

Specify the location (level) to search for user information when LDAP server authentication is

performed.

4Specify how to set the attribute names and domain name.

[User Name (Keyboard Authentication):]

Specify the LDAP data eld (attribute name) for the user name on the LDAP server (Example: uid).

[Login Name:] / [Display Name:] / [E-Mail Address:]

Specify the LDAP data elds (attribute names) for the login name, display name, and e-mail address of

each user account on the LDAP server (Example: uid, cn, mail).

[Specify the domain name] / [Specify the attribute name for domain name acquisition]

Select how to set the domain name of the login destination. To specify the domain name directly, select

[Specify the domain name] and enter the domain name. To specify an LDAP data eld (attribute name)

from which to acquire the domain name on the LDAP server, select [Specify the attribute name for

domain name acquisition] and enter the attribute name (Example: dc).

5Click [Test Connection] to conrm that connection is possible, and then click [Add].

To edit server information

●Click [Edit] for the server information that you want to edit, make the necessary changes, and click [Update].

6Enter the user information and set the privileges.

Managing the Machine

193

[Save authentication information for login users]

Select the check box to save the authentication information of users who log in via the control panel. After

the settings are congured, the saved authentication information can be used for login, even if the

machine is unable to connect to the server. Change the [Retention Period:] setting as necessary.

[User Attribute to Browse:]

Enter the data eld (attribute name) on the referenced server that is used to determine user privileges

(roles). Normally, you can use the preset value of "memberOf", which indicates the group that the user

belongs to.

[Retrieve role name to apply from [User Attribute to Browse]]

Select the check box to use the character string registered in the data eld on the server specied in [User

Attribute to Browse:] for the role name. Before conguring, check the role names that can be selected on

the machine, and register them on the server.

[Conditions]

You can set the conditions that determine user privileges. The conditions below are applied in the order

that they are listed.

[Search Criteria] Select the search criteria for [Character String].

[Character String]

Enter the character string that is registered to the attribute specied in [User Attribute

to Browse:]. To set the privileges based on the group that user belongs to, enter the

group name.

[Role] Select the privileges that apply to users who match the criteria.

The [Conditions] settings when using Active Directory servers

●"Canon Peripheral Admins" is set in advance as the Administrator user group. Assign different privileges

to the other groups created on the server.

7Click [Update].

8Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 272)

Managing the Machine

194

DNS Settings

The following settings are required if the port number used for Kerberos on the Active Directory side is

changed.

●Information for the Kerberos service of Active Directory must be registered as an SRV record as follows:

●Service: "_kerberos"

●Protocol: "_udp"

●Port number: The port number used by the Kerberos service of the Active Directory domain (zone)

●Host offering this service: Host name of the domain controller that is actually providing the Kerberos

service of the Active Directory domain (zone)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

LINKS

Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

Conguring the Authentication Functions(P. 196)

Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing via a Computer(P. 200)

Managing the Machine

195

Conguring the Authentication Functions

7KKL-07J

You can congure the user login methods, authentication devices, and other authentication functions based on your

system environment and needs.

Conguring the User Login Methods and Authentication Devices

Specify the user login methods ( Login Method(P. 176) ) and authentication devices ( Authentication

Device(P. 176) ). Note that the authentication devices need to be set up before conguring the settings below.

Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Authentication Management].

4Click [Basic Settings] [Edit...].

5Specify the required settings.

●Select the login methods that you want to use, and specify detailed settings such as authentication device

settings.

Using keyboard authentication

Congure the settings below when using keyboard authentication.

[Authenticate With:]

Select the user authentication device.

Managing the Machine

196

●Select the check box for [Local Device] if you are using the database inside this machine to manage user

information.

●When using an external authentication server, select [Server] and specify the type of server.

Conguring detailed settings for authentication functions

You can congure detailed settings for the personal authentication functions.

[Authentication Mode:]

Select the authentication mode to use for Remote UI login. When [Guest Authentication Mode] is selected,

unregistered users can also log in by clicking [Log In (Guest)]. Select [Administrator Authentication Mode] to

only allow users with Administrator privileges to log in.

[Web Service Authentication Method:]

Select the local device authentication method to use for communications with Web service applications.

[Match Case for User Name]

If this function is set, you can set whether user names are case-sensitive.

●It is recommended that this is set together with [Function Settings] [Printer] [Print] [Match Case for

User Name]

[Allow Use of @ in User Name]

Select whether to allow "@" to be used in user names.

Managing the Machine

197

[Automatically set the department ID at user registration]

Select the check box to automatically allocate a Department ID when you register/edit a user via the Remote

UI. A new Department ID will not be allocated if one has already been allocated. This setting can only be

specied from the Remote UI.

●If the user name is comprised of numbers and is seven digits or fewer, the same number is assigned to

the same user as the Department ID. If the password of the same user is registered as a number that is

seven digits or fewer, it is also set as the PIN for that Department ID.

●If the user name and password do not meet the above conditions, a Department ID is automatically

assigned starting from 0000001, and 0 (none) is set for the PIN.

●In the following cases, the Department ID is not registered automatically.

●If a user is registered from the control panel of the machine

●If 1,000 Department IDs are already registered

●If 1,001 or more users are already registered

[Automatically Delete Department ID at User Deletion]

If this check box is selected, when a user is deleted, the department ID assigned to the user is automatically

deleted. Counter information assigned to the corresponding department ID is also deleted. If multiple users

are registered to the department ID, it is not automatically deleted.

[Default Role When Registering User:]

Select the role to apply to users in situations such as when no privileges are set.

[Allow e-mail address settings]

Select the check box to enable users without Administrator privileges to specify their own e-mail addresses in

their user accounts.

[Functions to Restrict:]

Select the check boxes for functions that cannot be used when personal authentication management is

enabled.

[Delete users that have not logged in for the specied period]

Select the check box to delete users registered in the local device who have not logged in to the machine for

a specied period of time. Make sure to also specify the number of days before automatic deletion and the

time it is executed.

●If you set [Auto Delete After:] to [0], all accounts other than the administrator are deleted at the time set in

[Auto Delete Time:].

●If the accounts cannot be deleted at the specied time because the machine is turned OFF or is completely

in sleep mode, the accounts are deleted the next time that the machine starts.

●If a user has never logged in before, the date and time that the user was registered is displayed as the

time that the user last logged in.

Managing the Machine

198

[Communication Mode for Kerberos Authentication:]

Select the communication method used for Kerberos authentication.

6Click [Update].

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 272)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

LINKS

Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing via a Computer(P. 200)

Managing the Machine

199

Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing via a

Computer

7KKL-07K

You can apply personal authentication management to printing via a computer. This can provide greater security, as

the machine does not accept these operations unless the user is identied.

Start the Remote UI [Settings/Registration] [User Management] [Authentication

Management] [Basic Settings] [Edit...] [Functions to Restrict:] select [Remote job without

user authentication].

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

LINKS

Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

Conguring the Authentication Functions(P. 196)

Managing the Machine

200

Using Other Convenient Personal Authentication

Management Functions

7KKL-07L

Personal authentication management provides a variety of advantages in addition to user authentication. This section

describes some of the other convenient functions that use personal authentication to expand the capabilities of

printers/multifunctional printers, such as managing user groups.

Department ID Management

Users registered in the machine can be organized into groups such as the departments that they belong to, and

managed based on their Department ID. This function lets you check the total number of pages used for each

Department ID, or set maximum limits on the number of pages that each department can use for printing,

which can help reduce costs. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 202)

Managing the Machine

201

Setting the Department ID Management

7KKL-07R

Users can be organized into groups such as the departments that they belong to, and managed based on their

Department ID. First, create all of the Department IDs that are to be managed, and assign users to each one (

Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179) ). After assigning users to Department IDs, enable

Department ID Management. To perform the same type of management for printing from a computer, congure the

additional required settings. Administrator privileges are required in order to congure these settings.

Changing the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 203)

Conguring the Department ID Management Settings(P. 205)

Using Department IDs to Manage Printing via Computer(P. 208)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Department ID Management Settings] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

202

Changing the System Manager ID and PIN

7KKL-07S

When Department ID Management is enabled, Department IDs must be set for users before they can log in. The

System Manager ID and System Manager PIN are both set to "7654321" by default, but it is recommended to change

them for security reasons. Follow the procedure below to change them.

●Make sure that you do not forget the System Manager PIN. If you forget the System Manager PIN, contact

your dealer or service representative.

●This setting is not a default User Authentication administrator setting. To specify this setting for a user with

administrator privileges in User Authentication, set [Select Role to Set:] to "Administrator". Registering

User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Management Settings> <User Management> <System Manager

Information Settings>.

3Select <System Manager ID and PIN>.

4Set the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN.

●Set <System Manager ID> <System Manager PIN>.

●You cannot register a System Manager ID or PIN consisting only of 0s, such as "00" or "0000000".

●Even if you enter fewer than seven digits, zeros are added to the start of the number, and a seven digit

number is set.

●You can also make entering seven digits a requirement for the System Manager ID and System Manager

PIN. For more information, contact your dealer or service representative.

Setting the administrator information

1Select <System Manager Name>/<E-Mail Address>/<Contact Information>/<Comment>.

2Enter the information and select <Apply>.

Managing the Machine

203

●For information on entering text, see Entering Characters(P. 90) .

LINKS

Conguring the Department ID Management Settings(P. 205)

Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

Managing the Machine

204

Conguring the Department ID Management Settings

7KKL-07U

You can organize and manage users in groups based on Department ID. Follow the procedure below to congure

Department ID Management and enable the machine to count the number of pages used for printing.

Enabling Department ID Management(P. 205)

Registering Department IDs and PINs(P. 206)

●Make sure that Department IDs have been set for the users registered in the machine. Registering User

Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

●Department ID Management is only valid for users who are registered to the local device.

●If you login as a user with Administrator privileges, a System Manager ID and PIN are automatically

assigned, and managed as Department ID.

●For information on the number of Department IDs that you can register, see Management

Functions(P. 531) .

Enabling Department ID Management

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Department ID Management].

4Click [Edit].

5Select [Enable Department ID Management].

Managing the Machine

205

6Click [OK].

Registering Department IDs and PINs

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Department ID Management].

4Click [Register New Department].

To edit Department ID settings

●Click the department ID to edit to display the edit screen.

To delete Department ID settings

●Click [Delete] for the department ID to delete [OK].

5Enter the required information, and click [OK].

[Department ID]

Enter a number of 7 digits or less for the Department ID.

[PIN]

Enter the PIN (seven digits maximum). Enter the PIN again in [Conrm]. If you do not want to set a PIN,

leave it blank.

[Page Limit]

You can restrict the number of pages that a registered department can print. Select the target types and

enter the page totals.

●You cannot register a Department ID or PIN consisting only of 0s, such as "00" or "0000000".

●Even if you enter fewer than seven digits, zeros are added to the start of the number, and a seven digit

number is set.

●You can also make entering seven digits a requirement for Department IDs and PINs. For more

information, contact your dealer or service representative.

Managing the Machine

206

●The machine stops printing if any one of the color or black-and-white page limits is reached while printing

a document that contains both color and black-and-white areas.

To check the page counts

●If you want to check the total number of pages used by each Department ID for printing, check [Department

ID Page Totals] on the screen displayed in step 4. The page counts do not include blank pages or sample

prints used for checking items such as gradation adjustment.

Logging In Using a Department ID and PIN

●By registering a user with the same name as a department ID, login operations can be performed using a

registered department ID and PIN. Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

LINKS

Using Department IDs to Manage Printing via Computer(P. 208)

Managing the Machine

207

Using Department IDs to Manage Printing via

Computer

7KKL-07W

You can use Department ID Management to manage printing operations performed via a computer. Use this function

when you would like to improve security or monitor the number of pages that are printed.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [User Management] [Department ID Management].

4Click [Edit].

5Deselect the operations to restrict.

●When deselected, department ID entry is required when executing the corresponding type of job.

●Select this check box to accept print jobs and black-and-white print jobs from printer drivers that do not

support Department ID Management.

6Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

208

Setting an Authentication/Password Policy

7KKL-0J8

You can set a policy regarding lockout (the state where users temporarily cannot log into the machine) and password

operation/entry.

Setting a Lockout Policy(P. 209)

Setting a Password Policy(P. 210)

Setting a Lockout Policy

You can set a policy for temporarily preventing a user that fails user authentication from logging in. However, this

policy does not apply to authentication that uses information such as department IDs and PINs.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Security Settings] [Authentication/Password Settings].

4Click [Edit] in [Authentication Function Settings].

5Select [Enable Lockout] and congure the detailed settings.

[Lockout Threshold]

Set the login failure count for lockout. The user becomes unable to log in when the set count is reached.

[Lockout Period]

Set the time until the lockout is canceled.

●When logging in to the machine from an operating system such as Windows or an application that uses

FTP, IPP, or SNMPv3, lockout may occur before the set count.

6Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

209

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Setting a Password Policy

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Security Settings] [Authentication/Password Settings].

4Click [Edit] in [Authentication Function Settings].

5Set the password operation and user authentication policy.

[Prohibit Caching of Authentication Password for Access to External Servers]

Select this check box to prevent passwords entered during login from being saved in the cache.

[Display Warning When Default Password Is in Use]

Select this check box to display the screen for changing the password when the Administrator logs in to

the machine using the default user name and password.

●If the password has expired, the screen for changing the password appears, regardless of this setting.

[Allow Use of Default Password for Remote Access]

Select this check box to allow the default password to be used when logging in from the Remote UI.

[Set Minimum Number of Characters for Password]

Managing the Machine

210

You can set the minimum number of characters required when registering a password to prevent the

simplication of passwords. When a password length is set, a user cannot be registered with a blank

password.

[Set Password Validity Period]

To periodically prompt users to change their password, select this check box and specify a period in

[Validity Period].

[Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive Characters]

Select this check box to restrict passwords so that the same character cannot be used consecutively three

or more times.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Uppercase Character]

Select this check box to restrict passwords so that only passwords which include at least one uppercase

character can be registered.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Lowercase Character]

Select this check box to restrict passwords so that only passwords which include at least one lowercase

character can be registered.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Digit]

Select this check box to restrict passwords so that only passwords which include at least one number can

be registered.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Symbol]

Select this check box to restrict passwords so that only passwords which include at least one symbol can

be registered.

6Click [OK].

●The settings in to do not apply to Department ID Management and PINs. They are valid for

passwords that are registered/edited after the restrictions are set. When a password that is already

registered exceeds the restrictions for these settings, a screen prompting to change the password is

displayed when user authentication is performed.

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

211

Conguring the Network Security Settings

7KKL-07X

Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,

and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these

attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.

Firewall Settings

Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and breaches, can be blocked by only allowing

communication with devices that have a specic IP address. Restricting Communication by Using

Firewalls(P. 214)

Proxy Settings

When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy

server. When the proxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely, therefore, security can be

expected to be enhanced. Setting a Proxy(P. 223)

TLS Encrypted Communication

TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web

browser or an e-mail application. TLS encrypted communication enables secure network communication when

accessing the machine using the Remote UI. Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

IPSec Communication

While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application,

IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system

than TLS. Conguring the IPSec Settings(P. 246)

Managing the Machine

212

IEEE 802.1X Authentication

If a device tries to connect and start communicating on an 802.1X network, the device must go through user

authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information

is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication to the network depending

on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the

outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. Conguring the

IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 253)

Managing the Machine

213

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls

7KKL-07Y

By conguring packet ltering to only allow communication with devices that have a specic IP address or MAC

address, you can reduce the risk of unauthorized access by outside third parties. Administrator privileges are required

in order to congure these settings.

Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 218)

Conguring the Firewall of the Sub Line(P. 220)

Managing the Machine

214

Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings

7KKL-080

You can set whether to allow or reject communication with a device that has a specic IP address. After conguring the

IP addresses in the rewall settings, you can check the results in the log of blocked communication requests. You can

also set whether to allow or reject ICMP communications such as PING commands, etc., after specifying rewall

settings.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] for [IPv4 Address

Filter]/[IPv6 Address Filter].

●Select the lter that matches the target IP address. To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer,

select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from a computer, select [Inbound Filter].

4Specify the settings for packet ltering.

●Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then

specify IP addresses for exceptions.

[Use Filter]

Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

[Default Policy]

Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.

[Reject]

Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from

devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications

with other devices are prohibited.

[Allow]

Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from devices

whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other

devices are permitted.

5Click [Register New].

6Specify exception addresses.

●Enter the IP address (or range of IP addresses) in [Address to Register].

Managing the Machine

215

●If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI, in

which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.

<Network>(P. 365)

Entry form for IP addresses

Description Example

Entering a single address

IPv4:

Delimit numbers with periods. 192.168.0.10

IPv6:

Delimit alphanumeric characters with

colons.

fe80::10

Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

Specifying a range of addresses with a prex Enter the address, followed by a slash and a

number indicating the prex length.

192.168.0.32/27

fe80::1234/64

When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter

●Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.

7Specify the port number as required.

●The exception address setting only applies to communication received from the specied IP address using

the designated port number. Enter the port number, and click [Add].You can register up to 50 ports per

one exception address for both IPv4/IPv6.

8Click [OK].

Deleting an IP address from exceptions

●Click [Delete] for the exception address to delete.

Checking the blocked communication requests in the log

●The latest 100 communications blocked by the rewall can be checked in [Settings/Registration] [Network

Settings] [IP Address Block Log]. The history of blocked communications can be exported from the

Remote UI in the CSV format. Exporting a Log as a File(P. 274)

Managing the Machine

216

●If [Default Policy] is set to [Reject], the history of communication blocked by the rewall is not displayed in

[IP Address Block Log].

To allow or reject ICMP sending and receiving

Click [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [IPv4 Address Filter]/[IPv6 Address Filter]

[ICMP Sending/Receiving Settings] select or deselect [Always Allow Sending/Receiving

Using ICMP].

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable IP address ltering from <Set> in the <Home> screen.

<Network>(P. 365)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

LINKS

Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 218)

Managing the Machine

217

Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings

7KKL-081

You can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses, or block devices with specied MAC

addresses but permit other communications.

●This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN or sub line.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] for [MAC Address

Filter].

●To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer, select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from

a computer, select [Inbound Filter].

4Specify the settings for packet ltering.

●Select the precondition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the

machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.

[Use Filter]

Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

[Default Policy]

Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.

[Reject]

Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from

devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications

with other devices are prohibited.

[Allow]

Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from devices

whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with

other devices are permitted.

Managing the Machine

218

5Specify exception addresses.

●Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].

●You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.

●If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the Remote

UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. <Network>(P. 365)

When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter

●Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.

6Click [OK].

Deleting a MAC address from exceptions

●Select a MAC address and click [Delete].

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable MAC address ltering from <Set> in the <Home> screen.

<Network>(P. 365)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

LINKS

Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

Managing the Machine

219

Conguring the Firewall of the Sub Line

7KKL-082

You can set whether to allow communication only with devices that have the specied IP address for communication

with the sub line.

●Only IPv4 addresses can be registered for the sub line.

●For information on the exception addresses and exception port numbers that can be used for

communication and are registered by default, see Management Functions(P. 531) .

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Firewall Settings].

●Select the lter that matches the target IP address. To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer,

select [IPv4 Address: Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from a computer, select [IPv4 Address:

Inbound Filter].

4Specify the settings for packet ltering.

●Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then

specify IP addresses for exceptions.

[Use Filter]

Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

[Default Policy]

Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.

Managing the Machine

220

[Reject]

Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from

devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications

with other devices are prohibited.

[Allow]

Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from devices

whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other

devices are permitted.

5Click [Register New].

6Specify exception addresses.

●Enter the IP address (or range of IP addresses) in [Address to Register].

●If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI, in

which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> to <Off>.

<Network>(P. 365)

Entry form for IP addresses

Description Example

Entering a single address Delimit numbers with periods. 192.168.0.10

Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

Specifying a range of addresses with a prex Enter the address, followed by a slash and a

number indicating the prex length. 192.168.0.32/27

When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter

●Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.

7Specify the port number as required.

●The exception address setting only applies to communication received from the specied IP address using

the designated port number. Enter the port number, and click [Add].You can register up to 50 ports per

one exception address.

8Click [OK].

Deleting an IP address from exceptions

●Click [Delete] for the exception address to delete..

Managing the Machine

221

Checking the blocked communication requests in the log

●The latest 100 communications blocked by the rewall can be checked in [Settings/Registration] [Network

Settings] [IP Address Block Log]. The history of blocked communications can be exported from the

Remote UI in the CSV format. Exporting a Log as a File(P. 274)

●If [Default Policy] is set to [Reject], the history of communication blocked by the rewall is not displayed in

[IP Address Block Log].

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable IP address ltering from <Set> in the <Home> screen.

<Network>(P. 365)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

222

Setting a Proxy

7KKL-083

A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other

devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The

client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the

resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks

but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. Administrator

privileges are required in order to congure these settings.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [Proxy Settings].

4Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.

[ HTTP Proxy Server Address]

Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.

[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]

Change the port number as necessary.

[Use Proxy within Same Domain]

Select the check box to also use the specied proxy server for communication with devices in the same

domain.

●This setting is only displayed for the proxy settings screen of the main line.

[Use Proxy Authentication]

To use the authentication function of a proxy server, select this check box and enter the user name for

authentication in [User Name] and the new password to set in [Password] using alphanumeric characters.

5Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

223

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

224

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS

7KKL-084

You can use TLS encrypted communication to prevent sning, spoong, and tampering of data that is exchanged

between the machine and other devices such as computers. When conguring the settings for TLS encrypted

communication, you must specify a key and certicate (server certicate) to use for encryption. You can use the key

and certicate that are preinstalled in the machine, or you can generate your own or acquire them from a certication

authority. Administrator privileges are required in order to congure these settings.

Setting TLS(P. 225)

Setting the Security Strength and Encryption Method(P. 227)

●If you want to use a key and certicate that you generate yourself, generate the key and certicate before

performing the procedure below. Generating the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication(P. 229)

●If you want to use a key and certicate that you acquire from a certication authority (CA), register the key

and certicate before performing the procedure below. Registering a Key and Certicate(P. 234)

Setting TLS

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [TLS Settings].

4Click [Key and Certicate].

5Click [Use] for the key and certicate to use for TLS encrypted communication.

Managing the Machine

225

●If you want to use the preinstalled key and certicate, select [Default Key].

6Click [Network Settings] [TLS Settings].

7Specify [Maximum Version] and [Minimum Version].

8Select the algorithm to use, and click [OK].

The following combinations of TLS version and algorithm are available.

: Available

-: Unavailable

Algorithm

TLS Version

[TLS 1.3] [TLS 1.2] [TLS 1.1] [TLS 1.0]

[Encryption Algorithm]

[AES-CBC (256-bit)] -

[AES-GCM (256-bit)] - -

[3DES-CBC] -

[AES-CBC (128-bit)] -

[AES-GCM (128-bit)] - -

[CHACHA20-POLY1305] - - -

[Key Exchange Algorithm]

[RSA] -

[ECDHE]

[X25519] - - -

[Signature Algorithm]

Managing the Machine

226

[RSA]

[ECDSA]

[HMAC Algorithm]

[SHA1] -

[SHA256] - -

[SHA384] - -

●[Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2] cannot be used when [CHACHA20-POLY1305] or [X25519] is

selected.

Starting the Remote UI with TLS

●If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the

security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed

to display the Remote UI screen. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Setting the Security Strength and Encryption Method

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Security Settings] [Encryption/Key Settings].

4Click [Edit] in [Encryption Settings].

5Congure the encryption settings and encryption method, and click [OK].

Managing the Machine

227

[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]

Select this check box to prohibit the use of weak encryption with a key length of 1024 bits or less. To

prohibit the use of keys and certicates that use weak encryption, select [Prohibit Use of Key/Certicate

with Weak Encryption].

[Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2]

Select this check box to make functions using encryption comply with FIPS 140-2.

●If you select [Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2], you can make the TLS communication encryption

method comply with the United States government-approved FIPS (Federal Information Processing

Standards) 140-2, but the following limitations apply.

- An error will occur if you specify a certicate for TLS that uses an algorithm not recognized by FIPS (lower

than RSA2048bit).

- A communication error will occur if the communication destination does not support FIPS-recognized

encryption algorithms.

- [CHACHA20-POLY1305] and [X25519] can no longer be used.

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

LINKS

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 229)

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 231)

Registering a Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 234)

Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Conguring E-Mail Print Settings(P. 45)

Managing the Machine

228

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication

7KKL-085

The machine can generate the key and certicate (server certicate) used for TLS

encrypted communication. If you want to start using TLS encrypted communication

immediately, it is convenient to use the key and certicate that are preinstalled in the

machine. If necessary, have an administrator generate a key and certicate. Note,

however, that TLS encrypted communication is not enabled simply by generating a

key and certicate. Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

●If you want to use a server certicate with a CA signature, you can generate the key along with a CSR,

instead of the certicate. Generating a Key and CSR(P. 231)

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Generate Key].

Deleting a registered key and certicate

●Select the key and certicate to delete → click [Delete] [OK].

●A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "TLS" or

"IEEE 802.1X" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key and

certicate before deleting it.

5Click [Network Communication].

6Specify settings for the key and certicate.

Managing the Machine

229

[ Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a

list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the hash algorithm to use for the signature. The available hash algorithms vary depending on the

key length ( Management Functions(P. 531) ). A key length of 1024 bits or more can support SHA384

and SHA512 hash algorithms.

[Key Algorithm]

Select [RSA] or [ECDSA] as the key generation algorithm. Select the key length if you selected [RSA] and the

key type if you selected [ECDSA]. In both cases, a higher value provides greater security but reduces the

communication processing speed.

●If [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature Algorithm], the key length cannot be set to [512-bit]

when [RSA] is selected for [Key Algorithm].

[ Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]/[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the start date and end date of the validity period for the certicate. [Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/

DD)] cannot be set to a date before the date in [Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)].

[Country/Region]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list. You

can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US" for

the United States.

[State]/[City]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Common Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name" is

often abbreviated as "CN."

7Click [OK].

●Generating a key and certicate may take some time.

●After the key and certicate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.

LINKS

Registering a Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 234)

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

Conguring the IPSec Settings(P. 246)

Managing the Machine

230

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)

7KKL-08K

Certicates generated on this machine do not have a CA signature, which may cause communication errors with some

communication peers. To request a certicate with a CA signature, certicate signing request (CSR) data is required. A

user who logs in with administrator privileges can generate a CSR.

Generating a Key and CSR(P. 231)

Registering a Certicate to a Key(P. 232)

Generating a Key and CSR

You can generate a key and CSR on the machine. You can also display the CSR data on the screen and export it as a le.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Generate Key].

5Click [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)].

6Congure the necessary items for the key and certicate.

[Key Name]

Enter a name for the key. Use a name that will be easy to nd when displayed in a list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Managing the Machine

231

Select the hash algorithm to use for the signature.

[Key Algorithm]

Select the key algorithm, and specify the key length if [RSA] is selected, or specify the key type if [ECDSA] is

selected.

[Country/Region]

Select the country code from the list, or enter it directly.

[State]/[City]

Enter the location.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter the organization name.

[Common Name]

Enter the IP address or FQDN.

●When performing IPPS printing in a Windows environment, make sure to enter the machine's IP

address.

●A DNS server is required in order to enter the FQDN of the machine. Enter the IP address if a DNS server

is not used.

7Click [OK].

➠The CSR data is displayed.

●If you want to save the CSR data to a le, click [Store in File] and specify the save location.

●The key that generated the CSR is displayed on the key and certicate list screen, but you cannot use it by

itself. To use this key, you need to register the certicate that is later issued based on the CSR. Registering

a Certicate to a Key(P. 232)

Registering a Certicate to a Key

You can register the certicate that was applied for and issued based on the CSR.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4In the [Certicate] list, click for the certicate that you want to register.

Managing the Machine

232

5Click [Register Certicate].

6Register the certicate.

●Click [Browse...], specify the le (certicate) to register, and click [Register].

Managing the Machine

233

Registering a Key and Certicate for Network

Communication

7KKL-08H

You can use the Remote UI to register keys/certicates and CA certicates to the machine from your computer.

Designate an administrator to register these items.

Registering a Key and Certicate(P. 234)

Registering a CA Certicate(P. 235)

The communication methods listed below use a key/certicate or CA certicate. If you want to use a registered

key and certicate in actual communication, you need to specify the key and certicate in the settings for each

communication method. However, an X.509 DER format CA certicate does not need to be specied in the

settings for each communication method. You can use it simply by registering it to the machine.

●TLS encrypted communication Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

●IPSec Conguring the IPSec Settings(P. 246)

●IEEE 802.1X Conguring the IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 253)

Registering a Key and Certicate

Keys and certicates (server certicates) can be registered via the Remote UI. For information on the keys and

certicates that can be registered on the machine, see Management Functions(P. 531) .

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Register Key and Certicate].

5Click [Install].

6Install the key and certicate.

●Click [Browse...], specify the les (key and certicate) to install, and click [Start Installation].

Managing the Machine

234

7Register the key and certicate.

1Select the key and certicate that you want to register, and click [Register].

2Enter the key name and password, and click [OK].

[Key Name]

Use alphanumeric characters to enter the name of the key that was registered to the machine.

[Password]

Use alphanumeric characters to enter the password of the private key that is set for the le to

Managing keys and certicates

You can check the detailed settings or delete keys and certicates on the screen displayed in step 4.

●If is displayed, the key is corrupted or invalid.

●If is displayed, the certicate for the key does not exist.

●Click a key name to display detailed information about the certicate. You can also click [Verify Certicate] on

this screen to check whether the certicate is valid.

●To delete a key and certicate, select the one that you want to delete, and click [Delete] [OK].

Registering a CA Certicate

X.509 DER format CA certicates are preinstalled in the machine. You can register a new CA certicate if it is required

by a particular function. For information on the CA certicates that can be registered on the machine, see

Management Functions(P. 531) .

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Managing the Machine

235

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [CA Certicate Settings].

4Click [Register CA Certicate].

5Click [Install].

6Install the CA certicate.

●Click [Browse...], specify the le (CA certicate) to install, and click [Start Installation].

7Register the CA certicate.

●Select the CA certicate that you want to register, and click [Register].

Managing CA certicates

You can check the detailed settings or delete CA certicates on the screen displayed in step 4.

●Click to display detailed information about the CA certicate. You can also click [Verify Certicate] on

this screen to check whether the CA certicate is valid.

●To delete a CA certicate, select the one that you want to delete, and click [Delete] [OK].

Managing the Machine

236

Conguring the Expiration Check Method for Received

Certicates

7KKL-08J

There are two methods for verifying whether certicates received from the other party in communication are valid:

Comparing with the certicate revocation list (CRL) registered in the machine and querying an OCSP (online certicate

status protocol) responder (a server that supports OCSP). Set the method for checking the expiration of certicates

according to your environment. This registration can only be performed by the administrator.

Registering a Certicate Revocation List (CRL)(P. 237)

Conguring the Online Certicate Status Protocol (OCSP)(P. 238)

Registering a Certicate Revocation List (CRL)

You can use the Remote UI to register a certicate revocation list (CRL). For information on the CRLs that can be

registered on the machine, see Management Functions(P. 531) .

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Certicate Revocation List (CRL) Settings].

4Click [Register CRL].

5Register the CRL.

●Click [Browse...], specify the le (CRL) to register, and click [Register].

Managing the Machine

237

Managing CRLs

You can check the detailed settings or delete CRLs on the screen displayed in step 4.

●Click to display detailed information about it. You can also click [Verify CRL] on this screen to check

whether the CRL is valid.

●To delete a CRL, select the one that you want to delete, and click [Delete] [OK].

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Certicate/Certicate Revocation List (CRL) Settings] when batch exporting.

Importing/Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Conguring the Online Certicate Status Protocol (OCSP)

You can congure the certicate verication level and the OCSP responder to connect to.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [OCSP (Online Certicate Status Protocol) Settings].

4Select the check box for [Use OCSP (Online Certicate Status Protocol)], and

congure the online certicate status protocol (OCSP).

［Certicate Verication Level］

Set whether to disable certicates in situations such as the following:

●When the machine cannot connect to the OCSP responder

●When a timeout occurs

●When expiration cannot be checked, such as when the result of checking the expiration of a certicate

via the OCSP responder is unknown

［OCSP Responder Settings］

Specify the URL for connecting to the OCSP responder.

Managing the Machine

238

［Custom URL］

When [Use custom URL] or [Use Certicate URL (Use Custom URL If Certicate URL Cannot Be Retrieved)]

is selected, enter the URL of the OCSP responder (ASCII code only, maximum 255 characters).

［Communication Timeout］

Set the time until communication with the OCSP responder times out. The connection is canceled if there

is no response from the OCSP responder within the set time.

5Click [OK].

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

239

Retrieving/Updating a Certicate from an SCEP Server

7KKL-08L

A request for issuing the certicate required for keys generated with the machine can be sent to an SCEP (Simple

Certicate Enrollment Protocol) server that manages certicates. Certicates issued from the SCEP server are

automatically registered to the machine. Administrator privileges are required to send a request for issuing a

certicate.

Specifying the Communication Settings of the SCEP Server(P. 240)

Requesting a Certicate to Be Issued(P. 241)

Requesting a Certicate to Be Issued at the Specied Time(P. 242)

Checking the Status of Requesting a Certicate to Be Issued(P. 244)

Specifying the Communication Settings of the SCEP Server

You can specify the settings for communicating with the SCEP server.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)].

4Click [Communication Settings].

5Set the required communication settings.

[SCEP Server URL:]

Specify the URL of the SCEP server to connect to.

[Port Number:]

Enter the port number to use for communicating with the SCEP server.

[Communication Timeout:]

Enter the timeout time for communication with the SCEP server. The connection is canceled if there is no

response from the SCEP server within the set time.

6Click [Update].

Managing the Machine

240

●The settings cannot be updated when [Enable Timer for Certicate Issuance Auto Request] is selected.

Requesting a Certicate to Be Issued at the Specied Time(P. 242)

●For information on the supported versions of SCEP, see Management Functions(P. 531) .

Requesting a Certicate to Be Issued

You can manually request a certicate to be issued.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)].

4Click [Certicate Issuance Request].

5Set the items required for requesting a certicate to be issued.

[Key Name:]

Enter the name for the key. Enter a name that will be easy to nd when displayed in a list.

[Signature Algorithm:]

Select the hash function to use for the signature.

[Key Length (bit):]

Select the key length.

[Organization:]

Enter the organization name.

[Common Name:]

Enter the IP address or FQDN.

Managing the Machine

241

●When performing IPPS printing in a Windows environment, make sure to enter the IP address of the

machine.

●A DNS server is required to enter the FQDN of the machine. Enter the IP address of the machine if a

DNS server is not used.

[Challenge Password:]

When a password is set on the SCEP server side, enter the challenge password included in the request

data (PKCS#9) for requesting a certicate to be issued.

[Key Use Location:]

Select the destination where the key will be used. When [IPSec] is selected, select the IPSec of the

destination from the drop-down list.

●When selecting something other than [None], enable the various functions in advance. If a certicate is

successfully obtained with the various functions disabled, the certicate is assigned as the destination,

but the various functions are not automatically enabled.

6Click [Send Request].

7Click [Restart].

●A manual request for issuing a certicate cannot be sent when [Enable Timer for Certicate Issuance

Auto Request] is selected. Requesting a Certicate to Be Issued at the Specied Time(P. 242)

●The information set here is not saved to the storage of the machine.

Requesting a Certicate to Be Issued at the Specied Time

You can set to automatically request a certicate to be issued at a specied time.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)].

4Click [Settings for Certicate Issuance Auto Request].

5Set the items required for requesting a certicate to be issued.

Managing the Machine

242

[Enable Timer for Certicate Issuance Auto Request]

Select this to automatically request a certicate to be issued at a specied time, and specify the start date/

time in [Request Start Date/Time:].

[Auto Adjust Issuance Request Time]

Select this to adjust the time to send the request. This reduces load on the SCEP server when multiple

printers/multifunction printers send a request at the same time. The time is randomly adjusted 1 to 600

seconds from the time specied in [Request Start Date/Time:].

[Perform Polling When Communication Error Occurs or When Issuance Request Is Deferred]

Select this to check the status of the SCEP server when a communication error has occurred or when a

certicate issue request is pending. Specify the number of polling times and polling interval.

●In the following cases, polling is not performed and an error occurs.

- When the machine has exceeded the limit of keys and certicates it can hold

- When an error is included in the retrieved response data

- When an error occurs on the SCEP server side

[Send Periodic Issuance Requests]

Select this to periodically send an automatic request for a certicate to be issued, and specify the interval

in [Request Interval: Every:].

When an automatic request for a certicate to be issued is performed successfully, the next date/time to

issue a request is displayed in [Next Request Date/Time:].

[Automatically Restart Device After Acquiring Certicate]

Select this to restart the machine after the certicate is retrieved.

●The machine is restarted even during batch importing/exporting.

[Delete Old Key and Certicate]

Select this to overwrite the old key and certicate.

Managing the Machine

243

●The key and certicate with the same destination for use are overwritten.

●The default key is not overwritten.

[Settings for Key and Certicate To Be Issued]

Enter the information for the key to generate. For information on the settings, see step 5 of Requesting

a Certicate to Be Issued(P. 241) .

6Click [Update].

Checking the Status of Requesting a Certicate to Be Issued

The certicate requested and issued based on the CSR is registered in the key.

Start the Remote UI click [Settings/Registration] [Device Management] [Certicate Issuance

Request Status].

●The following statuses are displayed in [Status].

- [To Be Processed]: The next date/time to issue a request is displayed in [Request Date/Time].

- [Processing...]: Polling is being performed.

- [Error]: An error such as a communication error or key upper limit exceeded error has occurred.

- [Successful]: The date/time that the certicate was successfully issued is displayed in [Request Date/Time].

●The information displayed in [Details] in [Error] is indicated below.

[Details] Cause

Deferred The pending status was returned from the SCEP server.

Key and Certicate Registration Limit Error The limit to the number of keys and certicates that can be

registered in the machine was reached.

Communication Error (TOP ERROR) Connection to the SCEP server failed/a communication

timeout occurred.

Communication Error (TOP ERROR <HTTP status

code>)

An HTTP error occurred.

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR Fail Info 0) Unrecognized or unsupported algorithm.

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR Fail Info 1) Integrity check (meaning signature verication of the CMS

message) failed.

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR Fail Info 2) Transaction not permitted or supported.

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR Fail Info 3) The signingTime attribute from the CMS

authenticatedAttributes was not suciently close to the

system time.

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR Fail Info 4) No certicate could be identied matching the provided

criteria.

Managing the Machine

244

●History for the last 20 certicates is displayed. When the number of certicates exceeds 20, the oldest

information is overwritten.

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●When performing batch exporting, this setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic

Information]. Importing/Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

Conguring the IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 253)

Conguring the IPSec Settings(P. 246)

Managing the Machine

245

Conguring the IPSec Settings

7KKL-086

By using IPSec, you can prevent third parties from intercepting or tampering with IP packets transported over the IP

network. Because IPSec adds security functions to IP, a basic protocol suite used for the Internet, it can provide

security that is independent of applications or network conguration. To perform IPSec communication with this

machine, you must congure settings such as the application parameters and the algorithm for authentication and

encryption. Administrator privileges are required in order to congure these settings.

Enabling IPSec(P. 247)

Registering a Policy(P. 247)

Communication mode

●This machine only supports transport mode for IPSec communication. As a result, authentication and

encryption is only applied to the data portions of IP packets.

Key exchange protocol

This machine supports Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1) for exchanging keys based on the Internet

Security Association and Key Management Protocol (ISAKMP). For the authentication method, set either the pre-

shared key method or the digital signature method.

●When setting the pre-shared key method, you need to decide on a passphrase (pre-shared key) in advance,

which is used between the machine and the IPSec communication peer.

●When setting the digital signature method, use a CA certicate and a PKCS#12 format key and certicate to

perform mutual authentication between the machine and the IPSec communication peer. For more

information on registering new CA certicates or keys/certicates, see Registering a Key and Certicate

for Network Communication(P. 234) . Note that SNTP must be congured for the machine before it uses

this method. Making SNTP Settings(P. 40)

●Regardless of the setting of [Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2] for IPSec communication, an

encryption module which has already obtained FIPS140-2 certication will be used.

●In order to make IPSec communication comply with FIPS 140-2, you must set the key length of both DH and

RSA for IPSec communication to 2048-bit or longer in the network environment that the machine belongs to.

●Only the key length for DH can be specied from the machine.

●Take note when conguring your environment, as there are no settings for RSA in the machine.

●You can register up to 10 security policies.

Managing the Machine

246

Enabling IPSec

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [IPSec Settings].

4Select [Use IPSec], and click [OK].

●To only receive packets that correspond to the security policy, select [Reject] for [Receive Non-Policy

Packets].

Registering a Policy

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Network Settings] [IPSec Policy List].

4Click [Register New IPSec Policy].

5Set a policy.

Managing the Machine

247

[Policy Name]

Enter a name for identifying the policy.

[Policy On/Off]

Select [On] to enable the registered policy.

[Only Allow 256-bit for AES Key Length]

Select this check box to restrict the key length of the AES encryption method to 256 bit and meet CC

authentication standards.

6Congure the IPSec application parameters.

1Click [Selector Settings].

2Specify the IP address to apply the IPSec policy to.

●Specify the IP address of this machine in [Local Address], and specify the IP address of the

communication peer in [Remote Address].

[All IP Addresses] IPSec is applied to all sent and received IP packets.

[IPv4 Address] IPSec is applied to IP packets sent to and received from the IPv4 address of this

machine.

[IPv6 Address] IPSec is applied to IP packets sent to and received from the IPv6 address of this

machine.

[All IPv4 Addresses] IPSec is applied to IP packets sent to and received from the IPv4 address of the

communication peer.

[All IPv6 Addresses] IPSec is applied to IP packets sent to and received from the IPv6 address of the

communication peer.

[IPv4 Manual Settings] Specify the IPv4 address to apply IPSec to.

Managing the Machine

248

●Select [Single Address] to enter an individual IPv4 address.

●Select [Range Address] to specify a range of IPv4 addresses. Enter a separate

address for [First Address] and [Last Address].

●Select [Subnet Settings] to specify a range of IPv4 addresses using a subnet

mask. Enter separate values for [First Address] and [Subnet Settings].

[IPv6 Manual Settings]

Specify the IPv6 address to apply IPSec to.

●Select [Single Address] to enter an individual IPv6 address.

●Select [Range Address] to specify a range of IPv6 addresses. Enter a separate

address for [First Address] and [Last Address].

●Select [Prex Address] to specify a range of IPv6 addresses using a prex. Enter

separate values for [First Address] and [Prex Length].

3Specify the port to apply IPSec to.

●Select [Specify by Port Number] to use port numbers when specifying the ports that IPSec applies to.

Select [All Ports] to apply IPSec to all port numbers. To apply IPSec to a specic port numberSingle

Port] and enter the port number. Specify the port of this machine in [Local Port], and specify the port

of the communication peer in [Remote Port].

●To specify the ports to apply IPSec to by service name, select [Specify by Service Name] and select the

services to use.

4Click [OK].

7Congure the authentication and encryption settings.

1Click [IKE Settings].

2Congure the necessary settings.

[IKE Mode]

Managing the Machine

249

Select the operation mode for the key exchange protocol. Security is enhanced if you select [Main]

because the IKE session itself is encrypted, but the speed of the session is slower than with

[Aggressive], which does not encrypt the entire session.

[Validity]

Set the expiration period of the generated IKE SA.

[Authentication Method]

Select one of the authentication methods described below.

[Pre-Shared Key Method]

Set the same passphrase (pre-shared key) that is set for the communication peer.

Select [Shared Key Settings], enter the character string to use as the shared key,

and select [OK].

[Digital Signature Method] Set the key and certicate to use for mutual authentication with the

communication peer. Click [Key and Certicate], and click [Use] for the key to use.

[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]

Select either [Auto] or [Manual Settings] to set how to specify the authentication and encryption

algorithm for IKE phase 1. If you select [Auto] an algorithm that can be used by both this machine and

the communication peer is set automatically. If you want to specify a particular algorithm, select

[Manual Settings] and congure the settings below.

[Authentication] Select the hash algorithm.

[Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm.

[DH Group] Select the group for the Die-Hellman key exchange method to set the key

strength.

3Click [OK].

●When [IKE Mode] is set to [Main] on the [IKE] screen and [Authentication Method] is set to [Pre-Shared

Key Method], the following restrictions apply when registering multiple security policies.

●Pre-shared key method key: when specifying multiple remote IP addresses to which a security

policy is to be applied, all shared keys for that security policy are identical (this does not apply when

a single address is specied).

●Priority: when specifying multiple remote IP addresses to which a security policy is to be applied,

the priority of that security policy is below security policies for which a single address is specied.

8Congure the IPSec communication settings.

1Click [IPSec Network Settings].

2Congure the necessary settings.

Managing the Machine

250

[Validity]

Set the expiration period of the generated IPSec SA. Make sure to set either [Time] or [Size]. If you set

both, the setting with the value that is reached rst is applied.

[PFS]

If you select [Use PFS], the secrecy of the encryption key is increased but communication speed is

slower. In addition, the Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) function must be enabled on the

communication peer device.

[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]

Select either [Auto] or [Manual Settings] to set how to specify the authentication and encryption

algorithm for IKE phase 2. If you select [Auto], the ESP authentication and encryption algorithm is set

automatically. If you want to specify a particular authentication method, select [Manual Settings] and

select one of the authentication methods below.

[ESP]

Authentication and encryption are both performed. Select the algorithm for [ESP

Authentication] and [ESP Encryption]. Select [NULL] if you do not want to set the

authentication or encryption algorithm.

[ESP (AES-GCM)] AES-GCM is used as the ESP algorithm, and authentication and encryption are

both performed.

[AH (SHA1)] Authentication is performed, but data is not encrypted. SHA1 is used as the

algorithm.

3Click [OK] .

9Click [OK].

10 Enable the registered policies and check the order of priority.

●Policies are applied in the order that they are listed, starting at the top. If you want to change the order of

priority, select a policy in the list and click [Raise Priority] or [Lower Priority].

Managing IPSec policies

You can edit policies on the screen displayed in step 4.

●To edit the details of a policy, click the policy name in the list.

●To disable a policy, click the policy name in the list select [Off] for [Policy On/Off] click [OK].

●To delete a policy, select the policy in the list click [Delete] [OK].

Managing the Machine

251

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable IPSec communication from <Set> in the <Home> screen. <IPSec

Settings>(P. 369)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

252

Conguring the IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings

7KKL-087

In a network environment that uses IEEE 802.1X authentication, unauthorized network access is blocked by a LAN

switch (authenticator) that only grants access privileges to client devices (supplicants) that are authorized by the

authentication server (RADIUS server). To connect this machine to an IEEE 802.1X network, settings such as the

authentication method used by the authentication server must be congured on the machine. Administrator privileges

are required in order to congure these settings.

IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method

The machine supports the authentication methods described below. You must register a CA certicate before

using any of these authentication methods. Registering a CA Certicate(P. 235)

EAP-TLS (Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Level Security)

The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually sending certicates. A CA

certicate must be registered on the machine to verify the certicate (server certicate) sent from the

authentication server. In addition, a PKCS#12 format key and certicate (client certicate) must be specied

in this setting, so that the authentication server can authenticate the machine. Register these items before

conguring the settings ( Registering a Key and Certicate(P. 234) ). This authentication method cannot

be used in combination with the other methods.

EAP-TTLS (EAP-Tunneled TLS)

Only the authentication server sends a certicate. A CA certicate must be registered on the machine to

verify the certicate (server certicate) sent from the authentication server. In addition, a user name and

password need to be specied in these settings, so that the authentication server can authenticate the

machine. Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Version 2 (MS-CHAPv2) or Password

Authentication Protocol (PAP) can be selected as the internal authentication protocol to support EAP-TTLS.

PEAP (Protected EAP)

Only the authentication server sends a certicate. A CA certicate must be registered on the machine to

verify the certicate (server certicate) sent from the authentication server. In addition, a user name and

password need to be specied in these settings, so that the authentication server can authenticate the

machine. Only MS-CHAPv2 can be selected as the internal authentication protocol to support PEAP.

Setting the IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

Managing the Machine

253

3Click [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].

4Select [Use IEEE 802.1X] and congure the required settings.

[Login Name]

Enter the name (EAP Identity) of the login user to receive IEEE 802.1X authentication.

[Verify Authentication Server Certicate]

Select this check box when verifying server certicates sent from an authentication server.

[Verify Authentication Server Name]

To verify the common name in the server certicate, select this check box and enter the name of the

authentication server where the login user is registered in [Authentication Server Name].

5Select the authentication method and congure the necessary settings.

Selecting EAP-TLS

1Select [Use TLS] and click [Key and Certicate].

2Click [Use] for the key to use in the list.

Selecting EAP-TTLS/PEAP

1Select [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP].

Managing the Machine

254

●To use EAP-TTLS, select [Use MSCHAPv2] or [Use PAP] for [TTLS Settings (TTLS Protocol)].

2Click [Change User Name/Password].

●To set a user name that differs from the login name for IEEE 802.1X authentication, deselect [Use

leave it selected.

3Enter the user name and password.

●To set or change the password, select this check box and enter the same password in [Password] and

[Conrm].

6Click [OK].

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Set> in the <Home> screen. <IEEE 802.1X

Settings>(P. 371)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

255

Restricting the Machine's Functions

7KKL-0JX

You can restrict the use of certain functions that may lead to information leaks or that are subject to misuse. It is also

possible to completely disable the use of individual functions.

Restricting Printing from a Computer

You can prohibit all users from printing documents from a computer, or only allow printing if the user is

authorized on the machine. You can also congure the machine so that only Encrypted Secure Print documents

can be printed. Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 257)

Restricting the Use of Memory Media

Although memory media such as USB memory devices provide convenience, they also increase the potential for

security risks such as information leakage. You can set access restrictions for memory media based on your

security policy. Restricting the Use of Memory Media(P. 261)

Restricting Use of the Operation Panel

You can restrict use of the functions and keys on the control panel to protect the machine settings from

inadvertent changes or operations. Restricting Use of the Operation Panel(P. 262)

Managing the Machine

256

Restricting Printing from a Computer

7KKL-0K2

You can restrict printing from a computer ( Printing From a Computer(P. 111) ) so that only specic types of

documents can be printed. You can also congure the machine so that documents are not printed until the user is

authorized on the machine ( Printing Documents Held in the Machine(P. 118) ). You can also restrict the machine

to only print Encrypted Secure Print documents, which can prevent information leakage due to unattended printouts

or unprotected print data. Administrator privileges are required in order to congure these settings.

Prohibiting Printing from a Computer(P. 257)

Conguring the Forced Hold Printing Settings(P. 257)

Setting Other Limitations(P. 259)

Prohibiting Printing from a Computer

You can prohibit users from printing documents from a computer.

<Set> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Restrict Printer Jobs> <On> Select the restriction

exceptions

Conguring the Forced Hold Printing Settings

When printing documents from a computer, you can hold print data in the machine

and prevent documents from being printed immediately ( Printing Documents

Held in the Machine(P. 118) ). You can congure settings so that printing cannot be

performed until the user is authorized on the machine, which ensures greater

security and reduces the risk of other people viewing or inadvertently picking up

sensitive documents. Administrator privileges are required in order to congure

these settings.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Printer] [Print].

4Select [Force Hold], set the necessary conditions, and click [OK].

Managing the Machine

257

●You can set detailed conditions for holding printer jobs, such as the user or IP address. If no conditions are

set, all print jobs are held except for jobs from unidentied users. If no conditions are set and a print job

from an unidentied user is received, it is canceled without being held.

Setting the conditions for holding documents

1Click [Register New].

2Set the conditions for holding documents, and click [OK].

[Condition Name]

Enter a name for the condition. Use a name that will be easy to identify when displayed in a list.

[Enable Condition]

Select this check box to enable the condition.

[Job Condition]

The types of conditions listed below can be selected.

[User Name] Specify a particular user name as the condition. If this is left blank, print

documents for which the user cannot be identied will be targeted.

[IP Address] Specify a particular IP address as the condition. You can also specify a

range of IP addresses.

[Input Method] Specify a particular printing protocol as the condition.

[Target]

You can set either a value specied by the operation target, or one not specied.

[Action]

Select how to handle documents that match the conditions. When [Hold as Shared Job] is selected,

you can set [ID for Substitution] to specify the user name output to the log when printing. Select

[Cancel] to discard the document.

3Set the order in which to apply the conditions, and select [OK].

●The conditions are applied in the order that they are listed, starting at the top. To change the priority,

click [Up] or [Down] in the list.

●To edit the details of a condition, click the condition name in the list.

●To disable a condition, click the condition name in the list deselect [Enable Condition].

●To delete a condition, select [Delete] for the condition to delete in the list click [OK].

Managing the Machine

258

Conguring the detailed settings for forced hold printing

●You can congure detailed settings for documents that are held for printing, such as how long to save them

and how to display them. <Print>(P. 396)

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Setting Other Limitations

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Printer] [Print].

4Set the other limitations.

[Delete Job After Printing]

Select this check box to delete jobs after they are printed.

[Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs]

Select this check box to only receive encrypted secured print jobs from computers.

[Require Domain Name to Determine My Job]

Select this check box to determine the print jobs of login users as "user name + domain name."

[Display Other User Jobs]

Select this check box to display the jobs of users other than the authenticated user.

[Restrict Deletion of Other User Jobs]

Managing the Machine

259

Select this check box to allow jobs of users other than the authenticated user to be deleted when the jobs

of users other than the authenticated user are displayed.

[Match Case for User Name]

Select this check box to make user names case-sensitive.

[Enable Auto Print Function When Logging In]

Select this check box to allow forced hold print jobs to be automatically printed when each user logs in.

[Require PIN for Job Deletion]

Select this check box to prompt the user to enter a PIN when deleting a secure print job.

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

260

Restricting the Use of Memory Media

7KKL-088

Although memory media such as USB memory devices provide convenience, they can also be a source of information

leakage if they are not properly managed. This section describes the procedure for prohibiting the use of memory

media to prevent the printing of data saved on memory media. Administrator privileges are required in order to

congure these settings.

Select <Set> <Function Settings> <Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> <Use Print

Function> <Off>.

LINKS

Using Memory Media(P. 138)

Printing From Memory Media (Media Print)(P. 128)

Managing the Machine

261

Restricting Use of the Operation Panel

7KKL-0JE

You can restrict use of the functions and keys on the control panel to protect the machine settings from inadvertent

changes or operations.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Key Lock/Function Lock Settings].

4Select the keys and functions to lock, and click [OK].

Batch importing/batch exporting

●This setting can be imported/exported with models that support batch importing of this setting.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

262

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)

7KKL-08A

You can remotely operate the machine from your computer's Web browser to perform operations such as checking

the printing status, changing the machine settings, or editing the Address Book. This convenient feature enables you

to remain at your desk while operating the machine. To perform remote operation, enter the IP address of the

machine in your Web browser and open the Remote UI portal page. For more information on the system requirements

for the Remote UI, see System Environment(P. 535) .

How to Use the Remote UI

This section describes the Remote UI login procedure and the features of the Remote UI main screen.

Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Checking the Status of Waiting Documents and the Machine

This section describes how to check the status of printed documents, as well as error information and the

remaining amount of paper.

Checking the Status and Logs(P. 269)

Other Functions Available Using the Remote UI

This section describes various other convenient functions that can be performed via computer using the

Remote UI, such as editing the Address Book, checking les in the Fax/I-Fax Inbox from a computer, and

backing up the machine settings in case they are needed.

Turning OFF/Restarting the Machine(P. 272)

Managing the Logs(P. 273)

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

Updating the Firmware(P. 282)

Updating the Firmware (Distribution)(P. 284)

Setting Scheduled Updates(P. 287)

Displaying Messages from the

Administrator(P. 289)

Setting the Website for Purchasing

Consumables(P. 290)

Managing the Machine

263

When using a proxy server

●You cannot access the machine via a proxy server. If a proxy server is used in your environment, congure

your Web browser to bypass the proxy server and access the machine directly.

Managing the Machine

264

Starting the Remote UI

7KKL-08C

To start the Remote UI, enter the IP address of the machine in your Web browser. Check the IP address congured for

the machine before performing this operation. Setting an IP Address(P. 22)

For security reasons, you cannot log in to the Remote UI using the default password (7654321) for the Administrator

user. Log in to the Remote UI after changing the password of the Administrator user from the control panel.

<Set> <Management Settings> <User Management> <Authentication Management> <Set

Administrator Password> change the password for "Administrator"

●When both the machine and the Active Directory server are set as user authentication devices (

Conguring the User Login Methods and Authentication Devices(P. 196) ), the time setting of the Active

Directory server needs to match that of the machine.

Using TLS encryption for communication

●When you want to encrypt the Remote UI communication, congure the TLS key and certicate (

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225) ), go to the <Remote UI Settings> setting ( <Remote

UI Settings>(P. 401) ) and set <Use TLS> to <On>, then turn the machine OFF and back ON.

Logging in to the Remote UI using the default password of the Administrator user

●You can also set to allow logging in to the Remote UI using the default password of the Administrator user.

Setting a Password Policy(P. 210)

Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Setting the Timeout Time after Logging In to the Remote UI(P. 266)

Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

Starting the Remote UI

1Start the Web browser.

2Enter the IP address of the machine, and press the [ENTER] key on the computer

keyboard.

Managing the Machine

265

●Enter "http://<IP address of the machine>/" in the address input eld.

●When using an IPv6 address, enclose the IP address portion in brackets ([ ]) (Example: http://

[fe80:2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).

If the Remote UI does not start

●If the login screen is not displayed in step 3 of this procedure, clear the Web browser's cache and enter the

IP address again.

If a message related to security is displayed

●A warning message may be displayed if the Remote UI communication is encrypted. If there are no

problems with the certicate or TLS settings, you can continue using the Web browser.

3Log in to the Remote UI.

●Enter a registered user name and password in [User Name] and [Password], select the login destination in

[Login Destination], and click [Log In].

●If [Log In (Guest)] is displayed, unregistered users can click this button and log in as general users.

●With some user authentication settings, the Remote UI may skip the login screen and display the main

screen (portal page) directly. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

4Check that the Remote UI portal page is displayed. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

●When using the Remote UI to operate the machine, do not use the Web browser's [Back] button. The page

may not change properly if you use the [Back] button.

Setting the Timeout Time after Logging In to the Remote UI

The user is automatically logged out if no operations are performed for a certain period of time after logging in to the

Remote UI. You can set the time until the user is logged out.

Start the Remote UI [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [Session Settings] [Timeout

After Logging in to Remote UI] set the timeout time after login [OK]

Remote UI Screen

The portal page shown below is displayed when you log in to the Remote UI. This section describes the items

displayed on the portal page and the basic operations.

●Some display items and functions are only available if you log in with Administrator privileges.

Managing the Machine

266

●If multiple users are operating the Remote UI at the same time or the control panel of the machine is being

operated at the same time as the Remote UI, the last operation that is performed is effective.

Device information

The current machine status is displayed, along with information about errors, consumables, etc.

Display language

You can switch the language that is displayed on the Remote UI screen.

[Log Out]

Log out from the Remote UI and return to the login page.

[E-Mail to System Manager]

Create an e-mail message to send to the administrator. The administrator's e-mail address can be set in

[Settings/Registration] [User Management] [System Manager/Contact Person Information Settings].

[Status Monitor/Cancel]

You can check the status of jobs or cancel processing. You can also check detailed information about the

amount of remaining toner and paper, etc. Checking the Status and Logs(P. 269)

[Settings/Registration]

You can change the machine settings. You can save the setting details to a computer, or import them from a

computer to the machine. Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●You can use either the control panel or the Remote UI to change most machine settings, but some settings

can only be changed using one or the other.

Managing the Machine

267

[Basic Tools]

You can print documents.

Directly Printing Files without Opening Them(P. 124)

[Management Tools]

You can manage applications.

[Portal Display Settings]

You can change the order in which the [Basic Tools] and [Management Tools] buttons are displayed on the

portal page.

Messages/support

Messages from the administrator are displayed, along with links to machine support information.

Displaying Messages from the Administrator(P. 289)

●To update the current page with the latest information, click .

LINKS

Settings/Registration(P. 298)

Managing the Machine

268

Checking the Status and Logs

7KKL-08E

You can use the Remote UI to check the status of documents that are waiting to be processed, as well as the logs for

documents that have been processed. You can also check the status of the machine, such as error information and the

remaining amount of consumables.

Checking the Status of Prints(P. 269)

Checking the Job Log(P. 270)

Checking the Machine Status(P. 270)

●When personal authentication management is used, you can restrict users from performing operations on

the jobs of other users on the <Status Monitor> screen. <Restrict Access to Other User Jobs>(P. 399)

Checking the Status of Prints

You can check the status of documents that are waiting to be printed. You can also output a document before the

others, or cancel a document.

Start the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status] under [Print]

Operation buttons

●[Cancel]: Printing is canceled. The canceled document is deleted and cannot be recovered.

●[Print Next]: The document is output immediately after the current document is complete.

●[Pause]: You can cancel printing. Click [Resume] to resume printing a document that was paused.

Managing the Machine

269

Document icon

Click the icon to display detailed information about the document.

Checking the Job Log

You can display a log for documents that were printed or received.

Start the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log]

[Store in CSV Format]

The log data can be exported and saved as a CSV le (*.csv) on the computer.

Function selection

Select the function that you want to check, and click [Display]. The displayed functions may vary depending

on your machine model and optional equipment.

Checking the Machine Status

You can check a variety of information about the machine, such as error information, the amount of remaining paper

and toner, information about attached optional equipment, and the total number of pages that have been printed up

to now.

Start the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] Select the item that you want to check

Managing the Machine

270

LINKS

Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Managing the Machine

271

Turning OFF/Restarting the Machine

7KKL-08F

You can use the Remote UI to shut down or restart the machine.

●When the machine is turned OFF or restarted, any documents that are being printed are canceled.

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 272)

Restarting the Machine(P. 272)

Turning OFF the Machine

Start the Remote UI [Settings/Registration] [Device Management] [Remote Shutdown]

[Start]

Restarting the Machine

Start the Remote UI [Settings/Registration] [Restart Device] [Perform Restart] [OK]

LINKS

Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Turning ON the Machine(P. 63)

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 64)

Managing the Machine

272

Managing the Logs

7KKL-08R

You can use the logs to check or analyze how the machine is being used. A variety of information about each operation

is recorded in the logs, such as the operation date/time, user name, operation type, function type, and operation

result. For more information on the types of logs, see Management Functions(P. 531) . Administrator privileges are

required in order to manage the logs.

Starting Log Recording(P. 273)

Exporting a Log as a File(P. 274)

Deleting the Logs(P. 274)

Sending Logs via the Syslog Protocol(P. 274)

●If Audit Log Collection is enabled and an error occurs in the memory area managed by this function,

initialization is automatically performed and then an error screen appears.

●If you can obtain the audit log from before the error occurred, click [Download Audit Log] to obtain the

log, and then click [OK].

●If you cannot obtain the audit log from before the error occurred, click [OK].

●When initialization is completed, Audit Log Collection is resumed, and the automatic initialization process is

recorded in the log.

Starting Log Recording

Follow the procedure below to start recording logs.

Start the Remote UI [Settings/Registration] [Device Management] [Export/Clear Audit Log]

[Audit Log Information] Click [Start] for [Audit Log Collection:]

●If Sleep Mode Energy Use is set to [High], logs are not collected when the machine enters the Sleep mode.

●When generating a network connection log or machine management log, click [Device Management]

[Save Audit Log] select the check box for [Save Audit Log] click [OK] [Apply Setting Changes].

●If the power of the machine is turned OFF while collecting logs due to a power outage, etc., collection starts

again when the machine restarts, from the log that was being collected before the power turned OFF.

Managing the Machine

273

●If you stop log collection while logs are being collected, the logs for the period that log collection was

stopped are not collected when log collection is next started.

Exporting a Log as a File

The various logs can be exported and saved to a computer as CSV les, which can be opened using a CSV le editor or

a text editor.

●When exporting logs as les, use TLS or IPSec. Conguring the IPSec Settings(P. 246)

Start the Remote UI [Settings/Registration] [Device Management] [Export/Clear Audit Log]

[Export Audit Logs] [Export] Follow the on-screen instructions to save the le

●If you want to automatically delete all logs after they are exported, select the check box for [Delete logs from

device after export] before clicking [Export]. If you then click [Cancel], exporting is canceled and the logs are

deleted, even if they were not nished being exported as les.

●Log collection is stopped while the export process is being performed.

Deleting the Logs

You can delete all of the collected logs.

Start the Remote UI [Settings/Registration] [Device Management] [Export/Clear Audit Log]

[Delete Audit Logs] [Delete] [Yes]

Sending Logs via the Syslog Protocol

Syslog Information can be sent to an SIEM (security information/event management) system. Linking with an SIEM

system enables various information analyzed from realtime alert information to be centrally managed.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Export/Clear Audit Log] [Syslog Settings].

4Select [Use Syslog Send], and specify the required settings.

Managing the Machine

274

[Syslog Server Address:]

Specify the address of the Syslog server to connect to. Enter the necessary information, such as IP address

and host name, according to your environment.

[Syslog Server Port Number:]

Enter the port number used by the Syslog server for Syslog communication. If left blank, the port number

dened in RFC (UDP: 514, TCP: 1468, TCP (TLS): 6514) is used.

[Facility:]

Specify the type of log messages to send. Select one of the following: [Local0] to [Local7], [Log Alert], [Log

Audit], [Security Messages], or [LPR] dened in RFC.

[Connection Type:]

Specify the communication type ([UDP]/[TCP]).

[Use TLS]

Select this to use TLS to encrypt information communicated with the Syslog server.

●When [TCP] is selected in [Connection Type:], you can set to use TLS.

[Conrm TLS Certicate]/[Add CN to Verication Items]

Set whether to verify the TLS server certicate sent when connecting and its CN (Common Name).

5Click [Update].

●A slight time lag occurs after the error for some audit logs, because Syslog transmission is performed after

polling every 30 seconds.

●The supported RFCs are 5424 (Syslog format), 5425 (TLS), and 5426 (UDP).

LINKS

Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

Managing the Machine

275

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data

7KKL-08S

Machine data such as user setting information and various setting values can be exported and saved to a computer.

Exported data can also be imported into the machine from a computer. Data exported from the machine can be

imported into other Canon printers/multifunction printers, making it easier to congure the settings on a new

machine, such as when you purchase a replacement. For more information on the setting items that can be imported,

see Settings/Registration Table(P. 299) . When importing or exporting, you can specify whether to import or

export all of the machine data, or only particular data.

Importing/Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Designate an administrator to manage operations

●Designate an administrator with Administrator privileges to perform data import/export operations. When

data is imported, user settings, network settings, and other data are overwritten, which may prevent some

functions from working properly or cause problems with machine operation. Exercise caution when

importing data.

Do not turn OFF the machine until importing or exporting is complete

●It may take several minutes for the process to complete. Do not turn OFF the machine before the process is

complete. Doing so may result in data loss or cause the machine to malfunction.

●The following functions/processes cannot be carried out while importing/exporting data:

- Report print jobs

- Batch Importing/Batch Exporting

- Update process for the Register/Update Software function

- Operating from the control panel of the machine

- Operating from the Remote UI

- Putting the machine to the sleep mode

●Importing/exporting data cannot be performed while the following functions/processes are being carried

out:

- Report print jobs

- Batch Importing/Batch Exporting

- Update process for the Register/Update Software function

- Processing the shutdown of the machine

- Displaying error code

Do not import or export in different display languages

●If the display language differs between the exporting machine and the importing machine, the setting

values may corrupt, causing malfunction of the machine.

Do not edit exported les.

●Do not open and edit exported XML les, as this may cause the machine to malfunction.

Managing the Machine

276

When importing to a Canon printer/multifunction printers other than this machine

●Some settings may not be imported. Settings/Registration Table(P. 299)

When using a password to protect the security policy settings

●The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting password on the exporting

machine matches that of the importing machine, or if no password has been set for the importing machine.

If no password has been set for the importing machine, the password congured for the exporting machine

is set to the importing machine.

Managing the Machine

277

Importing/Exporting All Settings

7KKL-08U

You can export all of the setting data from the machine and save it to a computer, and then import it when conguring

the settings on a new machine, such as when you purchase a replacement. If you want to congure the same settings

on two or more Canon printers/multifunction printers*, you can simply export all settings from one machine and

import them all to the others, eliminating the need to congure each machine separately. To perform these

operations, log in to the Remote UI with Administrator privileges.

* Only models that support the import/export of all settings

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Importing All Settings(P. 279)

Exporting All Settings

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Data Management] [Export].

4Select the check box for [Select All].

●Specic items can also be exported. For information on which Settings/Registration items correspond with

which items of the batch export function of the Remote UI, see Settings/Registration Table(P. 299) .

5Enter the password in [Encryption Password] select the security level from

[Security Level] click [Start Exporting] [OK].

●The password in [Encryption Password] will be required when importing the exported setting data. Use

alphanumeric characters.

●For conrmation, enter the password again in [Conrm].

●To encrypt all the settings data, select [Level 2] in [Security Level].

Managing the Machine

278

●It may take some time for the screen to change. Do not click [Start Exporting] more than once.

●When importing settings data to another model that does not support the setting in [Security Level], select

[Level 1].

6Click [Check Status].

●If the [Cannot be used when exporting.] message is displayed, do not use the Remote UI to perform the

operations.

7Click [Start Downloading].

8Follow the on-screen instructions to specify where to save the data.

To export all setting data without using a computer

●You can export all setting data to memory media such as a USB memory device. <Export to USB

Memory>(P. 403)

Importing All Settings

You can import all setting data that was exported to a computer. When importing, the previously congured setting

values are overwritten. Note, however, that some machine models may not be able to import all setting items.

Settings/Registration Table(P. 299)

Managing the Machine

279

Check the System Manager information

●When importing the Department ID Management settings to a different printer/multifunctional printer with

Department ID Management enabled, the System Manager information is overwritten, which may prevent

you from logging in with the previous System Manager ID and PIN. Before performing this operation, make

sure to check the System Manager information that is saved on the exporting machine.

When applying security policy settings

●The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting password of the exporting

machine matches that of the importing machine, or if no password has been set for the importing machine.

If no password has been set for the importing machine, the password congured for the exporting machine

is automatically set to the importing machine.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Data Management] [Import].

4Click [Browse...], and specify the le to import.

5Enter the password in [Decryption Password], and click [Start Importing] [OK].

●In [Decryption Password], enter the same password that was entered when the setting data was exported.

●Select the check box for [Create Import/Export Result Report] if you want to output the import results as a

CSV le.

➠The data of the selected le is imported into the machine.

Managing the Machine

280

6Click [OK] [Check Status].

●The machine may need to be restarted, depending on the imported data. Click [Perform Restart].

●If you select the check box for [Create Import/Export Result Report] in the previous step, click [Settings/

Registration] [Data Management] [Import/Export Results] [Create Report] to export the import

results.

To import all setting data without using a computer

●You can import all setting data from memory media such as a USB memory device. <Import from USB

Memory>(P. 403)

●Only one report le is saved. The next time a batch import is executed, the existing report le is deleted.

●Reports are created in the following language.

- If the display language of the machine is set to Japanese immediately after the import process: Japanese

- If the display language of the machine is set to something other than Japanese immediately after the

import process: English

Managing the Machine

281

Update Firmware

Updating the Firmware

7KKL-08W

New rmware is periodically released to add new functions or resolve issues with

existing functions. If new rmware is available, follow the procedure below to update

it on the machine. Administrator privileges are required in order to update the

rmware.

Checking the Firmware Version(P. 282)

Updating the Firmware(P. 283)

●Do not perform the following operations while updating the rmware. Doing so may cause a critical error.

- Turn OFF the main power

- Remove the LAN cable

- Perform communication (such as printing) with the machine from another computer or application*1

-Congure the sleep settings of your computer*2

*1 When updating the rmware in a network environment, ensure that other users do not perform operations such as

printing.

*2 The rmware may not be updated correctly if the computer enters the sleep mode.

Preparing to update the rmware

●Download the latest rmware from the Canon website (https://global.canon/).

●Back up the machine data and settings in case the rmware update is not performed properly.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

Note regarding the update process

●The machine restarts several times.

●The update process is interrupted if jobs remain.

●The screen switches several times during the update process. It may take some time for the screen to

switch, but do not close the browser until the update process is complete.

Checking the Firmware Version

Check the rmware version of the machine before updating the rmware and after updating the rmware.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

Managing the Machine

282

2Click [Status Monitor/Cancel] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Information] [Version Information] check [Controller].

Updating the Firmware

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [License/Other] [Register/Update Software].

4Click [Manual Update].

5Click [Browse...], select the rmware update to use, and click [Update].

➠When the <The process has stopped because there are one or more unnished jobs. Restart the device

manually in order to start the process. The browser may be closed.> message appears, turn the machine

OFF and back ON. Turning OFF/Restarting the Machine(P. 272)

Updating the Firmware from the Home Screen

●Firmware updates can also be performed from <Update Firmware> on the <Home> screen, depending on

the region. Administrator privileges are required for this operation.

Managing the Machine

283

Updating the Firmware (Distribution)

7KKL-08X

If the machine has access to the Internet, you can download the latest rmware for

the machine from Canon's distribution server. This might be more exible and

convenient than the other update method ( Updating the Firmware(P. 282) )

because both manual and automatic update options are available, enabling you to

download the rmware at a specied time or as soon as the latest version is

available. Administrator privileges are required in order to perform these

operations.

●This feature may not be available depending on your country or region.

Preparing to update the rmware

●Back up the machine data and settings in case the rmware update is not performed properly.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [License/Other] [Register/Update Software].

4Perform a communication test.

●Test whether you can access the distribution server over the network.

1Click [Display Logs/Communication Test].

2Click [Communication Test] [Yes].

➠The results of the communication test are displayed.

●If [Could not connect to the distribution server. Check the distribution server and network.] is

displayed, check that the LAN cable is connected and the network settings are congured properly.

Setting up Using the Setup Guide(P. 6)

5Click [Distributed Update] [Conrm New Firmware].

6Congure the necessary settings.

Managing the Machine

284

[Current Version]/[Applicable Firmware]

You can check the current rmware version and new one respectively.

[Release Note]

Important information is displayed. Make sure to read and understand the contents.

[Distribution Schedule]

To download the rmware immediately, select [Distribute now]. To automatically download the rmware

at a specied date and time, select [Distribute at specied date and time] and specify the date and time in

[Year:]/[Month:]/[Day:]/[Time:]. You can schedule a time within a week in advance.

[Timing to Apply]

To automatically apply the rmware immediately after downloading is complete, select [Apply immediately

after distribution]. To automatically apply the rmware at a specied date and time, select [Apply at

specied date and time] and specify the date and time in [Year:]/[Month:]/[Day:]/[Time:]. You can also

select [Apply manually] to manually apply the rmware.

[Updated Module Only]

Select [On] to perform an incremental update (download only the difference between the current and new

rmware versions). If you want to download the entire rmware, select [Off]. Note that some rmware

versions do not support incremental update.

[E-Mail Address]

Enter your e-mail address. The distribution server sends the update status to the e-mail address entered

here.

[Comments]

Enter a description or note to add to the e-mail. If you are managing multiple printers/multifunction

printers, entering a device name makes it easier to identify the status of each device.

7Click [Execute] [OK].

●If the license agreement screen is displayed, check the information and click [I Accept].

●If [Apply immediately after distribution] or [Apply at specied date and time] is selected in the previous

step, the machine automatically restarts immediately after the rmware is applied. If [Apply manually] is

selected, you need to apply the downloaded rmware manually. Applying the Downloaded

Firmware(P. 286)

Managing the Machine

285

●Changing the distributed update settings again may delete the downloaded rmware or cancel the

scheduled settings.

Canceling the distribution schedule

●On the screen displayed in step 5, click [Delete Scheduled Distribution] [Yes].

Automatically check for new rmware (scheduled update)

●If you click [Scheduled Update Settings] [Edit...] in step 5, you can set the machine to periodically access

the distribution server for new rmware. If new rmware is available, it is downloaded to update the

rmware on the machine. Setting Scheduled Updates(P. 287)

◼Applying the Downloaded Firmware

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [License/Other] [Register/Update Software].

4Click [Distributed Update] [Apply Firmware] [OK].

●The machine automatically restarts immediately after the rmware is applied.

To delete the rmware

●Click [Delete Firmware] [OK].

Managing the Machine

286

Setting Scheduled Updates

7KKL-08Y

You can set the machine to regularly check for new applicable rmware and

automatically update the rmware of the machine.

●This operation can only be performed by a user with the required privileges.

●If the downloading of the rmware is not complete, or the downloaded rmware has not been applied, you

cannot perform a scheduled update.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [License/Other] [Register/Update Software].

4Click [Scheduled Update Settings] [Edit...].

5Select the check box for [Enable scheduled update settings], and congure the

necessary settings.

[Update Schedule]

[Conrm]

Select the cycle ([Biweekly] or [Weekly], a day ([Sun] to [Sat]), and the time). The time is displayed in 24-

hour notation. The rmware check may take up to 3 hours to complete from the specied time.

[Apply at]

Select the time to apply downloaded rmware.

[E-Mail]

Managing the Machine

287

Enter the e-mail address of the administrator. You can receive e-mails regarding the update status that is

sent from the distribution server.

[Comments]

Enter the comment that will automatically be added to the e-mail. If the model name is entered, you can

identify which device status the e-mail is about.

●If previously downloaded rmware has not been applied by scheduled update, the next scheduled

update is not performed.

●If Scheduled Update is set, a rmware update is applied at the specied time after the new rmware

is downloaded from the distribution server. After application is complete, the machine automatically

restarts.

6Click [Set].

Managing the Machine

288

Displaying Messages from the Administrator

7KKL-090

You can display messages to users on the portal page of the Remote UI.

Administrator privileges are required in order to congure these settings.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [License/Other] [Message Board/Support Link].

4Enter the message, and click [OK].

[Message]

Enter the content of the message. Use this setting for displaying operational tips and other low-priority

messages.

[ Remote UI]

Select this check box to display the message on the portal page of the Remote UI.

[Support Link]

Enter the link to support information for the machine to display on the portal page of the Remote UI.

Managing the Machine

289

Setting the Website for Purchasing Consumables

7KKL-091

You can set a link to the website for purchasing consumables, which is displayed when checking consumables

information from the Remote UI. Setting a link to the website makes it easier for users to purchase consumables.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Device Management] [Information for Purchasing Consumables].

4Specify settings as necessary.

[Supplier]

Set the name of the place for purchasing consumables.

[E-Mail Address]

Set the e-mail address of the place for purchasing consumables.

[URL]

Set the URL of the website for purchasing consumables.

[Display Consumables Purchase Button]

Select this to display a button for accessing the website for purchasing toner cartridges on the Remote UI.

[Use Toner Status]

Select this when using the toner cartridge level notication tool.

[Display Consumables Purchase Button When Using Toner Status]

Select this to display a button for accessing the website for purchasing toner cartridges on the toner

cartridge level notication tool.

5Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

290

●This setting can only be specied by a user with Administrator privileges.

●This setting can only be imported from/exported to the same series machines. Importing/Exporting the

Setting Data(P. 276)

●This setting is included in [Settings/Registration Basic Information] when batch exporting. Importing/

Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Managing the Machine

291

Installing System Options

7KKL-092

When using system options, you may need to log in with Administrator privileges to

the license access number certicate. Make sure you have it with you before you

start. You can perform license registration even if the machine is not connected to

the network.

1Perform a communication test.

●Test whether you can register the license over the network.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [License/Other] [Register/Update Software] [Display Logs/Communication Test>.

4Click [Communication Test].

➠The [Are you sure you want to execute the communication test?] message is displayed.

5Click [Yes].

➠The results of the communication test are displayed.

●If [Connect Failed] is displayed, check that the LAN cable is connected and the network settings are

congured properly. Setting up Using the Setup Guide(P. 6)

●If you cannot connect to the network, register the license oine. When Registration Cannot Be

Performed over the Network(P. 293)

2Click [Distributed Installation].

3 Enter the license access number.

4Conrm the number, and click [Next >].

5Select the function to install, and click [Start].

●If the license agreement screen is displayed, check the information and click [I Accept].

6Click [To Distributed Installation].

Managing the Machine

292

◼When Registration Cannot Be Performed over the Network

If for some reason the machine is unable to connect to the network, register the license oine. First obtain a license

key using a computer connected to the network, then register it by entering it into the machine. To obtain a license

key, you will need the number that is printed on the license access number certicate, along with the serial number of

the machine.

1Access the license issuing website (http://www.canon.com/lms/license/) and obtain

the license key.

●Follow the on-screen instructions and enter the license access number and serial number to obtain the

license key.

2Select <Set> on the <Home> screen.

3Select <Management Settings> <License/Other> <Register License>.

4Enter the license key.

5Select <Start>.

Conrming the serial number

●It is displayed in <Check Counter> <Check Device Conguration>. It can also be conrmed from the

Remote UI portal page.

Managing the Machine

293

Initializing Settings

7KKL-093

You can initialize the settings to the factory default values. Administrator privileges

are required in order to perform initialization.

Initializing the Network Settings(P. 294)

Initializing the Panel Settings(P. 294)

Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 295)

●Before initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed.

These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed.

●Do not turn OFF the machine during initialization. Doing so may lead to defects in the memory of the

machine.

●Initialization may take 30 minutes or more to complete. The machine cannot be used during the initialization

process.

Before performing initialization

Back up your important data or export it as a le.

●Machine setting information Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

●User authentication information registered in the local device for personal authentication management

Registering User Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

When using a password to protect the security policy settings

●Password entry is required to execute <Initialize All Set. without Network Set.> or <Initialize All Data/

Settings>. Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy Settings(P. 165)

Initializing the Network Settings

You can initialize the network settings to the factory default values.

Initializing the Panel Settings

You can initialize the various settings to the factory default values.

Managing the Machine

294

<Set> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize All Set. without Network

Set.> <Yes>

●The network settings are not initialized.

Initializing All Data/Settings

You can restore all of the machine settings to the factory default values.

<Set> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize All Data/Settings> <Yes>.

●Although the job log information can be deleted by initializing all data/settings, the result of printing the

Initialize All Data/Settings Report is recorded in the print log. Checking the Printing Status and

History(P. 116)

●It is also possible to individually select some machine settings and restore their factory default values.

Settings/Registration(P. 298)

Managing the Machine

295

Settings/Registration

Settings/Registration .................................................................................................................................. 298

Settings/Registration Table .............................................................................................................................. 299

Preferences .................................................................................................................................................. 301

Display Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 302

Timer/Energy Settings ........................................................................................................................... 303

Network ................................................................................................................................................. 305

External Interface .................................................................................................................................. 324

Accessibility ........................................................................................................................................... 325

Volume Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 326

Adjustment/Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 327

Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 328

Adjust Image Quality ............................................................................................................................. 329

Function Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 331

Common ................................................................................................................................................ 332

Printer ................................................................................................................................................... 334

Custom Settings .............................................................................................................................. 335

UFR II .............................................................................................................................................. 338

PCL .................................................................................................................................................. 339

PS .................................................................................................................................................... 341

Imaging .......................................................................................................................................... 342

PDF ................................................................................................................................................. 343

XPS .................................................................................................................................................. 345

Utility .............................................................................................................................................. 346

Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 347

Receive .................................................................................................................................................. 348

Access Files ............................................................................................................................................ 349

Print ....................................................................................................................................................... 350

Management Settings .................................................................................................................................. 351

User Management ................................................................................................................................. 352

Device Management .............................................................................................................................. 353

License/Other ........................................................................................................................................ 354

Data Management ................................................................................................................................. 355

Security Settings .................................................................................................................................... 356

Output Report .............................................................................................................................................. 357

<Preferences> .................................................................................................................................................... 358

<Display Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 359

<Timer/Energy Settings> .............................................................................................................................. 361

Settings/Registration

296

<Network> .................................................................................................................................................... 365

<External Interface> ..................................................................................................................................... 377

<Accessibility> .............................................................................................................................................. 379

<Volume Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 380

<Adjustment/Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................. 381

<Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................................. 382

<Adjust Image Quality> ................................................................................................................................ 383

<Function Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 387

<Common> ................................................................................................................................................... 388

<Printer> ...................................................................................................................................................... 391

<Send> ......................................................................................................................................................... 393

<Receive> ..................................................................................................................................................... 394

<Access Files> ............................................................................................................................................... 395

<Print> .......................................................................................................................................................... 396

<Management Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 397

<User Management> .................................................................................................................................... 398

<Device Management> ................................................................................................................................. 399

<License/Other> ........................................................................................................................................... 401

<Data Management> .................................................................................................................................... 403

<Security Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 405

<Output Report> ............................................................................................................................................... 406

Settings/Registration

297

Settings/Registration

7KKL-095

You can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by conguring settings described in this

chapter. The Settings/Registration screen is displayed by selecting <Set> on the <Home> screen.

This section describes what each item in the setting menu can congure.

●Some of the settings may not be displayed depending on the conguration of optional equipment installed

on the machine.

●Some changes may not be reected immediately, depending on the settings. In this case, it is necessary to

perform one of the following.

●Select <Yes> on the screen conrming whether you want to make changes.

●Select <Apply Set. Changes> on the <Home> screen.

●Restart the machine.

Settings/Registration

298

Settings/Registration Table

7KKL-096

The following settings can be selected or stored on the Settings/Registration screen:

Preferences(P. 301)

Adjustment/Maintenance(P. 327)

Function Settings(P. 331)

Management Settings(P. 351)

Output Report(P. 357)

●Some of the settings may not be displayed depending on the conguration of optional equipment installed on the machine.

●Some changes may not be reected immediately, depending on the settings. In this case, it is necessary to perform one of the

following.

●Select <Yes> on the screen conrming whether you want to make changes.

●Select <Apply Set. Changes> on the <Home> screen.

●Restart the machine.

●The settings that can be specied differ between administrators and general users, and vary depending on restrictions

imposed by the administrator.

◼Description of the Settings

Describes the functions of each setting item on Settings/Registration. The settings that can be operated vary depending on the user

authority and the machine you use. Setting items and values are written under Setting Description. The factory defaults are written in bold

red characters.

◼"Can be set in Remote UI"

The "Can be set in Remote UI" item is written for each item in the Settings/Registration table. "Yes" or "No" indicates if the settings can/

cannot be set in the Remote UI.

◼Import All Function

The "Import All Function" item is written in the Settings/Registration table. Depending on whether a setting item can be batch imported, "A",

"B", "C", or "No" is written. "A", "B", and "C" refer to the following cases.

Case A

Importing all to your machine

Restoring the settings information to your machine for backups.

Export

Settings Information

Settings/Registration

299

Import

Case B

Importing all to the same model machine

Applies to machines of the same series as this machine.

Export

Settings Information

Import

Case C

Importing all to the different model machine

Applies to models that support batch importing.

Export

Settings Information

Import

◼Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI

This section indicates which Settings/Registration items correspond with which items of the batch export function of the Remote UI. "-" is

indicated for items that are not imported/exported. Importing/Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

The items that can be selected for the batch export function of the Remote UI are indicated below.

Items That Can Be Selected with the Batch Export Function

Settings/Registration Basic Information

Paper Type Management Settings

Settings for Printer Settings

Download Prole for Printer Settings

Department ID Management Settings

Key Settings

Certicate/Certicate Revocation List (CRL) Settings

Authentication User Management

Security Policy Settings

AddOn Application Setting Information

Settings/Registration

300

Preferences

7KKL-097

Display Settings(P. 302)

Timer/Energy Settings(P. 303)

Network(P. 305)

External Interface(P. 324)

Accessibility(P. 325)

Volume Settings(P. 326)

●Some items can be set using the Remote UI. Use the control panel of the device to set items which cannot be set using the

Remote UI.

●The names may be different on the Remote UI.

Settings/Registration

301

Display Settings

7KKL-098

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description

Can be set

in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Set>, <Paper Settings>, <Memory Media>,

<Print>, <Mobile Portal>, <Display Order

(Home)>, <Update Firmware>

No C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration> <Home>, <Memory Media Print>, <Print>, <Status

Monitor>, <Update Firmware> No C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Bahasa Melayu>, <Català>, <Čeština>, <Dansk>,

<Deutsch>, <Esti>, <English>, <Español>,

<Euskara>, <Français>, <Hrvatski>, <Italiano>,

<Latviešu>, <Lietuvių>, <Magyar>, <Nederlands>,

<Norsk>, <Polski>, <Português>, <Română>,

<Slovenčina>, <Slovenščina>, <Suomi>,

<Svenska>, <Tiếng Việt Nam>, <Türkçe>,

<Ελληνικά>, <български>, <Pусский>,

<Українська>, <ُةيِبَ

رَعْلَا>, <ภาษาไทย>, <日本語>, <中文

（繁體）>, <中文（简体）>, <한국어>

No C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> <Millimeter>, <Inch> No C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Conrm When Loading Paper in Drawer> <Off>, <On> No C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<IP Address Display Settings> <Off>, <On>, No C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Display Mobile Portal> <Off>, <On> No C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

When <Custom> is selected: <Specify Toner

Level>: 2 to 20 to 99%

No B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Waste Toner Container Replacement Notif.> <Off>, <On> No B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

Settings/Registration

302

Timer/Energy Settings

7KKL-099

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Current Date/Time Settings>: Date and Time

Setting (12-digit number) Yes No Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Daylight Saving Time Settings>: <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Start> (<Month>/<Day>/<Time> (0 to 23)),

<End> (<Month>/<Day>/<Time> (0 to 23)) Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Time Zone>: UTC-12:00 to UTC+01:00 to

UTC+14:00 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Time Format> <24 Hour>, <12 Hour> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Quick Startup Settings for Main Power> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

0 min=Off, 10 to 50 seconds in 10 second

increments, 1 to 2 to 9 minutes in one minute

increments

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Restrict Auto Reset Time> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Function After Auto Reset> <Default Function>, <Selected Function> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Auto Shutdown Time> 0 hr=Off, 1 to 4 to 8 hours in one hour

increments Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer> <Sunday> to <Saturday>, 00:00 to 23:59, in one

minute increments Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Allow Sleep Mode During Error> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

10 secs, 1 min, 2 mins, 10 mins, 15 mins, 20

mins, 30 mins, 40 mins, 50 mins, 1 hr, 90 mins,

2 hrs

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Sleep Mode Energy Use> <Low>, <High> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Auto Sleep Weekly Timer> <Sunday> to <Saturday>, 00:00 to 23:59, in one

minute increments Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

303

<Time Settings for Auto Adjust Gradation> <Sunday> to <Saturday>, 00:00 to 23:59, in one

minute increments Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Energy Saver/Sleep Mode Exit Time Set.> 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

304

Network

7KKL-09A

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

●<Output Report> *1

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote UI Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Output Report> <Print> Yes No -

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Conrm Network Connection>

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote UI Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Conrm Network Connection

><Off>, <On> No C Settings/Registration Basic Information

●<TCP/IP Settings>: <IPv4 Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Use IPv4> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●When <On> is selected:

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

　<IP Address>: Enter the IP address. Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<IP Address>: Display only

<Subnet Mask>: Display only

<Gateway Address>: Display only

Yes C*2 Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Acquire Host Name>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<DNS Dynamic Update>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

305

<Acquire DNS Server Address>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Acquire Domain Name>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Acquire POP Server Address>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Release Address Last Acquired from DHCP Server

When Address Cannot Be Acquired>*1: <Off>, <On>Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<DNS Settings>*1

<Host Name>: Canon ****** ("******" represents

the last six digits of a MAC address.) Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Domain Name>: Enter the domain name. Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Perform DNS Dynamic Update>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<PING Command> <IPv4 Address>: <0.0.0.0> No No -

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

*2 <IP Address> is categorizes as "A".

●<TCP/IP Settings>: <IPv6 Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Stateless Address>*1: <Off>, <On>Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Manual Address>*1: <Off>, <On> Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<IP Address>*1 (IPv6 Address (39 characters

maximum)) Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Prex Length>*1: 1 to 64 to 128 Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Default Router Address>*1 (39 characters

maximum) Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use DHCPv6>*1: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Only Retrieve Stateful Address Prex>*1 <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Acquire DNS Server Address>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Acquire Domain Name>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

306

<DNS Settings>*1

<Primary DNS Server Address> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Secondary DNS Server Address> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4>:

<Off>, <On> Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Host Name>: Canon ****** ("******"

represents the last six digits of a MAC address.) Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Domain Name>: Enter the domain name. Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●When <On> is selected:

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<TCP/IP Settings>: <DNS Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<DNS Server Address Settings

<Primary DNS Server>: Enter the IP address. Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Secondary DNS Server>: Enter the IP

address. Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use IPv4 mDNS>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●When <On> is selected:

<mDNS Name> (63 characters maximum) Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use IPv6 mDNS>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●When <On> is selected:

<Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4>: <Off>,

<On>

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●When <Off> is selected:

<mDNS Name> (63 characters maximum) Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<TCP/IP Settings>

Item Setting Description

Can be set

in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the

Remote UI

<LPD Print Settings> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

Settings/Registration

307

●When <On> is selected:

<Output LPD Banner Page>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<RX Timeout>*1: 1 to 5 to 60 (min.) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●When <On> is selected:

<Bidirectional Comm.>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<RX Timeout>*1: 1 to 5 to 60 (min.) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use SNTP>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Polling Interval>*1: 10 to 1440 to 2880 min. Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<NTP Server Address>*1: (IP Address or Host

Name) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use FTP Printing>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<User Name>: guest Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Password>: 7654321 Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use UTF-8 to Display FTP Print Job Name> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use WSD Print>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use WSD Browsing>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●When <On> is selected:

<Allow When Using TLS>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use Authentication>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Response>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Scope Name> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Sleep Mode Notication Settings>*1

<Notify>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Port Number>: 1 to 11427 to 65535 Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

Settings/Registration

308

<Number of Routers to Traverse>: 0 to 3 to 254 Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Notication Interval>: 60 to 600 to 65535 sec. Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use HTTP> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<TLS Settings>*1

<Use> Yes No -

<Certicate Details> (<Version>, <Serial Number>,

<Signature Algorithm>, <Issued To>, <Validity

Start Date>, <Validity End Date>, <Issuer>,

<Public Key>, <Certicate Thumbprint>, <Issued

To (Alternate Name)>, <Verify Certicate>)

Yes No -

<Key Usage> (Displays what the key pair is being

used for) Yes No -

<Maximum Version>: <TLS 1.0>, <TLS 1.1>, <TLS

1.2>, <TLS 1.3> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Minimum Version>: <TLS 1.0>, <TLS 1.1>, <TLS

1.2>, <TLS 1.3> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●Encryption Algorithm

<AES-CBC (256-bit)>: <Off>, <On>

<AES-CBC (128-bit)>: <Off>, <On>

<AES-GCM (256-bit)>: <Off>, <On>

<AES-GCM (128-bit)>: <Off>, <On>

<3DES-CBC>: <Off>, <On>

<CHACHA20-POLY1305>: <Off>, <On>

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●Key Exchange Algorithm

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●Signature Algorithm

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●HMAC Algorithm

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use Proxy>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Server Address> (IP Address or FQDN) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Port Number>: 1 to 80 to 65535 Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use Proxy within Same Domain>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

Settings/Registration

309

<Authentication Set.>: <Use Proxy

Authentication>(<Off>, <On>), <User Name> (24

characters maximum), <Password> (24 characters

maximum), <Conrm> (24 characters maximum)

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Conrm Auth Info When in Auth Mngt Mode> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<TCP/IP Settings>: <IPSec Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Use IPSec> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Receive Non-Policy Packets>*1 <Allow>, <Reject> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<TCP/IP Settings>: <IPSec Settings>: <IPSec Policy List>*1

Item Setting Description

Can be set

in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the

Remote UI

<IPSec Policy List> <Register New IPSec Policy>, <Delete>, <Raise Priority>,

<Lower Priority> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Policy Name> (24 characters maximum), <Policy On/Off>

(<Off>, <On>), <Only Allow 256-bit for AES Key Length>

(<Off>, <On>), <Selector Settings>, <IKE Settings>, <IPSec

Network Settings>

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Local Address Settings> (<All IP Addresses>, <IPv4

Address>, <IPv6 Address>, <IPv4 Manual Settings>, <IPv6

Manual Settings>)

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<IPv4 Manual Settings> (<Single Address>(<First

Address>), <Range Address>(<First Address>, <Last

Address>), <Subnet Settings>(<First Address>, <Subnet

Settings>))

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<IPv6 Manual Settings> (<Single Address>(<First

Address>), <Range Address> (<First Address>, <Last

Address>), <Prex Address> (<First Address>, <Prex

Length>))

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Prex Length> (1 to 64 to 128) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Remote Address Settings>(<All IP Addresses>, <All IPv4

Addresses>, <All IPv6 Addresses>, <IPv4 Manual Settings>,

<IPv6 Manual Settings>)

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<IPv4 Manual Settings>(<Single Address>(<First

Address>), <Range Address>(<First Address>, <Last

Address>), <Subnet Settings>(<First Address>, <Subnet

Settings>))

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

Settings/Registration

310

●<IPv6 Manual Settings> (<Single Address>(<First

Address>), <Range Address> (<First Address>, <Last

Address>), <Prex Address> (<First Address>, <Prex

Length>))

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Prex Length> (1 to 64 to 128) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Port Settings> (<Specify by Port Number>, <Specify by

Service Name>) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Specify by Port Number>(<Local Port>(<All Ports>,

<Single Port>), <Remote Port>(<All Ports>, <Single

Port>))

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Single Port> (1 to 65535) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Specify by Service Name>

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<IKE>

<IKE Mode>: <Main>, <Aggressive> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Validity>: 1 to 480 to 65535 min. Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

(<Shared Key Settings>), <Digital Signature Method> (<Key

and Certicate>)

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Key and Certicate>:

<Use> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Key and Certicate>:

<Certicate Details>(<Version>, <Serial Number>,

<Signature Algorithm>, <Issued To>, <Validity Start

Date>, <Validity End Date>, <Issuer>, <Public Key>,

<Certicate Thumbprint>, <Issued To (Alternate

Name)>, <Verify Certicate>)

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Key and Certicate>: <Key Usage>(Displays what the

key pair is being used for) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Authentication/Encryption Algorithm> (<Auto>, <Manual

Settings>) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Authentication>

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<Encryption>

<3DES-CBC>, <AES-CBC>, <3DES-CBC and AES-CBC> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<DH Group>

<Group 14 (2048)>, <ECDH-P256>, <ECDH-P384> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<IPSec Network> <Validity> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

Settings/Registration

311

●<On>: (1 to 480 to 65535min.) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Size>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

●<On>: (0 to 1 to 65535 MB) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use PFS>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Authentication/Encryption Algorithm>: <Auto>, <Manual

Settings> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

(<ESP>, <ESP (AES-GCM)>, <AH (SHA1)>) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<ESP> Settings:

<ESP Encryption>: <3DES-CBC>, <AES-CBC>, <3DES-

CBC and AES-CBC>, <NULL>

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<ESP (AES-GCM)> Settings: None Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<AH (SHA1)> Settings: None Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Connection Mode>: <

Transport> (display only) Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<TCP/IP Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<TCP/IP Option Settings>*1

<Use Window Scale Option>: <Off>,

<On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<MTU Size>: 600 to 1500 bytes

(600-1500) Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<SNMP Settings>

Item Setting Description

Can be set

in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Use SNMPv1> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use Dedicated Community>*1 <Use Dedicated Community>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

Settings/Registration

312

<MIB Access Permission>: <Read/Write>, <Read

Only>Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use Community Name 1>*1

<Use Community Name 1>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<MIB Access Permission>: <Read/Write>, <Read

Only>Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Community Name>: public Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use Community Name 2>*1

<Use Community Name 2>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<MIB Access Permission>: <Read/Write>, <Read

Only>Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Community Name>: public2 Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use SNMPv3> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Administrator Settings>*1

<User Name>: Display only

<MIB Access Permission>: Display only

<Security Settings>: Display only

<Authentication Algorithm>: Display only

<Encryption Algorithm>: Display only

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Use Same Password as for Authentication>:

<Off>, <On>Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Encryption Password>: Enter the password.

<Conrm>: Enter the password.

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<User Settings>*1

<User On/Off>: <Enable>, <Disable> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Register> (<User Name>, <MIB Access

Permission> (<Read/Write>, <Read Only>),

<Security Settings> (<Auth. Yes/Encrypt. Yes>,

<Auth. Yes/Encrypt. No>, <Auth. No/Encrypt. No>),

<Authentication Algorithm> (<MD5>, <SHA1>,

<SHA2-224>, <SHA2-256>, <SHA2-384>,

<SHA2-512>), <Authentication Password>,

<Encryption Algorithm> (<DES>, <AES>),

<Encryption Password>)

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Details/Edit> (<User Name>, <MIB Access

Permission> (<Read/Write>, <Read Only>),

<Security Settings> (<Auth. Yes/Encrypt. Yes>,

<Auth. Yes/Encrypt. No>, <Auth. No/Encrypt. No>),

<Authentication Algorithm> (<MD5>, <SHA1>,

<SHA2-224>, <SHA2-256>, <SHA2-384>,

<SHA2-512>), <Authentication Password>,

<Encryption Algorithm> (<DES>, <AES>),

<Encryption Password>)

Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Delete> Yes No -

Settings/Registration

313

<Get Printer Management Information from

Host>*1 <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration

Basic Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Format Host Resources MIB to RFC2790>

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Format Host Resources MIB to RFC2790> <Off>, <On> No C Settings/Registration Basic Information

●<Dedicated Port Settings>*1

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Dedicated Port Settings> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Dedicated Port Authentication Method> <Mode 1>, <Mode 2> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Use Spool Function>

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote UI Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Use Spool Function> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

●<Receive in Parallel>

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote UI Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Receive in Parallel> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

●<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup> 0 to 300 sec. Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

●<Ethernet Driver Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Auto Detect>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Communication Mode>: <Half Duplex>,

<Full Duplex> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

314

●<Ethernet Type>: <10BASE-T>, <100BASE-

TX>, <1000BASE-T> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Current Transmission Speed>: Display Only Yes No -

<MAC Address>: Display only Yes No -

●<IEEE 802.1X Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Use IEEE 802.1X> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Login Name> *1 Login Name Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Verify Authentication Server Certicate>*1 <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Verify Authentication Server Name

>*1 <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Authentication Server Name>*1 Authentication Server Name Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use TLS>*1 <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Key and Certicate>*1

<Use> Yes No -

<Certicate Details> (<Version>, <Serial

Number>, <Signature Algorithm>, <Issued

To>, <Validity Start Date>, <Validity End

Date>, <Issuer>, <Public Key>, <Certicate

Thumbprint>, <Issued To (Alternate

Name)>, <Verify Certicate>)

Yes No -

<Key Usage> (Key and Certicate) Yes No -

<Use TTLS>*1

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<TTLS Settings (TTLS Protocol)>: <Use

MSCHAPv2>, <Use PAP> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use PEAP>*1 <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Login Name as User Name>*1 <Off>, <On>, Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<User Name> *1 Name of the user to be authenticated with

IEEE802.1X authentication Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Password>*1 Password of the user to be authenticated

with IEEE802.1X authentication Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Settings/Registration

315

●<Firewall Settings>: <IPv4 Address Filter>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Use Filter>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Default Policy>*1: <Allow>, <Reject> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Exception Addresses>*1: <Register New> (Up

to 16 IPv4 addresses>, <Delete> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Address to Register>*1 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Specify Port Number>*1: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Port Number>*1: Enter the port

number.

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Filter>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Default Policy>*1: <Allow>, <Reject> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Exception Addresses>*1: <Register New> (Up

to 16 IPv4 addresses), <Delete> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Address to Register>*1 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Specify Port Number>*1: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Port Number>*1: Enter the port

number.

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<IPv4 Address ICMP Settings>*1 <Always Allow Sending/Receiving Using

ICMP>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Firewall Settings>: <IPv6 Address Filter>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Use Filter>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Default Policy>*1: <Allow>, <Reject> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

(Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), <Delete> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

316

●<Address to Register>*1 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Specify Port Number>*1: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Port Number>*1: Enter the port

number.

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Filter>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Default Policy>*1: <Allow>, <Reject> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

(Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), <Delete> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Address to Register>*1 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Specify Port Number>*1: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Port Number>*1: Enter the port

number.

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<IPv6 Address ICMP Settings>*1 <Always Allow Sending/Receiving Using

ICMP>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Firewall Settings>: <MAC Address Filter>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Use Filter>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Default Policy>*1: <Allow>, <Reject> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Exception Addresses>*1: <Add> (Up to

100 Mac addresses), <Edit>, <Delete> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Filter>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Default Policy>*1: <Allow>, <Reject> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Exception Addresses>*1: <Add> (Up to

100 Mac addresses), <Edit>, <Delete> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Firewall Settings>: <IP Address Block Log>*1

Settings/Registration

317

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Date/Time>, <Type>, <IP

Address>, <Port Number>,

Yes No -

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Use Mopria>

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote UI Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Use Mopria> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

●<Use AirPrint>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

●When <On> is selected:

<Printer Name>*1: Enter the Printer

Name

<Location>*1: Enter the Location

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Display Errors for AirPrint>

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote UI Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Display Errors for AirPrint> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

●<Position Information>*1

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote UI

<Auto Acquire> Yes No -

<Latitude>: Specify the latitude. Yes No -

<Longitude>: Specify the

longitude. Yes No -

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Settings for Universal Print>*1

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

Settings/Registration

318

<Use Universal Print> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Verify Server Certicate> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Add CN to Verication Items> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Printer Name> OIP_PRINTER Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Application ID> f9fc375cc7ba-4e5c-b213-23affd792cc1 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Azure Active Directory Authentication URL> https://login.microsoftonline.com/

organizations/oauth2/v2.0 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Azure Active Directory Registration URL> https://register.print.microsoft.com/api/

v1.0/register Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Code for Registration> Yes - Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Select Interface>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Wired LAN>, <Wireless LAN>, <Wired

LAN + Wired LAN>, <Wired LAN +

Wireless LAN>

No C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Wireless LAN>: <Wireless LAN Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item

When Exporting

with the Remote

<Select Access Point>: Select from the list. No No -

WEP authentication: (<WEP Key (5-26 Char.)>: Enter the WEP

key No No -

WPA/WPA2-PSK encryption: <PSK (8-64 Char.)>: Enter the

WPA/WPA2-PSK Passphrase No No -

<Enter Manually>: Enter SSID No No -

<Security Settings>: <None>, <WEP>, <WPA/WPA2-PSK>,

<WPA/WPA2-EAP> No No -

●<Security Settings> (<WEP>) No No -

Settings/Registration

319

<IEEE 802.1X Settings> (<Open System>, <Shared Key>),

●<Security Settings> (<WPA/WPA2-PSK>)

<Encryption Method> (<Auto>, <AES-CCMP>)

<Power Save Mode> <Off>, <On> No No -

<MAC Address>: Display Only

<Wireless LAN Status>: Display Only

<Latest Error Information>: Display Only

<Channel>: Display Only

<SSID Settings>: Display Only

<Security Settings>: Display Only

<Power Save Mode>: Display Only

Yes No -

●<Direct Connection Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Use Direct Connection> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Direct Connection Type> <Access Point Mode>, <Wi-Fi Direct> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Device Name for Wi-Fi Direct> <Dev Name(Wi-Fi Direct)>: Device

Name Yes No Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Time Until Direct Connection Termination> 0 = None, 1 to 30 to 60 min. Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Personal SSID and Network

Key>*1: <Off>, <On>Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Custom SSID>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●When <On> is selected:

<SSID>: Enter SSID Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Custom Network Key>: <Off>,

<On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●When <On> is selected:

<Network Key>: Enter the network key Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Keep Enabled If SSID/Net. Key Specied> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Direct Connection IP Address Settings> 192.168.22.1 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Session Settings>*1

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

Settings/Registration

320

<Timeout After Logging in to Remote UI> 15 to 150 min. Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Sub Line Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Auto Acquire>: <DHCP>, <Off> No C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

No A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Check Settings>: Display only No A -

<Priority Line for Comm w/Mobile Devices> <Main Line>, <Sub Line> No C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Auto Detect>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Communication Mode>: <Half

Duplex>, <Full Duplex> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Ethernet Type>: <10BASE-T>,

<100BASE-TX>, <1000BASE-T> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Current Transmission Speed>: Display only Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<MAC Address>: Display only Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Sub Line Settings>: <Firewall Settings>: <IPv4 Address Filter>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Use Filter>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Default Policy>*1: <Allow>, <Reject>Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

(Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), <Delete> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Address to Register>*1 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Specify Port Number>*1: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Port Number>*1: Enter the port

number.

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

321

<Use Filter>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Default Policy>*1: <Allow>, <Reject>Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

(Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), <Delete> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Address to Register>*1 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Specify Port Number>*1: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Port Number>*1: Enter the port

number.

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

●<Sub Line Settings>: <Settings for System Data Communication>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with

the Remote UI

<Primary DNS Server> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Secondary DNS Server> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Proxy>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Server Address> (IP Address or FQDN) Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Port Number>: 1 to 80 to 65535 Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Proxy Auth.>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<User Name> (24 characters maximum) Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Password> (24 characters maximum)

<Conrm> (24 characters maximum) Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Static Routing Settings>

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Use Static Routing>: <Off>, <On> No C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Register>, <Delete>*1 No No -

●<Register> No C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

322

<Address>(<0.0.0.0>), <Prex Length>(1

to 32), <Gateway Address>(<0.0.0.0>)

*1 This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Settings/Registration

323

External Interface

7KKL-09C

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with

the Remote UI

<Use as USB Device> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Use AddOn Driver for USB Storage Device> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Use USB Storage Device> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Restrict Auto Install of Printer Driver> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

Settings/Registration

324

Accessibility

7KKL-09E

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Invert Screen Colors> <Off>, <On> No C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Contrast> -3 to 0 to +3 (7 levels) No C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Backlight Brightness> 0~4No C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Message Display Time> 1 to 2 to 5 seconds No C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Scrolling Speed> <Slow>, <Standard>, <Fast> No C Settings/Registration Basic Information

Settings/Registration

325

Volume Settings

7KKL-09F

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Entry Tone> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Invalid Entry Tone> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Restock Supplies Tone> <Off>, <On>, Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Warning Tone> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Job Done Tone> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Energy Saver/Sleep Tone> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Login Tone> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

Settings/Registration

326

Adjustment/Maintenance

7KKL-0K3

Maintenance(P. 328)

Adjust Image Quality(P. 329)

Settings/Registration

327

Maintenance

7KKL-09L

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Clean Pressure Roller for Fixing> - No No -

<Low Toner Consumption Printing Mode> <Off>, <On> No B Settings/Registration Basic Information

<Control Detected Condensation> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

Settings/Registration

328

Adjust Image Quality

7KKL-09J

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Full Calibration> - Yes No -

<Timing for Auto Full Calib. at Startup> : <After

Printing First Job>, <When Turning Main

Power ON>

Yes A Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Frequency for Auto Full Calibration> :

<Normal>, <High> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Sample Print> <Yes>, <No> No No -

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Adj. Vertically (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1st Side for 2-Sided)>

Yes No -

<Adj. Vertically (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1st Side for 2-Sided)>

Yes No -

<Drawer 2>*

<Adj. Vertically (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1st Side for 2-Sided)>

Yes No -

<Drawer 3>*

<Adj. Vertically (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1st Side for 2-Sided)>

Yes No -

<Drawer 4>*

<Adj. Vertically (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>>, <Adj.

Horizontally (1st Side for 2-Sided)>

Yes No -

<Common> <Adj. Vertically (1st Side for 2-Sided)> Yes No -

<Adjust Toner Volume Used for Color Print> <Off>, <Level 1>, <Level 2> No A Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Waterdrop Pattern Prevention Mode> <Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Adjust Fixing Temperature> <Low>, <Standard>, <High 1>, <High 2> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Curl Prevention Mode> <Mode 1>: ＜Off ＞, ＜On ＞

<Mode 2>: <Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

Settings/Registration

329

<Paper Slipping Prevention Mode> <Off>, <Mode 1>, <Mode 2> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Auto Clean Secondary Transfer Roller> <Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<White Streak Prevention Mode> <Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Correct Fixing When Using Plain Paper> <Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Corr. Tail End Fix. When Using Plain Ppr> <Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Plain Paper Fill Area Image Adjust. Mode> <Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Heavy Paper Fill Area Image Adjust. Mode> <Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

<Envelope Sealing Prevention Mode> <Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration

Basic Information

* Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specied.

Settings/Registration

330

Function Settings

7KKL-09S

Common(P. 332)

Printer(P. 334)

Send(P. 347)

Receive(P. 348)

Access Files(P. 349)

Print(P. 350)

Settings/Registration

331

Common

7KKL-0K0

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Printer>:

●<Multi-Purpose Tray>: <Off>, <On>

●Other: <Off>, <On>

●<Group Settings>: <Off>, <On>

●<Use Group>: <Off>, <On>

Yes B Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Access Stored Files>:

●<Multi-Purpose Tray>: <Off>, <On>

●Other: <Off>, <On>

Yes B Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Receive>:

●<Multi-Purpose Tray>: <Off>, <On>

●Other: <Off>, <On>

Yes B Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Other>:

●<Multi-Purpose Tray>: <Off>, <On>

●Other: <Off>, <On>

Yes B Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Optimal Productivity>:

●<Off>, <On> Yes B Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Switch Paper Feed Method> <Multi-Purpose Tray> and Other: <Speed

Priority>, <Print Side Priority> Yes B Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

0 to 5 to 999 min. Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Job Separator Between Jobs> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Number of Copies> (1 to 10 to 9999) Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

332

●<Printer>: <1>, <2>, <3>

●<Access Stored File>: <1>, <2>, <3>

●<Other>: <1>, <2>, <3>

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Chrom. Color Conv. for Two Colors Print> <All Chromatic Colors>, <Similar Chromatic

Colors> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

0 to 5 to 999 min. Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Continue Printing>, <Display Warning

Screen> Yes No -

When <Continue Printing> is selected:

<Displ Tnr Cart Warning>: <Off>, <On>Yes B Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

333

Printer

7KKL-09X

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Custom Settings> Custom Settings(P. 335) - - -

<UFR II> UFR II(P. 338) - - -

<PCL> PCL(P. 339) - - -

<PS> PS(P. 341) - - -

<Imaging> Imaging(P. 342) - - -

<PDF> PDF(P. 343) - - -

<XPS> XPS(P. 345) - - -

<Utility> Utility(P. 346) - - -

<On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

When <On> is selected:

●<Select Jobs to Allow>: <Reserved

Jobs>

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Switch Paper Source Auto Selection Mode> ＜Short Edge Feed Paper Priority ＞, ＜

Long Edge Feed Paper Priority ＞Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Feed from MP Tray When No Paper Source> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<MP Tray Priority for Ppr Src Auto Select> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> <UFR II>, <PCL6>, <PS3>, <UFR II (V4)>,

<PCL6 (V4)> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Ppr Size Mismatch for Free Size Ppr Src> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Vertical Printing Priority for Free Size> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<PS Password Settings> <SystemParams Password>, <StartJob

Password> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Paper Feed Mode When Using PCL Emulation> <Mode 0>, <Mode 1>, <Mode 2> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

334

Custom Settings

7KKL-0A0

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description

Can be set

in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Copies> 1 to 9999 Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<2-Sided Printing> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Default Paper Feed Source> <Auto>, <MP Tray>, <Drawer 1>, <Drawer 2>, <Drawer

3> Yes B Settings for Printer

Settings

<Letter>, <Legal>, <A4>, <A5>, <A6>, <B5>, <16K>,

<Executive>, <Statement>, <Env. NAGAGATA 3>, <Env.

YOGATANAGA3>, <Env. No. 10>, <Envelope ISO-C5>,

Yes B Settings for Printer

Settings

<Thin>, <Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Plain 3>, <Heavy 1>,

<Heavy 2>, <Heavy 3>, <Heavy 4>, <Heavy 5>, <Color>,

<Recycled 1>, <Recycled 2>, <Labels>, <Letterhead 1>,

<Letterhead 2>, <Letterhead 3>, <Letterhead 4>,

<Letterhead 5>, <Letterhead 6>, <Letterhead 7>, <Bond

1>, <Bond 2>, <Envelope>

Yes B Settings for Printer

Settings

<Paper Size Override> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<2nd Side of MP Tray 2-Sided Page> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Finishing> <Finishing>:<Off>, <Collate>, <Group> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Density>*1

<Cyan>: -8 to +8; 0

<Magenta>: -8 to +8; 0

<Yellow>: -8 to +8; 0

<Black>: -8 to +8; 0

Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Density (Fine Adjust)>*1

<Cyan>:

<High>: -8 to +8; 0

<Medium>: -8 to +8; 0

<Low>: -8 to +8; 0

<Magenta>:

<High>: -8 to +8; 0

<Medium>: -8 to +8; 0

Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

Settings/Registration

335

<Low>: -8 to +8; 0

<Yellow>:

<High>: -8 to +8; 0

<Medium>: -8 to +8; 0

<Low>: -8 to +8; 0

<Black>:

<High>: -8 to +8; 0

<Medium>: -8 to +8; 0

<Low>: -8 to +8; 0

<Toner Save> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Gradation> <Standard>, <High 1>, <High 2> Yes B Settings for Printer

Settings

<Resolution> <1200 dpi>, <600 dpi> Yes B Settings for Printer

Settings

<Sharpness (Photo)> -1 to +3; 0Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Special Smoothing Mode> <Mode 1>, <Mode 2>, <Mode 3>, <Mode 4>, <Mode 5>,

<Mode 6> Yes B Settings for Printer

Settings

<Toner Volume Correction> <Normal>, <Grad. Priority>, <Text Priority> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Line Control> <Res. Priority>, <Grad. Priority> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Target for Width Adjust.>*1: <Text>, <Line>, <Text and

Line>, <All>

Yes B Settings for Printer

Settings

Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Enhance Text for B&W Print> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Binding Location> <Long Edge>, <Short Edge> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Gutter> -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm; 00.0 mm Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Offset Short Edge (Front)> -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm; 00.0 mm Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Offset Long Edge (Front)> -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm; 00.0 mm Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Offset Short Edge (Back)> -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm; 00.0 mm Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

Settings/Registration

336

<Offset Long Edge (Back)> -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm; 0.0 mm Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Auto Error Skip> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Timeout>: 5 seconds to 300 seconds; 15 seconds Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Personality>*1 <Auto>, <PS>, <PCL>, <Imaging>, <PDF>, <XPS> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Mode Priority>*1 <None>, <PS>, <PCL>, <PDF>, <XPS> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Auto Select>*1

Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Color Mode> <Auto (Color/B&W)>, <Black & White> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Compressed Image Output> <Output>, <Display Error> Yes C Settings for Printer

Settings

<Initialize> <Yes>, <No> No No -

*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specied.

Settings/Registration

337

UFR II

7KKL-0A1

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with

the Remote UI

<Err Diffusion(600dpi Only)>:<On>,

<Off>

Yes B Settings for Printer Settings

<Graphics>: <Resolution>,

<General>, <Perceptual>,

<Colorimetric>, <Vivid Photo>,

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

Yes B Settings for Printer Settings<Graphics>: <On>, <Off>

<Paper Save> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

Settings/Registration

338

PCL

7KKL-0A2

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Paper Save> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Orientation> <Portrait>, <Landscape> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Font Source> <Internal>, <Soft/External> No C Settings for Printer Settings

0 to 104; 0 (If the Font Source setting is Internal.)

1 to 999; 1 (If the Font Source setting is Soft/

External.)

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Point Size>*1 4.00 to 999.75 <point>; 12.00 <point> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Pitch>*1 0.44 to 99.99 <cpi>; 10.00 <cpi> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Form Lines> 5 to 128 <lines>; 64 <lines> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<ARABIC8>, <DESKTOP>, <GREEK8>, <HEBREW7>,

<HEBREW8>, <ISO4>, <ISO6>, <ISO11>, <ISO15>,

<ISO17>, <ISO21>, <ISO60>, <ISO69>, <ISOCYR>,

<ISOGRK>, <ISOHEB>, <ISOL1>, <ISOL2>, <ISOL5>,

<ISOL6>, <ISOL9>, <LEGAL>, <MATH8>, <MCTEXT>,

<MSPUBL>, <PC8>, <PC8DN>, <PC8GRK>,<PC8TK>,

<PC775>, <PC850>, <PC851>, <PC852>, <PC858>,

<PC862>, <PC864>, <PC866>, <PC1004>, <PIFONT>,

<PSMATH>, <PSTEXT>, <ROMAN8>, <ROMAN9>,

<VNINTL>, <VNMATH>, <VNUS>, <WIN30>,

<WINARB>, <WINBALT>, <WINCYR>, <WINGRK>,

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Custom Paper> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Unit of Measure>*1 <Millimeters>, <inches> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<X dimension>*1 127.0 mm to 355.6 mm; 355.6 mm Yes B Settings for Printer Settings

<Y dimension>*1 76.2 mm to 216.0 mm; 216.0 mm Yes B Settings for Printer Settings

<Append CR to LF> <Yes>, <No> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Enlarge A4 Print Width> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

Yes B Settings for Printer Settings

Settings/Registration

339

<Matching Method> <General>, <Perceptual>, <Colorimetric>, <Vivid

Photo>, <Download Prole> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

Yes B Settings for Printer Settings<Graphics>: <On>, <Off>

<BarDIMM> <Enable>, <Disable> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<FreeScape>*1 <Off>, <~>, <">, <#>, <$>, </>, <\>, <?>, <{>, <}>, <|> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specied.

Settings/Registration

340

7KKL-0A3

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Paper Save> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Job Timeout> 0 to 3600 seconds; 0 second Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Print PS Errors> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Line Renement> <On>, <On (Slim)>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Pure Black Text> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Black Overprint>*1 <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<RGB Source Prole> <sRGB>, <Gamma 1.5>, <Gamma 1.8>, <Gamma

2.4>, <None>, <Download Prole> Yes No -

<CMYK Simulation Prole> <JapanColor(Canon>, <US Web Ctd(Canon>,

<Euro Standard>, <None>, <Download Prole> Yes No -

<Use Grayscale Prole> <On>, <Off> Yes No -

<Text>: <Normal>, <Photo>, <TR Normal>, <TR

Photo>, <Download Prole>

<Graphics>: <Normal>, <Photo>, <TR Normal>,

<Image>: <Normal>, <Photo>, <TR Normal>, <TR

Photo>, <Download Prole>

Yes No -

<Matching Method> <Perceptual>, <Saturation>, <Colorimetric> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

Yes B Settings for Printer Settings

<Brightness>*1 85% to 115%; 100% Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Composite Overprint> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Grayscale Conversion>*1 <sRGB>, <NTSC>, <Uniform RGB> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specied.

Settings/Registration

341

Imaging

7KKL-0A4

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Image Orientation> <Auto>, <Vertical>, <Horizontal> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Zoom> <Off>, <Auto> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Print Position> <Auto>, <Center>, <Top Left> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Show Warnings> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Enlarge Print Area> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<General>, <Perceptual>,

<Colorimetric>, <Vivid Photo>,

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Photo Optimizer PRO> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Red-Eye Correction>

<Red-Eye Correction>: <On>, <Off>

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Red-Eye Correction Level>: <Weak>,

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Face Brightener Level>: <Weak>,

<Halftones> <Resolution>, <Gradation>, <Error

Diffusion> Yes B Settings for Printer Settings

<Gray Compensation> <On>, <Off> Yes B Settings for Printer Settings

<Grayscale Conversion>*1 <sRGB>, <NTSC>, <Uniform RGB> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specied.

Settings/Registration

342

PDF

7KKL-0A5

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Paper Save> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Size> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Enlarge Print Area> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<N on 1> <Off>, <2 on 1>, <4 on 1>, <6 on 1>, <8 on 1>, <9

on 1>, <16 on 1> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Comment Print> <Off>, <Auto> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Line Renement> <On>, <On (Slim)>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Pure Black Text> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Black Overprint>*1 <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<RGB Source Prole> <sRGB>, <Gamma 1.5>,<Gamma 1.8>, <Gamma

2.4>,<None>, <Download Prole> Yes No -

<CMYK Simulation Prole> <JapanColor(Canon>, <US Web Ctd(Canon>, <Euro

Standard>, <None>, <Download Prole> Yes No -

<Use Grayscale Prole> <On>, <Off> Yes No -

<Text>: <Normal>, <Photo>, <TR Normal>, <TR

Photo>, <Download Prole>

<Graphics>: <Normal>, <Photo>, <TR Normal>,

<Image>: <Normal>, <Photo>, <TR Normal>, <TR

Photo>, <Download Prole>

Yes No -

<Matching Method> <Perceptual>, <Saturation>, <Colorimetric> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

Yes B Settings for Printer Settings

<Brightness>*1 85% to 115%; 100% Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Composite Overprint> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Grayscale Conversion>*1 <sRGB>, <NTSC>, <Uniform RGB> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

Settings/Registration

343

*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specied.

Settings/Registration

344

XPS

7KKL-0A6

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Paper Save> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<General>, < Perceptual>,

<Colorimetric>, <Vivid Photo>,

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Photo Optimizer PRO> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Red-Eye Correction>

<Red-Eye Correction>: <On>, <Off>

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Red-Eye Correction Level>*1: <Weak>,

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Face Brightener Level>*1 : <Weak>,

<Err Diffusion(600dpi Only)>: <On>,

<Off>

Yes B Settings for Printer Settings

Yes B Settings for Printer Settings<Graphics>: <On>, <Off>

<Grayscale Conversion>*1

Yes C Settings for Printer Settings

<Graphics>: <sRGB>, <NTSC>, <Uniform

RGB>

<Image>: <sRGB>, <NTSC>, <Uniform

RGB>

*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specied.

Settings/Registration

345

Utility

7KKL-0A7

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote UI Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Initialize PCL Storage> <Yes>, < No> No No -

<Initialize PS Storage> <Yes>, <No> No No -

<Reset Printer> <Yes>, <No> No No -

Settings/Registration

346

Send

7KKL-0A8

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<E-mail Settings>

<Basic Settings> <Use POP RX>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<POP Server Settings> <POP Interval>: 0 to 99 minutes Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<SMTP RX>: <Off>, <On>, <Always Use

TLS> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<POP>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Authentication Settings> <POP Authentication Method>:

<Standard>, <APOP>, <POP AUTH> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Conrm TLS Certicate for POP RX>

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

When <On> is selected:

<CN>: Off, On

Settings/Registration

347

Receive

7KKL-0A9

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting with

the Remote UI

<Print on Both Sides> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

●<Reduction Mode>: <Auto>,

<Fixed>

●<Reduction Ratio>: 75 to

90% to 97%

●<Reduction Direction>: <Vert. &

Horiz.>, <Vertical Only>

<RX Page Footer> <On>, <Off> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

348

Access Files

7KKL-0AA

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description

Can be set

in Remote

Import All

Function

Name of Item

When Exporting

with the Remote

<Change Default Set. (Memory Media

Print)>

<Paper>:<Multi-Purpose Tray>, <Drawer 1>, <Drawer 2> No C Favorite Settings

<Number of Copies>:<1>-<9999> No C Favorite Settings

<Color Mode>:<Color>, <Black & White> No C Favorite Settings

<2-Sided>:<Off>, <Book Type>、<Calendar Type> No C Favorite Settings

<Resolution>:<600 dpi>, <1200 dpi> No C Favorite Settings

<Enlarge Print Area>:<Off>, <On> No C Favorite Settings

<Set PDF/XPS Details>:

<N on 1>: <Off>, <2 on 1>, <4 on 1>, <6 on 1>, <8 on 1>,

<9 on 1>, <16 on 1>

<Halftones>: <Error Diffusion> (<Off>, <On>),

( <Text>(<Resolution>,<Gradation>), <Graphic Mode>

(<Resolution>, <Gradation>), <Image>(<Resolution>,

<Gradation>) )

No C Favorite Settings

<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>:

<Image Orientation>: <Auto>, <Always Portrait>,

<Print Position>: <Auto>, <Always Center>, <Always

Top Left>

<Halftones>: <Resolution>, <Gradation>, <Error

Diffusion>

No C Favorite Settings

<Use Print Function> <Use Print Function>: <Off>, <On> Yes C

Settings/

Registration Basic

Information

<Select Option When Connecting Mem.

Media> <Off>, <On> No C

Settings/

Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

349

7KKL-0JF

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Job Storage Period> 10, 20, 30 min., 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hr., 1, 2, 3

days No C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Shared>: <On>, <Off> No C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

Settings/Registration

350

Management Settings

7KKL-0AF

User Management(P. 352)

Device Management(P. 353)

License/Other(P. 354)

Data Management(P. 355)

Security Settings(P. 356)

Settings/Registration

351

User Management

7KKL-0AH

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Set Administrator Password> (32 characters maximum) Yes C Authentication User

Management

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

When <On> is selected: PIN Entry (7 digits

maximum)

<System Manager ID and PIN>, <System

Manager Name>, <E-Mail Address>,

Yes C Department ID Management

Settings

When <System Manager ID and PIN> is

selected:

<System Manager ID>: 7654321 (Seven

digits maximum)

<System Manager PIN>: 7654321 (Seven

digits maximum)

<Department ID Management> <Off>, <On> Yes C Department ID Management

Settings

Settings/Registration

352

Device Management

7KKL-0AJ

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote UI

<Device Name> Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Location> Yes A Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Display Job Status Before Authentication> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Receive>: <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

When <Off> is selected:

●<Rtrv Log w/Mngt Sftwr>: <Do

Not Allow>, <Allow>

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Save Audit Log> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Retrieve Network Authentication Log> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Restrict Service Representative Access> <Off>, <Off (Auth. Needed)>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use NFC Card Emulation> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Dsply Cnsmbls Purchase Bttn in Remote UI> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

When <On> is selected:

●<Dspl Cnsmbls Purch Btn>:

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Prohibit Initialization of Admin. Pswrd.> <Off>, <On> No No -

<Restrict Special Mode Operations> <Off>, <On> No C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Canon Genuine Mode> <Off>, <On> Yes No -

Settings/Registration

353

License/Other

7KKL-0AK

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI

Import All

Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the Remote

<Register License> 24 characters maximum No No -

<Use TLS> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Conrm TLS Certicate Using AddOn App>

<Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

When <On> is selected:

●<Add Items to Verify>: <CN>:

Off, On

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<On (Unlimited Use)>, <On (Specify

Period)>, <Off>Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

When <On (Specify Period)> is

selected:

●<Expires>: 1 to 60 to 120 sec.

Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use Proxy Settings of This Device> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Add X-FRAME-OPTIONS to HTTP Header> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Enable Remote UI> <Off>, <On> No C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Use TLS> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Register/Update Software> <Software Management Settings> Yes No -

<Start Setup Guide> <Yes>, <No> No No -

Settings/Registration

354

Data Management

7KKL-0AL

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote

UI Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting

with the Remote UI

<Password> No No -

<Export to USB Memory> <Password> No No -

<Restrict Import/Export from Web Service> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Initialize Network Settings> <Yes>, <No> No No -

<Initialize All Set. without Network Set.> <Yes>, <No> No No -

<Initialize All Data/Settings> <Yes>, <No> No No -

Settings/Registration

355

Security Settings

7KKL-0AR

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in Remote UI Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the

Remote UI

<Verify System at Startup> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

<McAfee Embedded Control> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic Information

Settings/Registration

356

Output Report

7KKL-0AE

●For information on the items ("A", "B", "C", and "No") in the "Import All Function" column, see Import All Function(P. 299) .

Item Setting Description Can be set in

Remote UI Import All Function

Name of Item When

Exporting with the

Remote UI

<2-Sided Printing> <Off>, <On> Yes C Settings/Registration Basic

Information

<Consumables Status Report> <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

<User Data List> <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

<Network User Data List> <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

<Communication Management Report> <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

Yes No -

<Counter Report> <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

Yes No -

<IPSec Policy List> <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

<AddOn System Information> <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

<Import Result Report> <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

<Toner Cartridge Log Report> <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

<Font List>: <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

<Font List>: <Yes>, <No> Yes No -

Settings/Registration

357

7KKL-0AS

Item Description

<Display Settings>(P. 359) This section describes the display settings.

<Timer/Energy Settings>(P. 361) This section describes the timer settings and energy settings.

<Network>(P. 365) This section describes the network settings.

<External Interface>(P. 377) This section describes the USB settings.

<Accessibility>(P. 379) This section describes settings for improving accessibility, such as inverting the screen colors

and setting the message display time.

<Volume Settings>(P. 380) This section describes the sound volume settings.

Settings/Registration

358

7KKL-0JH

This section describes the display settings.

You can rearrange the order in which the buttons appear on the <Home> screen. Customizing the <Home>

Screen(P. 103)

You can set the default screen displayed at startup/restoration.

You can select the language displayed on the display.

●Some messages may not be displayed properly in the selected language. In this case, restart the

machine. Some messages may not change even after the machine is restarted.

You can set whether to enter numeric values in millimeters or inches on the various numeric entry screens.

<Conrm When Loading Paper in Drawer>

You can set whether to display a screen prompting the user to check the paper settings when the paper drawer

is inserted into the machine.

●The screen prompting the user to check the paper settings is not displayed in the following cases.

- When paper is loaded because it has run out during a job

- When a paper jam is removed

- When a screen for executing, canceling, or conrming jobs is displayed

- When the paper is set in <Paper Settings> on the <Home> screen

Settings/Registration

359

You can set whether to display the IP address on the <Status Monitor> screen.

●This setting is only valid when <Use IPv4> is set to <On>.

You can set whether to display <Mobile Portal> on the <Home> screen.

You can set the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge for displaying the restock toner message.

You can set whether to display a message prompting the user to replace the waste toner container.

Settings/Registration

360

7KKL-0AX

This section describes the timer settings and energy settings.

Setting the current date and time is very important. For instructions on how to congure the setting, see

Setting the Date/Time(P. 7) .

You can set whether to display the time in 24-hour notation or 12-hour notation.

●You can also specify to automatically synchronize the date and time with a server on the network

using SNTP. Making SNTP Settings(P. 40)

If you set this function to <On>, you can reduce the time it takes until you can perform operations on the screen

after the power is turned ON.

●When this function is enabled

-Standby power is consumed even when the power is turned OFF.

- A tone sounds when the machine is turned ON, or when the machine is turned OFF if you set

<Energy Saver/Sleep Tone> to <On>. (However, the machine may not be able to start up quickly and

the tone may not sound, depending on the status of the machine.)

●Even if this function is set to <On>, the machine does not startup quickly in the following situations:

- When any of the network settings below are set to 'On'

●Wi-Fi

- When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power in any of the

conditions below

●More than 110 hours have elapsed after quick startup

●Operating jobs

●Jobs are reserved

●Backing up data

●Accessing to the machine via network

●After specifying settings which require restarting the machine

●Error is occurred

●Using the Limited Functions mode

Settings/Registration

361

●The power cord is disconnected after turning OFF the main power

●AddOn applications which do not support quick startup are installed on the machine

- When turning ON the main power of the machine in 20 seconds after turning OFF the main power

- When turning ON the main power of the machine after eight hours have passed since the machine

was turned OFF

- When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power from the

Remote UI

You can specify the time period in which you are logged out and the display returns to the default setting

automatically.

●If the login service is being used, the machine automatically logs out the user when the Auto Reset

Time elapses.

●The screen displayed after the Auto Reset initiates differs depending on the following settings.

- Setting 1: The settings in <Function After Auto Reset>

●When <Default Function> is set, the screen specied in <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>

(Setting 2) is displayed.

●When <Selected Function> is set, the function before the Auto Reset initiates is displayed. (The

specied settings and entered values for each function will be cleared.) However, the <Selected

Function> settings may not be correctly reected, and the screen specied in <Default Screen After

Startup/Restoration> may be displayed.

- Setting 2: The settings in <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>

If you set this function to <On>, general users become unable to set <Auto Reset Time> and <Function After

Auto Reset>.

You can set whether the default screen set for <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration> in <Display Settings>

or the immediately previous screen is displayed at startup after the Auto Reset initiates.

With the Auto Shutdown, if the display of the machine is idle for a certain period of time after it has entered the

Sleep mode, the machine automatically shuts down.

Settings/Registration

362

●Even when operating the machine from the Remote UI, the machine automatically shuts down if the

control panel of the machine is idle for a certain period of time. A malfunction may occur particularly

if the machine automatically shuts down while importing. Set <Auto Shutdown Time> to <0> when

importing data.

●The Auto Shutdown may not be performed, depending on the usage conditions of the machine.

You can set the time that the machine automatically shuts down each day of the week. If you use this function,

you do not have to shut down the machine manually every day.

●If both <Auto Shutdown Time> and <Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer> are set, priority is given to <Auto

Shutdown Time>.

You can set whether the machine enters the Auto Sleep mode when an error has occurred.

●Disable this setting to prevent the machine from entering the Sleep mode.

You can set the time until the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode if no operations are performed.

●It is recommended that the default value is used for this setting.

You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the Sleep mode.

Settings/Registration

363

●If the machine is connected to a computer using a USB cable, depending on the timing for entering

the sleep mode, the machine may be unable to receive data correctly. Reactivate the machine from

the sleep mode, then execute the job again.

●The energy consumption level may be the same as when <High> is set even when <Low> is set,

depending on the status of the machine.

●If the energy consumption level is set to <Low>, communication failure may occur, depending on the

network utility software you are using. To avoid this, press the Energy Saver key to cancel the Sleep

mode before using the machine.

You can set the time that the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode each day of the week.

●If you set both the <Auto Sleep Time> and <Auto Sleep Weekly Timer>, the <Auto Sleep Time> setting

is given priority.

You can automatically perform the automatic gradation adjustment at a set time every day.

You can set the time for recovering from the Sleep mode.

Settings/Registration

364

7KKL-0AY

This section describes the network settings.

You can print the settings in <Network>. <Output Report>(P. 406)

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

<Conrm Network Connection>

If this setting is set to <On>, you can change network settings. If errors related to network connections occur,

an error message appears on the screen of the machine.

Set whether to use IPv4. Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

Specify the IPv4 address. Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

Specify the optional settings for DHCP. Making DNS Settings(P. 31)

Specify whether to perform the automatic update when the mapping between the host name and IP address is

changed on an environment such as DHCP. Making DNS Settings(P. 31)

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Tests whether the IPv4 address is set correctly. Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv4 Address(P. 24)

Settings/Registration

365

Specify whether to use IPv6. Setting an IPv6 Address(P. 25)

Specify whether to use the IPv6 stateless address. Setting an IPv6 Address(P. 25)

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify the IPv6 address manually. Setting an IPv6 Address(P. 25)

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify whether to obtain the IPv6 address from the DHCP server. Setting an IPv6 Address(P. 25)

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify whether to obtain only the former half of the stateful address from the DHCP server by using DHCPv6.

Specify the optional settings for DHCP. Making DNS Settings(P. 31)

Specify the DNS server address settings. Making DNS Settings(P. 31)

Settings/Registration

366

Specify settings for using the DNS function on a system that does not have a DNS server. Making DNS

Settings(P. 31)

Specify settings for LPD printing. To use LPD printing, select <On> and set the time until the job is automatically

canceled when the print data cannot be received due to a communication error, etc.

●Banner pages are set to be output by print job. Even if <Output LPD Banner Page> is set to <On>,

banner pages are not output for print jobs that are set to not output a banner page.

Specify settings for RAW printing. To use RAW printing, select <On> and set whether to use bidirectional

communication and the time until the job is automatically canceled when the print data cannot be received due

to a communication error, etc.

Specify settings for Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). Making SNTP Settings(P. 40)

Specify settings for FTP printing. To use FTP printing, select <On>, and set <User Name> and <Password> as

necessary.

Specify whether to use UTF-8 for displaying le names when you perform FTP print.

Specify the WSD settings. To use WSD (Web Service on Devices) for the print application, set <Use WSD Printing>

to <On>. To use WSD to retrieve the information for the machine, set <Use WSD Browsing> to <On>.

●If you set <Use WSD Printing> to <On>, <Use WSD Browsing> and <Use HTTP> are also set to <On>.

Settings/Registration

367

Specify settings for IPP printing. To use IPP printing, select <On> and set whether to only allow communication

data encrypted with TLS (IPP printing) and whether to use IPP authentication.

●If you set this to <On>, <Use HTTP> is also set to <On>.

●To perform IPPS printing, a key pair to use is required. You can use a preinstalled key pair or an

original key pair generated by the machine as the key to use. For information on the key to use and

the method for generating an original key pair, see Generating the Key and Certicate for

Network Communication(P. 229) or Registering a Key and Certicate for Network

Communication(P. 234) . If you select <RSA> for <Key Algorithm> when generating the key to use for

network communication, set a key length of <1024-bit> or longer. IPPS printing may not be able to be

performed correctly if a key length of <512-bit> is set, depending on the operating system you are

using.

●To use the IPP authentication function by setting <Use Authentication> to <On>, the user information

of the machine is used as the user and password for IPP authentication. Make sure to register the

user information in advance when using the IPP authentication function. Registering User

Information in the Local Device(P. 179)

Specify the multicast discovery settings. Monitoring the Machine From Device Management

Systems(P. 41)

Specify settings for multicast sending of the Sleep mode notications on the network.

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Enable or disable HTTP setting.

●By specifying this setting as <On>, you can open a necessary port. However, it is recommended that

you specify it as <Off>, if a port is not used. If you leave the port open, an unauthorized user may

access the machine.

Settings/Registration

368

If you set this to <Off>, the following settings are also set to <Off>.

●<Remote UI Settings>

●<IPP Print Settings>

●<Use WSD Printing> in <WSD Settings>

●<Use WebDAV Server>

You can set a key pair, TLS version, and encryption algorithm to use after conrming that a machine uses TLS

encrypted communication. Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify settings for the proxy. Setting a Proxy(P. 223)

<Conrm Auth Info When in Auth Mngt Mode>

Specify whether the machine checks authentication information when you print using the V4 printer driver.

●If there is no key to use for TLS communication or it is corrupted, this setting is disabled.

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

Specify the IPSec settings. Conguring the IPSec Settings(P. 246)

You can register IPSec policies and set priorities.

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Settings/Registration

369

Specify the TCP option window scale and MTU size.

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify the SNMP settings. Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 34)

Specify whether the host resources MIB is compliant with the specications of RFC2790.

Specify whether to congure/refer to detailed information of the machine from the Canon drivers or utility

software.

●If the setting is set to <Off>, some application that uses dedicated port may not be used.

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify the authentication method for the dedicated port.

●If the setting is set to <Mode 2>, communication using a dedicated port uses a secure mode.

Accordingly, you may not be able to connect from device management software or drivers, etc.

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify whether to spool print jobs that are sent to the machine in the storage device of the machine.

Settings/Registration

370

Specify whether to eciently process the data when multiple print jobs are sent to the machine. If this is set to

<Off>, the data is printed in the order of reception, but the print speed may be slower.

Specify the waiting time for connecting to a network from when the machine starts. Setting the Wait Time

When Connecting to a Network(P. 30)

Specify the Ethernet driver settings. Making Ethernet Settings(P. 29)

Specify the settings for IEEE 802.1X. Conguring the IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 253)

●If you set <IEEE 802.1X Settings> to <On>, the machine will not completely enter the Sleep mode.

Specify the outbound lter. Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

Specify the inbound lter. Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

<Set> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv4 Address Filter> <IPv4 Address ICMP

Settings>

Specify whether to always allow ICMP communication.

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify the outbound lter. Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

Settings/Registration

371

Specify the inbound lter. Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

<Set> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv6 Address Filter> <IPv6 Address ICMP

Settings>

Specify whether to always allow ICMPv6 communication.

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify the outbound lter. Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 218)

Specify the inbound lter. Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 218)

Displays the log for blocking with an IP address lter. Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify the timeout time after logging in to the Remote UI.

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Settings/Registration

372

Specify whether to print data directly from mobile devices that support Mopria®, such as smartphones and

tablets. Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 149)

Specify whether to print directly from an iPhone, iPad, iPod Touch, or Mac that supports AirPrint. Using

AirPrint(P. 151)

Specify whether to display an error screen on the control panel if printing cannot be performed as expected due

to a problem with the print data when printing with AirPrint.

If this is set to <On>, an error screen is displayed on the control panel. Cancel the job after checking the error

screen. If this is set to <Off>, an error screen is not displayed on the control panel but the job remains in the job

history with <Error> indicated.

Specify the device position information settings. Using AirPrint(P. 151)

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Specify the Universal Print settings. Printing Using the Microsoft Cloud Service (Universal Print)(P. 130)

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Select whether to use a wired LAN or wireless LAN by itself, a wired LAN and wireless LAN simultaneously, or a

wired LAN and another wired LAN simultaneously. Selecting the Network Connection Method(P. 10)

Specify the wireless LAN settings. Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 14)

Settings/Registration

373

Displays the setting information of wireless LAN. Check the settings and information of the wireless

LAN(P. 14)

Specify whether to set the machine to the power save mode periodically, according to the signals sent by a

wireless LAN router. Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 14)

Specify whether to use direct connection. Connecting Directly(P. 146)

Select the type of direct connection. Connecting Directly(P. 146)

●If Wi-Fi Direct is selected, only one mobile device can connect.

Specify the device name to use for direct connections (Wi-Fi Direct).

●"-XY_Canon10" (where XY are random letters) is automatically appended to the device name for Wi-Fi

Direct, unless the device name is 22 characters or more, in which case "-XY_Canon10" is not

appended.

Specify the time before communication is automatically terminated when there is a prolonged period of no data

transmission/reception while communicating using direct connection.

●This setting is disabled if <Keep Enabled If SSID/Net. Key Specied> is set to <On>.

Specify the settings for access point mode.

Settings/Registration

374

When <Use Personal SSID and Network Key> is set to <On>

●Information on the user and SSID/network key when logging in is associated and stored in the

machine. Only one mobile device can be connected.

When <Use Personal SSID and Network Key> is set to <Off>

●If both <Use Custom SSID> and <Use Custom Network Key> are set to <On>, multiple mobile devices

can be connected at the same time. A maximum of ve devices can be connected at the same time.

●If either or both <Use Custom SSID> and <Use Custom Network Key> are set to <Off>, a random SSID

or network key is used to connect each time. Only one mobile device can be connected.

If <Specify SSID to Use> and <Specify Network Key to Use> are enabled in <Access Point Mode Settings>, direct

connections can be made without pressing <Enable> in <Direct Connection> in <Mobile Portal>.

●The machine can connect with multiple mobile devices at the same time. A maximum of ve devices

can be connected at the same time.

●If this is set to <On>, the <Time Until Direct Connection Session Is Terminated> setting is disabled.

●If this is set to <On>, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode completely.

Specify the IP address to distribute to mobile devices connecting using direct connection.

●The IP address distributed to mobile devices may be up to nine numbers greater than the value of the

specied IP address.

Specify an SSID and network key for each user when logging in and connecting using a direct connection. To set

an SSID, set <Use Custom SSID> to <On>, and enter the SSID. To set a network key, set <Use Custom Network

Key> to <On>, and enter the network key.

●This setting can only be specied from the Remote UI.

Settings/Registration

375

Specify the IPv4 address to use with a wireless LAN (sub line) when using both a wired LAN and wireless LAN at

the same time.

Select the line to connect mobile devices to when using both a wired LAN (main line) and wireless LAN (sub line)

at the same time.

Specify the Ethernet driver settings for the sub line. Making Ethernet Settings(P. 29)

Specify the transmission lter in the sub line settings. Conguring the Firewall of the Sub Line(P. 220)

Specify the reception lter in the sub line settings. Conguring the Firewall of the Sub Line(P. 220)

Specify the DNS server address settings for the sub line. Making DNS Settings(P. 31)

Specify the proxy settings for the sub line. Setting a Proxy(P. 223)

Specify the static routing settings for IPv4 addresses. Setting Static Routing(P. 38)

Settings/Registration

376

7KKL-0C0

This section describes the USB settings.

You can set whether to use the machine as a USB device.

●If this is set to <Off>, print jobs from a computer connected via USB cable cannot be performed.

●Changes in settings are effective after performing <Apply Set. Changes> on the <Home> screen.

You can set whether to use the AddOn driver for USB external storage.

●Depending on the type of AddOn application that uses USB external memory device, you may need to

set this to <On>. To check whether you need to set this to <On>, see the manual for the AddOn

application you are using, or contact your dealer or service representative.

●Changes in settings are effective after performing <Apply Set. Changes> on the <Home> screen.

You can set whether to allow the use of USB external storage devices.

●Changes in settings are effective after performing <Apply Set. Changes> on the <Home> screen.

This enables you to prevent a new printer driver from being installed when switching machines with multiple

machines connected via USB.

Settings/Registration

377

●Set this to <Off> when using a USB hub to connect multiple machines.

●Changes in settings are effective after performing <Apply Set. Changes> on the <Home> screen.

Settings/Registration

378

7KKL-0C1

This section describes settings for improving accessibility, such as inverting the screen colors and setting the message

display time.

You can invert the screen colors of the display. If you nd it hard to view the display even after adjusting

<Backlight Brightness>, try specifying this setting.

You can adjust the contrast (the difference between the light and dark parts) of the display to suit the

installation location of the machine.

You can adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.

You can specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.

You can adjust the scrolling speed of the screen by selecting from three levels.

Settings/Registration

379

7KKL-0JJ

All the settings used to generate the conrmation sound of a key being pressed, the sound indicating completion of

the printing process, and other sounds, are listed with descriptions.

●For information about the setting procedures, see Setting Sounds(P. 105) .

You can set whether to produce a sound when a key on the control panel has been pressed.

You can set whether to produce a sound wen an invalid key operation has been performed, for example, when

an invalid numeric value has been entered.

You can set whether to produce a sound that indicates the end of toner cartridge lifetime is approaching.

You can set whether to produce a sound telling that a trouble has occurred on the machine, such as a paper

jam, incorrect operation, or press of an inoperable key.

You can set whether to produce a sound when printing has been completed.

You can set whether to produce a sound when the machine enters or exits the sleep mode.

You can set whether to produce a sound when login is successful.

Settings/Registration

380

7KKL-0K4

Item Description

<Maintenance>(P. 382) This section describes how to use the auto cleaning function for the main unit.

<Adjust Image Quality>(P. 383) This section describes how to adjust image quality for printing.

Settings/Registration

381

7KKL-0C5

This section describes how to use the auto cleaning function for the main unit.

If printed paper is dirty, execute <Clean Pressure Roller for Fixing>.

If you do not expect to use much yellow toner, set this to <On> before installing the yellow toner cartridge.

●If you set this to <On>, the print speed may be slower.

Set whether to start the process to remove condensation when condensation is detected inside the machine. If

you set this mode to <On>, the process to remove condensation is automatically performed.

●During the process to remove condensation, printing may not be performed correctly resulting in the paper

being blank.

●To maintain the effect of the process to remove condensation going when this mode is set to <On>, it is

necessary to keep the machine's power ON.

●If you select <On> and press <OK>, a screen asking whether to immediately perform the process to

remove condensation is displayed. If you want to immediately start the process to remove

condensation, press <Yes>.

Settings/Registration

382

7KKL-0C3

This section describes how to adjust image quality for printing.

The machine performs calibration for correctly reproducing the colors of originals.

The machine performs automatic adjustment (calibration) in order to prevent color misregistration and ensure

that the original color intensity is correctly reproduced. You can set the timing and frequency for performing

calibration. Automatically Adjusting Color Registration and Color Intensity(P. 429)

You can adjust the print position when printing is lopsided or protruding from the print range. Adjusting the

Print Position(P. 430)

By adjusting the amount of toner used when color printing, you may be able to reduce problems such as

streaks and irregularities. Reducing Toner Used When Color Printing(P. 433)

You can set <Waterdrop Pattern Prevention Mode> for when a splattered image, white patches, streaks, etc.

appear on the halftone images of twosided print jobs. Immediately after you turn ON the machine in a low

temperature environment, if the halftone reproduction of the printout becomes signicantly different from the

original document, set this mode to <On>.

●If you set <Waterdrop Pattern Prevention Mode>, the printing speed for the rst sheet becomes

slower.

You can reduce image quality problems that occur due to an inappropriate xing unit temperature by adjusting

the xing temperature.

●Set this in the following cases. The print results may be improved.

- <Low>: Set this when the same unintended image is repeated, as indicated below.

Settings/Registration

383

- <High 1>: Set this when the toner of the printed images peels off.

-<High 2>: Set this when the improvements of <High 1> are insucient.

●Set <Standard> to not use either setting.

●The printing speed is slower when <High 2> is set.

●Toner peeling may be able to be improved without changing this setting, by changing the paper type

and usage environment.

You can set <Curl Prevention Mode> to reduce curling on the end of paper due to the heat and pressure of the

xing unit during printing.

●If this setting is set to <On>, it may affect the printing quality.

●If setting <Mode 1> to <On> does not reduce curling, set <Mode 2> to <On>. If setting both <Mode 1>

and <Mode 2> does not reduce curling, set <Mode 1> and <Mode 2> to <Off> and set <Switch Paper

Feed Method> to <Print Side Priority>.

Paper may not be fed correctly when printing or print quality may be reduced, depending on the usage

environment.

●<Mode 1> : Set this when printing documents with large amounts of images or text on each page.

However, the print speed will be slower.

●<Mode 2> : Set this when printing documents with small amounts of images or text on each page. The

print speed will not be reduced as much as <Mode 1>.

●<Off>: Set this when you do not want the print speed to be reduced. However, the print quality will

not be improved.

Settings/Registration

384

The secondary transfer roller is cleaned after executing a print job with free size specied. Set this when the

back side of the paper is dirty.

White streaks may appear in the printed image. This setting may improve this problem.

●When set to <On>, the print density will be lighter.

Smudges may appear in the printed image, depending on the paper type and usage environment. This setting

may improve this problem.

●When set to <On>, the print speed will be slower.

<Corr. Tail End Fix. When Using Plain Ppr>

Colors may become darker at the tail end of printed images because toner is insuciently xed. This setting

may improve this problem.

●When set to <On>, the print speed will be slower.

The nish quality may be able to be improved by enabling this setting when using plain paper with a smooth

surface.

●If you set this setting to <On> when using plain paper without a smooth surface, xing problems may

occur.

Settings/Registration

385

The nish quality may be able to be improved by enabling this setting when using heavy paper without a

smooth surface.

●If you set this setting to <On> when using paper with a smooth surface, xing problems may occur.

You can set <Envelope Sealing Prevention Mode> to prevent the glue on envelope aps from melting and

sealing due to the heat and pressure of the xing unit during envelope printing.

●This setting is only enabled during envelope printing.

●If this setting is set to <On>, the quality of the image may be adversely affected.

Settings/Registration

386

7KKL-0C7

This section describes the settings for functions.

●Some settings can only be set by the Administrator.

●Some of the settings may not be displayed depending on the conguration of optional equipment installed

on the machine.

Item Description

<Common>(P. 388) This section describes settings for functions such as Paper Feed Settings, Paper Output Settings,

and Print Settings.

<Printer>(P. 391) This section describes how to specify printer settings.

<Send>(P. 393) This section describes how to specify E-mail settings.

<Receive>(P. 394) This section describes how to specify receive settings.

<Access Files>(P. 395) This section describes the settings for printing stored les.

<Print>(P. 396) This section describes the print settings.

Settings/Registration

387

7KKL-0K5

This section describes settings for functions such as Paper Feed Settings, Paper Output Settings, and Print Settings.

●Some of the settings may not be displayed depending on the conguration of optional equipment installed

on the machine.

You can congure the paper source that will be used when printing with <Select Paper> set to <Auto>. This

setting also functions when the paper in the current paper source runs out during printing. Automatically

Selecting the Appropriate Paper Source for a Specic Function (P. 101)

When regularly using paper with logos such as letterheads, while printing in both one-sided and two-sided, you

can set this setting to <Print Side Priority> to print the rst page on the front side for both one-sided and two-

sided, without having to change the paper orientation. Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 80)

●The settings for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching are disabled for paper sources

with <Print Side Priority> set. The print speed is also slower when performing one-sided printing.

●<Print Side Priority> is only enabled when paper that can be printed on both sides is set ( Paper

Available for Two-Sided Printing(P. 547) ).

●For instructions on loading paper, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 80) .

If this setting is set to <On> and a job is suspended due to a lack of paper, etc., the machine automatically prints

the next job after the specied time period.

●If a job is suspended because paper has run out during the job, the next job is not processed even

after the designated suspension time elapses.

●To automatically delete suspended jobs, see <Auto Delete Suspended Jobs>(P. 390) .

Settings/Registration

388

This enables you to insert the specied paper at the start of each job when multiple jobs are printed

consecutively.

This enables you to insert the specied paper each number of copy sets to divide the sets. If you set this, paper

is inserted when printing with Collate (Page Order).

●If you are using the Group (Same Pages) mode, you cannot insert job separation sheets between copy

sets.

A job that has a higher set priority can be set to print after the job currently being processed is complete.

●If the same printing priority has been specied for multiple functions, printing starts with the rst

processed print job.

●Priority printing does not take place until the current job is complete. However, if the current job is

paused, the printing of another job may start, depending on its settings.

<Chrom. Color Conv. for Two Colors Print>

You can select the specied color to use when printing using the two-color mode, which prints in black and a

specied color. The two-color mode can be set for printing. This setting is reected in the two-color mode for

printing.

●All Chromatic Colors: When specifying the color to use for all chromatic colors other than black in the image

data.

●Approximate Colors Only: When using the color for only the specied color (or approximate color) and using

black for all other chromatic colors in the image data.

Example Replaced Colors and Settings

When the two-color mode is specied for image data including the following colors, the colors are replaced

as indicated below.

●Colors included in the original image data: Red, orange, blue, black

●Red specied for the two-color mode

Settings/Registration

389

Image data "All Chromatic Colors" "Approximate Colors Only"

Red Red Red

Orange Red Red

Blue Red Black

Black Black Black

If this setting is set to <On> and a job is suspended due to a paper jam, etc., the machine automatically deletes

the job after the specied time period.

●To retain a suspended job without automatically deleting it, see <Suspended Job

Timeout>(P. 388) .

You can set the print operation when the remaining toner in the toner cartridge is low. You can also set whether

to display the restock toner message.

●When set to <Display Warning Screen>, <Displ Tnr Cart Warning> is set to <On>.

Settings/Registration

390

7KKL-0CA

This section describes the printer settings.

Specify the printer settings.

For more information, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer).

If this setting is set to <On>, you can restrict jobs from the printer driver.

You can select which paper to prioritize when both horizontal paper and vertical paper are loaded and set as the

target for automatic paper selection.

If this setting is set to <On>, you can display a message prompting the user to load paper in the multi-purpose

tray when the paper specied with automatic paper selection is not found.

If this setting is set to <On>, printing on the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray is prioritized.

Select default Page Description Language (PDL).

When printing on free size paper, the machine detects whether the size of the loaded paper matches the print

settings.

You can set the orientation for printing on free size paper.

You can specify the password that restricts the use of the control command prepared by the PS printer.

Settings/Registration

391

●<SystemParams Password> is a password that allows changes to the system parameter, and <StartJob

Password> is a password that allows startjob, exitserver operator to perform. For more information,

check PostScript language specications.

You can set the paper source used for the PCL5 PaperSource command.

●For details on each setting, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer).

Settings/Registration

392

<Send>

7KKL-0JY

This section describes how to specify the e-mail print settings.

You can congure the settings for using the e-mail print function. Other settings related to e-mail printing, such

as the settings for a mail server, must be congured from the Remote UI. Conguring E-Mail Print

Settings(P. 45)

●If you set shorter than 10 minutes (excluding '0 min') for <POP Interval>, the machine will not

completely enter the Sleep mode.

<Conrm TLS Certicate for POP RX>

You can check whether the TLS server certicate is valid when receiving with POP. You can verify the validity of

the certicate and reliability of the certicate chain, as well as conrm the CN (Common Name).

●If you do not verify the certicate, TLS communication is performed, even with an invalid certicate.

●If there is a problem with the certicate, POP receiving will fail.

Settings/Registration

393

7KKL-0CE

This section describes how to specify receive settings.

You can select whether to print received documents on both sides of paper.

You can select whether to reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the

printable area of the paper.

●If this setting is set to <Off>, the image size of the received le is not reduced to t the size of the

paper. If the size of the image exceeds the printable area, the image is divided into equal sections and

printed onto separate sheets of paper.

●If you select <Auto> in <Reduction Mode>, the image size is automatically reduced by a suitable

reduction ratio. This ratio can range from the value set for <Reduction Ratio>, up to 100% of the

received document size.

You can select whether to print information, such as reception time and page number, at the bottom of

received documents.

●When an e-mail without a body is received, the From information and Subject information (up to 24

characters for each) is printed at the top of the rst page of the attachment le.

Settings/Registration

394

7KKL-0CF

This section describes the settings for printing stored les.

You can change the settings registered as default for the <Access Stored Files> function.

Specifying this setting enables you to print les in memory media. Restricting the Use of Memory

Media(P. 261)

You can set whether to display the print settings screen when memory media is connected. Connecting a

USB Memory Device(P. 53)

Settings/Registration

395

<Print>

7KKL-0JK

This section describes the print settings.

Specify the time period for storing jobs.

Specify the job types to be included in the job list, and the job type to be selected by default.

Settings/Registration

396

7KKL-0CK

You can congure the settings related to management of users, devices, and data, etc., for secure and ecient use of

the machine.

Item Description

<User Management>(P. 398) You can congure the settings for managing users of the machine.

<Device Management>(P. 399) You can manage information about the hardware and operations, as well as various data

required when using the machine functions.

<License/Other>(P. 401) You can register licenses and congure the settings related to the software and system options

available for the machine.

<Data Management>(P. 403) You can congure settings for utilizing data such as the machine settings information and

initializing data.

<Security Settings>(P. 405) You can congure settings related to system modication.

Settings/Registration

397

7KKL-0CL

You can congure the settings for managing users of the machine with a user authentication application.

You can change the password used by the Administrator for logging into the Remote UI. When changing the

password again, it can only be specied from the Remote UI.

You can set whether to enter the PIN to display settings that require Administrator privileges.

Set the System Manager information for the machine. Changing the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 203)

Select whether to manage users in groups by assigning users to Department IDs. Conguring the

Department ID Management Settings(P. 205)

●You can only select whether to use Department ID Management here. The Remote UI must be used to

Settings/Registration

398

7KKL-0CR

You can specify settings related to the management of the device and optional products.

Enter the name and the installation location to identify the machine.

Select whether to restrict access to the <Status Monitor> screen when using a login service.

Select whether to restrict users from performing operations on the jobs of other users on the <Status Monitor>

screen when User Authentication is used.

Select whether to display job logs on the <Status Monitor> screen. You can also select whether to allow device

management software to retrieve job logs from the machine. Basic Screens(P. 83)

Select whether to start log recording. For information on the types of logs, see Management

Functions(P. 531) .

Starting Log Recording(P. 273)

Select whether to start log recording for authentication performed when the machine is accessed via the

network, such as when printing from a computer.

You can set the machine to restrict changes in user information or security-related settings when the machine is

inspected or repaired by your dealer or service representative.

●Even when this is not set to <On>, you can check the audit log for past operations if the service

representative has changed user information or security-related settings.

Settings/Registration

399

Specify whether to use NFC functions to connect to mobile devices.

<Set> <Management Settings> <Device Management> ＜Remote UI/Toner Status Cnsmbls Info Set.＞

Select whether to display a button for accessing the website for purchasing toner cartridges on the Remote UI.

<Set> <Management Settings> <Device Management> ＜Remote UI/Toner Status Cnsmbls Info Set.＞

Select whether to use the toner cartridge level notication tool. You can also set whether to display a button for

accessing the website for purchasing toner cartridges on the toner cartridge level notication tool.

Set whether to restrict the operation of <Initialize Administrator Password> in <Check Counter>.

Select whether to restrict use of Special Mode, which is provided for the purpose of maintenance by service

representatives.

This mode is for genuine cartridges.

●A service technician may change the settings. If the menu is not displayed, contact the administrator

of the machine.

Settings/Registration

400

7KKL-0CS

You can register licenses and congure the settings related to the software and system options available for the

machine.

Enter the license key for a system option that can be used on the machine. Installing System

Options(P. 292)

Select whether to use TLS communication when an AddOn application is used by accessing the machine via a

Web browser.

●You need to congure the key and certicate before setting this setting to <On>. Conguring the

Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

●Changes made for this setting are also applied to <Use TLS> in <Remote UI Settings>(P. 401) .

<Conrm TLS Certicate Using AddOn App>

Select whether to verify TLS server certicates and their common names (CN) when TLS communication is used

for an AddOn application.

Select whether to save DNS information from successful searches via an AddOn application to memory. You can

also set an expiration date if you choose to save information temporarily.

Select whether to use the proxy settings of the machine with AddOn applications. Setting a Proxy(P. 223)

When the HTTP server returns a response, it appends X-FRAME-OPTIONS to the header to prevent contents

created by other servers from overlapping.

Select whether to use the Remote UI to operate the machine and change settings.

Settings/Registration

401

You can install system options/AddOn applications in the machine. Installing System Options(P. 292)

You can follow the wizard instructions to congure the machine's initial settings. Setting up Using the Setup

Guide(P. 6)

Settings/Registration

402

7KKL-0CU

You can congure settings for utilizing data such as the machine settings information and initializing data.

You can import all the settings information from a USB memory device.

●If USB memory is already connected to the machine, that USB memory will be recognized as the

media to use for importing, even if you connect new USB memory. Select <Remove Memory Media>,

remove the connected USB memory, and then connect the desired USB memory.

You can export all the settings information into a USB memory device.

●You cannot select which settings to export when exporting to USB memory. All settings are batch

exported.

●If USB memory is already connected to the machine, that USB memory will be recognized as the

media to use for exporting, even if you connect new USB memory. Select <Remove Memory Media>,

remove the connected USB memory, and then connect the desired USB memory.

Select whether to restrict import and export operations with Web applications other than the Remote UI.

You can restore all of the network settings to the factory default values. Initializing Settings(P. 294)

You can restore all of the machine settings to the factory default values. Initializing Settings(P. 294)

Settings/Registration

403

●<Network> is not initialized.

Select to restore all of the machine settings to the factory default values and completely erase the data stored in

the machine. It is not normally necessary to use this setting, but it is useful to erase personal or condential

information when disposing of the machine. Initializing Settings(P. 294)

Settings/Registration

404

7KKL-0CW

You can congure settings related to system modication.

You can set the machine to verify the integrity of the rmware and applications installed in the machine during

startup.

●This function restarts the machine not only when the setting is changed from <Off> to <On> but also

when <Apply> is selected without changing the setting from <On>. To avoid restarting the machine

without changing the setting from <On>, select <No> on the conrmation screen and then navigate

from the screen for this function.

●When this function is set to <On>, startup takes longer than when it is set to <Off> because system

verication is performed.

●The following events and results are recorded to the device management log. Managing the

Logs(P. 273)

Event Result

Firmware verication Success

Verication of the applications installed in the machine Failure

●If an error code is displayed on the screen when the machine is started with this setting set to <On>,

contact your dealer or service representative.

When the machine is operating, the McAfee Embedded Control function is used to prevent unauthorized

program modication and the execution of unauthorized programs, for improved system reliability.

●To set this function to <On>, it is necessary to set <Verify System at Startup> to <On> in advance.

●When this function is set to <On>, startup takes longer than when it is set to <Off>.

Settings/Registration

405

7KKL-0CJ

This section describes settings regarding report output.

<2-Sided Printing>

You can output reports such as the print history and settings list with two-sided printing.

You can print a report to check the status of the consumables in the machine.

You can check the settings of the machine and their current values in a list. Information such as the rmware

version and registered paper sizes and types are also printed.

●Network settings are not printed to the user data list.

You can check the network settings of the machine and their current values in a list. Information regarding

security, such as the address lter and IPSec settings, are also printed.

●Items that have been changed from their default settings are printed with an asterisk (*) next to

them.

●The following items are automatically generated from unique information of the machine by default

and when the settings are initialized, and have an asterisk (*) next to them.

- IPv4 Host Name

- IPv6 Host Name

- mDNS Name (mDNS Settings)

- Current Transmission Speed (Ethernet Driver Settings)

You can print a report to check the history of the e-mail received with the machine, including the subject and

reception date/time.

Settings/Registration

406

You can print a report to check the print count* for each user (department ID) in Department ID Management.

You can also manually specify to only count black-and-white or color printing.

* In this report, the numbers are based on printed sides of the page. For example, the count is 1 if you print on

one side of a page, and the count is 2 if you print on both sides of the page.

●Department ID Management must be set in order to calculate the Page Count List for each

Department ID. Setting the Department ID Management

●With the Remote UI Page Count List, you can check how many pages have been printed by individual

user names linked to a Department ID. To display the list, Starting the Remote UI(P. 265) click

[Settings/Registration] [User Management] [Department ID Management]. However, note that

user names will not be displayed if multiple users are allocated to the same Department ID, or if you

are using DepartmentID Authentication as the login service.

●The Page Count List can also be saved as a CSV le using the Remote UI. Starting the Remote

UI(P. 265) click [Settings/Registration] [User Management] [Department ID Management]

[Store in CSV Format].

You can print a report to check the total number of all printed pages.

The following print history can be checked in a report.

●History of documents printed from a computer

●History of e-mail received and printed

●History of printing setting lists and reports

You can check a list of the settings for the IPSec policies registered in the machine.

You can check a list of the information for the applications installed in the machine and some system

application information.

You can check the results of importing in a report.

Settings/Registration

407

You can check the usage history of toner cartridges in a report.

<PCL>

You can check the PCL settings of the machine, their current values, and available fonts in a list.

<PS>

You can check the PS settings of the machine, their current values, and available fonts in a list.

Settings/Registration

408

Maintenance

Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 410

Regular Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 412

Cleaning the Exterior .................................................................................................................................... 413

Replacing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 414

Replacing the Waste Toner Container ............................................................................................................. 418

Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 421

Replacement Parts ............................................................................................................................................ 423

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ......................................................................................... 426

Adjusting Print Quality ..................................................................................................................................... 427

Adjusting Gradation ..................................................................................................................................... 428

Automatically Adjusting Color Registration and Color Intensity ................................................................... 429

Adjusting the Print Position .......................................................................................................................... 430

Reducing Toner Used When Color Printing ................................................................................................... 433

Paper Type Management Settings ................................................................................................................... 434

Checking the Number of Pages for Print ......................................................................................................... 440

Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 441

Maintenance

409

Maintenance

7KKL-0CX

PMW-MNTC

This section describes the maintenance and management of the machine, such as regular cleaning and the

replacement of consumables. It also describes the maintenance service provided by Canon. For information on

precautions to take during maintenance, see the Important Safety Instructions.

●The minimum holding period for performance parts for repairs and toner cartridges is seven (7) years after

production of the machine model is discontinued.

◼Basic Cleaning

Regular Cleaning(P. 412)

◼Replacing Consumables

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 414) Replacing the Waste Toner Container(P. 418)

Maintenance

410

Replacement Parts(P. 423) Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 426)

◼Other Maintenance and Adjustment

Relocating the Machine(P. 421) Adjusting Print Quality(P. 427)

Printing Reports and Lists(P. 441) Checking the Number of Pages for Print(P. 440)

Maintenance

411

Regular Cleaning

7KKL-0CY

It is recommended that you periodically clean the machine to prevent loss of print quality and enable you to use the

machine comfortably and safely.

Exterior Cleaning the Exterior(P. 413)

Pressure roller for xing <Clean Pressure Roller for Fixing>(P. 382)

Maintenance

412

Cleaning the Exterior

7KKL-0E0

Periodically wipe the surface of the machine to keep it clean.

1Turn the power OFF, and remove the power plug from the power outlet.

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 64)

●Check the operation status of the machine before turning the power OFF. You can turn the power OFF

even if the machine is executing an operation, but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data

to become damaged.

2Wipe the surface of the machine.

●Wet a soft cloth with water or diluted mild detergent, wring the cloth out well, and wipe the machine.

●Wait until the moisture has completely dried before proceeding to the next step.

3Insert the power plug into the power outlet, and turn the power ON.

Turning ON the Machine(P. 63)

Maintenance

413

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

7KKL-0E1

When toner starts running low or has run out, a message is displayed prompting you to prepare a new toner cartridge

or perform toner cartridge replacement. Prepare a new toner cartridge or perform toner cartridge replacement

according to the displayed message.

Cautions When Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 414)

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 415)

Cautions When Replacing the Toner Cartridge

●Do not touch the contacts ( ) inside the machine. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.

●Do not replace toner cartridges until the message prompting you to do so appears.

●Be sure to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.

●To avoid scratching the surface ( ) of the drum inside the machine or exposing it to light. Do not touch the

electrical contacts ( ) or the toner cartridge memory ( ).

Maintenance

414

●For details about each message, see Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 458) .

●For information on the product numbers for toner cartridges, see Consumables(P. 423) .

●You can check the current amount of toner remaining. Checking the Remaining Amount of

Consumables(P. 426)

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge

When replacing toner cartridges, follow the instructions shown in the video along with those written below.

1Open the front cover.

2Pull out the toner cartridge.

3Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the protective case.

Maintenance

415

4Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times as shown below to evenly distribute the

toner inside the cartridge, and then place it on a at surface.

●De not remove the drum protective cover ( ) in this step.

5Remove the drum protective cover.

6Install the toner cartridge.

●Align the toner cartridge with the toner cartridge guide ( ) and push it into the slot until it stops.

●Be careful that the drum portion does not get hit against the mouth of the slot.

●Place the toner cartridge into the slot marked with the appropriate color label ( ).

Maintenance

416

7Close the front cover.

Maintenance

417

Replacing the Waste Toner Container

7KKL-0E2

When the waste toner container is almost full or completely full, a message is displayed prompting you to prepare a

new waste toner container or perform waste toner container replacement. Prepare a new waste toner container or

perform waste toner container replacement according to the displayed message.

Cautions When Replacing the Waste Toner Container(P. 418)

Procedure for Replacing the Waste Toner Container(P. 418)

Cautions When Replacing the Waste Toner Container

●Do not touch the contacts ( ) inside the machine. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.

●Do not replace the waste toner container before the message prompting you to replace it appears on the

display.

●The waste toner container is a container for collecting unused toner that remains when printing.

●For details about each message, see Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 458) .

●For information on the model number of the waste toner container, see Consumables(P. 423) .

●You can check the current amount of space remaining in the waste toner container.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 426)

Procedure for Replacing the Waste Toner Container

When replacing the waste toner container, the procedure is also displayed on the screen. Check the information

displayed on the screen in addition to the following procedure.

Maintenance

418

1Open the front cover.

2Open the left cover.

3Remove the waster toner container together with the left cover.

●Be careful not to tilt the container. Tilting the waster toner container will result in spilling of collected

toner.

4Remove the waste toner container from the protective case.

●Do not disassemble or modify the waste toner container.

5Install the new waste toner container and close the left cover.

Maintenance

419

6Close the front cover.

Maintenance

420

Relocating the Machine

7KKL-0E3

The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedures below to avoid injury when moving the machine. Also, to

conrm the safety precautions before you begin to move, read the Important Safety Instructions included with the

machine.

●If the machine is to be transported for relocation, removals, etc., take the following steps to prevent damage

and faults during transportation:

- Remove the toner cartridges.

- Securely pack the machine in the original packaging (box) and packing materials.

1Turn OFF the machine and computer.

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 64)

2Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the

illustration below.

●Whether the cables with "*" are connected depends on your environment.

Power plug

Power cord

LAN cable*

USB cable*

USB device*

3When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 414)

4Close all the open covers, and move the machine to a new location.

●The machine is heavy ( Hardware Specications(P. 539) ). Do not try hard to carry the machine.

●Use the handles on both sides of the machine, and have at least two people carry it.

Maintenance

421

If the optional paper feeder or the cassette pedestal is attached to the machine.

●Unlock the paper feeder or the cassette pedestal before lifting the machine, and transport the paper

feeder or the cassette pedestal separately.

5Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.

●For information about how to install the machine after relocating it, see Setup Guide. Manuals and Their

Contents(P. 555)

Maintenance

422

Replacement Parts

7KKL-0E4

This section describes the replacement parts (consumables/consumable parts) used by the machine. Follow the

precautions when handling and storing the replacement parts.

Genuine Consumables

Canon continuously develops technology innovations in Canon manufactured Toner,

Cartridge, and Parts, specically designed for use in Canon Multi-Functional machines.

Experience the benets of optimal print performance, print volume and high quality

outputs, achieved through Canon's new advanced technologies. Therefore, the use of

Canon genuine consumables is recommended for your Canon Multi-Functional machines.

Consumables(P. 423)

Consumable Parts(P. 425)

●Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or document type, you may need to replace

consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.

●To maintain print quality, the machine performs automatic calibration in accordance with changes in the

environmental conditions. The machine may also perform automatic calibration when it is turned ON or

recovers from sleep mode. Calibration uses the toner, and accordingly it may result in a decrease of lifetime

of the toner cartridges.

●The color toner cartridges are used even in black and white printing. Therefore, much use of black and white

printing may also result in decrease in the remaining number of printable pages for each color.

●You can check the current amount of replacement parts remaining.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 426)

Consumables

◼Toner Cartridges

Supplied Toner Cartridges

The average yield and the weight of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.

●Black

Average yield:* Approx. 6,000 Sheets

Weight: Approx. 0.9 kg

●Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)

Average yield:* Approx. 3,200 Sheets

Weight: Approx. 0.9 kg

Maintenance

423

Replacement Toner Cartridges

Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield and weight of toner cartridge

Canon Cartridge 064 Black

●Average yield *

6,000 Sheets

●Weight

Approx. 0.9 kg

Canon Cartridge 064 Yellow

Canon Cartridge 064 Magenta

Canon Cartridge 064 Cyan

●Average yield *

5,000 Sheets

●Weight

Approx. 0.9 kg

Canon Cartridge 064 H Black

●Average yield *

13,400 Sheets

●Weight

Approx. 1.0 kg

Canon Cartridge 064 H Yellow

Canon Cartridge 064 H Magenta

Canon Cartridge 064 H Cyan

●Average yield *

10,400 Sheets

●Weight

Approx. 0.9 kg

* The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19798" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner

cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer

components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default

print density setting.

Storing toner cartridges in an improper location or environment may cause problems such as data loss.

●Store toner cartridges in the following conditions:

- Storage temperature range: 0 to 35°C

- Storage humidity range: 35% to 85% RH (relative humidity, condensation-free)*

*Even within the approved storage humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge if

the temperatures inside and outside the toner cartridge differ. Condensation will adversely affect the print quality.

●Store unopened until immediately prior to use.

●Do not store toner cartridges upright or upside down.

●Do not store toner cartridges in the following locations:

- Locations exposed to open ames

- Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for ve minutes or more

- Locations exposed to excessively salty air

- Locations heavily exposed to corrosive gases (e.g. aerosol sprays or ammonia)

- Very hot and/or humid locations

- Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity likely to cause condensation

- Very dusty locations

- Locations within the reach of children

Maintenance

424

●Store the packaging material safely for future use. It will be needed for situations such as storing the

machine with the toner cartridges removed.

●Canon reserves the right to reposition, reshape, add or remove packaging material without notice.

Be careful of counterfeit toners

●Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner may

result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident

or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner.

For more information, see global.canon/ctc.

●For information on the collection of used toner cartridges, see the Notice(P. 511) .

Consumable Parts

◼Waste Toner Container

Make sure to use the dedicated waste toner container for this machine.

●Waste Toner Box WT-B1

The average number of pages that can be printed per waste toner container is 54,000 sheets

(paper size assumed to be A4 or Letter).

●When replacing the waste toner container Replacing the Waste Toner Container(P. 418)

Maintenance

425

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables

7KKL-0K6

Perform the procedures below to check the remaining amount of consumables. In particular, check whether you need

to prepare a new toner cartridge before printing a large quantity of documents.

(Status Monitor) ＜Device Status ＞＜Consumables Information ＞

●You can check the remaining amount of consumables from the Remote UI. Checking the Machine

Status(P. 270)

LINKS

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 414)

Replacing the Waste Toner Container(P. 418)

Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 458)

Maintenance

426

Adjusting Print Quality

7KKL-0E6

Adjust the settings below if printing results are not satisfactory.

◼Gradation Adjustment

If color gradation reproducibility has become so poor that the printed gradation differs markedly from the print

data, make adjustments to improve color gradation reproducibility.

Adjusting Gradation(P. 428)

◼Automatically Adjusting Color Registration and Color Intensity

Automatic adjustment (calibration) is performed in order to prevent color misregistration and ensure that the

original color intensity is correctly reproduced.

Automatically Adjusting Color Registration and Color Intensity(P. 429)

◼Print Position Adjustment

You can adjust the print position when printing is lopsided or protruding from the print range.

Adjusting the Print Position(P. 430)

◼Toner Amount Reduction

You can prevent excessive toner from being xed onto paper to reduce print failure such as poor toner xing or

bleed-through.

Reducing Toner Used When Color Printing(P. 433)

Maintenance

427

Adjusting Gradation

7KKL-0E7

0UUY-0J6 0UW1-0HR 0YRY-0HL 0X7F-0L6 0X7H-0KR 1100-0HU 0X6E-0L6 0X6W-0KR 10XJ-0HU 0X7C-0L6 0X7A-0KR 1106-0HU 0WXY-0L7 0X7E-0KR 10YY-0HU 10H3-0HR 0WR6-0LC 0WR7-0KY 108A-0HS 1116-0HS 10H4-0HR 0WR5-0LC 0WR8-0KY 0YWJ-0JK 0YWH-0KR 0YWR-0JC 0YWK-0KR 0YWE-0L6 0YWF-0KR 0YAS-0HU

If the gradation of the printing result is signicantly different from the original document when you print an image,

you can perform adjustment (calibration) to correct the gradation.

●Frequently performing calibration may affect the life of the toner cartridge.

●Performing calibration when the toner level is low may adversely affect the color balance. If this symptom

occurs, it is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge that is low. Checking the Remaining

Amount of Consumables(P. 426)

●Automatic calibration is performed according to changes in the status and environment of the machine.

1Select <Set> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Full

Calibration>.

2Press .

Maintenance

428

Automatically Adjusting Color Registration and Color

Intensity

7KKL-0EA

The machine performs automatic adjustment (calibration) in order to prevent color misregistration and ensure that

the original color intensity is correctly reproduced. You can set the timing and frequency for performing calibration.

Color misregistration is the phenomenon that occurs when the print position shifts slightly for each color and

results in a blurry print result that is out of focus.

Image with color misregistration Image without color misregistration

Color intensity refers to the intensity of colors such as red, yellow, green, blue, and purple.

Color intensity not reproduced Original Color intensity reproduced

●Frequently performing calibration may affect the life of the toner cartridge.

●Performing calibration when the toner level is low may adversely affect the color balance. If this symptom

occurs, it is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge that is low. Checking the Remaining

Amount of Consumables(P. 426)

●Automatic calibration is performed according to changes in the status and environment of the machine.

1Select <Set> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Settings for

Auto Full Calibration>.

2Set <Timing for Auto Full Calib. at Startup> and <Frequency for Auto Full Calibration>.

Timing for Auto Full Calib. at Startup

Select the timing for automatically performing calibration after the power is turned ON.

Frequency for Auto Full Calibration

Set the frequency for automatically performing calibration. Set this item to <High> if color misregistration

often occurs.

Maintenance

429

Adjusting the Print Position

7KKL-0K7

You can adjust the print position when printing is lopsided or protruding from the print range. The print position can

be adjusted for each paper source.

●Ensure that the following are set correctly before performing print position adjustment.

- Setting the paper source to adjust ( Custom Settings(P. 335) <Paper Feed> <Default Paper Feed

Source>)

- Setting the print mode (1-Sided/2-Sided) to adjust ( Custom Settings(P. 335) <2-Sided Printing>)

-Setting the paper type to feed Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 93)

●When performing print position adjustment, set the correct paper type for the paper source, rather than

selecting <Free>.

Step 1: Printing the Current Print Position(P. 430)

Step 2: Conrming the Direction and Distance for Adjustment(P. 430)

Step 3: Adjusting the Print Position for Each Paper Source(P. 431)

Step 1: Printing the Current Print Position

You can print a sample print to conrm the direction and distance for adjustment.

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Adjust Print

Position>.

3Select <Print Sample> <Yes>, and press .

➠A sample print is output.

Step 2: Conrming the Direction and Distance for Adjustment

Marks for conrming the print position are printed on the sample print. The position of these marks determines the

direction and distance for adjustment. Normally, all marks are printed on the edge of the paper.

Viewing the Sample Print

The lead edge of the output paper is the top edge of the sample print. Remember which edge is the top edge

when picking up the paper.

Maintenance

430

●The size of the marks for conrming the print

position is indicated below.

When the Print Position Is Lopsided

Print position adjustment is required when the marks for conrming the print position are lopsided. The

direction of the print position can be specied using a positive value (+) or negative value (-), and the distance

can be specied in millimeters. To perform vertical adjustment, set a negative value (-) to move the print

position up or a positive value (+) to move the print position down. To perform horizontal adjustment, set a

negative value (-) to move the print position left or a positive value (+) to move the print position right.

Vertical direction

Horizontal direction

In the following example, because it is necessary to shift the print position 3.5 mm up and 1.5 mm to the right,

specify -3.5 mm in the vertical direction and +1.5 mm in the horizontal direction.

Step 3: Adjusting the Print Position for Each Paper Source

Adjust the print position after conrming the direction and distance for adjustment. The print position can be adjusted

in the range -3.5 mm to +3.5 mm in both the horizontal and vertical directions, in 0.1 mm increments.

1Select <Set> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

Maintenance

431

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Adjust Print

Position>.

3Select the paper source to adjust or <Common> to adjust all paper sources.

Print position adjustment in the vertical direction for 2-sided printing

●The print position for the rst page (front side) of two-sided printing can be adjusted with <Common>. The

print position for the second page (back side) can be adjusted with the setting for each paper source.

Example of print position adjustment

First page (front side) Setting value for <Common> <Adj. Vertically (1st Side for 2-Sided)>

Second page (back side) Setting value for each paper source <Adj. Vertically (1-Sd/2nd Sd for 2-Sd)>

4Select the direction to adjust and the combination of one-sided/two-sided printing,

and press .

5Set the adjustment value, and press .

●Enter the value based on the print result of the sample print using / .

●For <Adj. Vertically (1st Side for 2-Sided)>, the print position of all paper sources is adjusted with the entered

value.

●Repeat steps 3 to 5 to adjust the other positions and paper sources.

6Output a sample print, and check whether adjustment has been performed

correctly. Step 1: Printing the Current Print Position(P. 430)

Maintenance

432

Reducing Toner Used When Color Printing

7KKL-0EF

Fixing of excessive toner onto paper may cause color print failures such as generation of afterimages of highly dense

characters or lines. Reducing the amount of toner to be xed may improve this failure.

●This function may improve the following failures.

- Toner scattering around deep color areas of printed images

- Poor toner xing in a low-temperature environment

- Darkening of images printed on transparencies at the time of projection

●Use of this function may give an adverse effect on color printing quality.

1Select <Set> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Adjust Toner

Volume Used for Color Print>.

2Select the toner volume setting and press .

●<Off> prints with the standard toner volume.

●<Level 1> prints deep color areas with a bit smaller toner volume than the standard volume.

●<Level 2> generally prints with a reduced toner volume.

Maintenance

433

Paper Type Management Settings

7KKL-0EH

You can register and edit detailed information of frequently used paper types as the [Custom Type].

To register a new paper type, rst duplicate the paper type that resembles the new type in order to copy all of the

internal operational parameters. This procedure copies the suitable settings to the new paper type from the registered

custom paper easily.

You can also improve printing quality and paper feeding trouble by editing the custom paper, depending on the

characteristics.

●It is necessary to log in as an administrator to register custom paper types or change the settings of

registered custom paper types. Logging into the Machine(P. 92)

●When you register the custom paper type, you cannot specify the paper source. For more information on

registering the paper source, see Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 94) .

●You can import/export the registered custom paper type information, and share it with another Canon

machine. Importing/Exporting All Settings(P. 278)

Registering frequently used paper types(P. 434)

Items that can be specied(P. 436)

Registering frequently used paper types

1Start the Remote UI. Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 266)

3Click [Paper Settings] [Paper Type Management Settings].

4Select the paper type to edit.

Maintenance

434

[Duplicate]

Duplicates the paper type selected in [Select] as a custom paper type.

[Delete]

Deletes the paper type selected in [Select].

●Only paper types with [Custom Type] displayed for [Category] can be deleted.

Paper type drop-down list

Enables you to select the paper type to display.

Sort List By

Enables you to change the display order of the list.

[Display]

Switches the list display to the items selected in and .

[Name]

Displays [Paper Details] when you click the paper type displayed in [Name]. If you select a custom paper

type, you can edit it.

[Select]

Select a paper type to duplicate or delete.

5Select [Edit] and congure the various settings.

Maintenance

435

[Edit]

Appears on the [Paper Details] screen for the custom paper type and enables you to change the settings

for the selected item.

●Only paper types with [Custom Type] displayed for [Category] can be edited.

6Click [OK] .

Items that can be specied

The following items can be specied.

◼[Name]

You can change the name of the custom paper type.

●When you register the settings for the custom paper type, make sure to change its name. You cannot

change the settings of the default paper types registered in the machine.

◼[Basis Weight]

You can change the basis weight of the custom paper type.

●If you enter a value that is different from the actual weight of the set paper, paper jams may occur, and the

quality of the image may be adversely affected.

Maintenance

436

◼[Finish]

You can change the Finish setting of Custom Type you have registered.

●If you select a nishing type which is different from that of the loaded paper, paper jams may occur, and the

quality of the image may be adversely affected.

◼[Type]

You can change the Type setting of Custom Type you have registered.

●If you select a paper type which is different from that of the loaded paper, paper jams may occur, and the

quality of the image may be adversely affected.

◼[Color]

You can change the color of the custom paper type.

●If you select a color which is different from that of the loaded paper, paper jams may occur, and the quality

of the image may be adversely affected.

◼[Use as Template Paper]

You can select [Use as Template Paper] to use preprinted paper (paper which has logos already printed on it), such as

a letterhead.

●Methods for loading paper if [Use as Template Paper] is selected:

- Paper source other than the multi-purpose tray: the side with a logo facing down

- Multi-purpose tray: the side with a logo facing up

◼[Humid Environment Mode]

Print problems may occur due to humidity in the environment of the machine. This setting may improve this problem.

●Set this in the following cases. The print results may be improved.

- [High Humidity]: Set this if the print density is light or irregular when using the machine in a high humidity

environment.

Maintenance

437

- [Low Humidity 1]: Set this if images and text are blurred when using the machine in a low humidity

environment.

- [Low Humidity 2]: Set this if images show toner scattering or shaded parts of the image have white

patches (areas left white) when using the machine in a low humidity environment.

●Set [Standard] to not use either setting.

◼[Output Paper Sticking Prevention Mode for 2-Sided Print]

Paper may get stuck together when performing two-sided printing, depending on the image density of the print data.

This setting may improve this problem.

●[Mode 2] is better at preventing pages from being stuck together than [Mode 1], but the print speed

becomes slower when performing two-sided printing.

◼[Reduce Image Defects Caused by Paper Dust]

Using paper with a large amount of paper dust may cause images to be printed faintly or with streaks. This setting

may improve this problem.

●When selected, the print speed may be slower.

◼[Adjust Paper Conveyance in Multi-Purpose Tray]

Corrects paper feeding problems that occur due to a low paper feeding speed when feeding from the multi-purpose

tray.

●When selected, the print speed may be slower.

◼[Reduce Thin Paper Waviness]

This setting may improve wrinkling or curling when printing on thin paper.

●When selected, printing may be faint.

◼[Reduce Thin/Plain Paper Wrinkles]

Wrinkling may occur when printing on Thin, Plain 1, Plain 2, or Plain 3. This setting may improve this problem.

Maintenance

438

●When selected, the print speed may be slower.

◼[Reduce Envelope Wrinkles]

Wrinkling may occur when printing on envelopes. This setting may improve this problem.

●When selected, printing may be faint.

Maintenance

439

Checking the Number of Pages for Print

7KKL-0K8

You can check separate totals for the number of pages used for color printouts and black and white printouts. The

number of printouts includes printouts of the memory media print and the list as well as printouts of data from

computers.

1Select <Check Counter> on the <Home> screen. <Home> Screen(P. 83)

2Select <Counter Information>.

3Check the total number of printed pages.

<113: Total (Black & White/Small)>

Displays the total number of black-and-white pages printed.

<123: Total (Full Clr + Single Clr/Small)>

Displays the total number of color pages printed.

<301: Print (Total 1)>

Displays the total number of pages printed.

●Press <Monitoring Service> <Communication Test> to check communication with the remote monitoring

server. When this function is executed, information on the machine is periodically sent to the remote

monitoring server. It is necessary to enable communication between the machine and the server providing

the service in order to use this function.

●You can print a list that shows the number of pages used for printing.

Output Report(P. 357) <Counter Report>

●For information on the count conditions, contact your dealer or service representative.

Maintenance

440

Printing Reports and Lists

7KKL-0K9

You can print reports and lists of several types of information, such as consumable status, print history, and settings.

For more information on the reports and lists, see <Output Report>(P. 406) .

Maintenance

441

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 443

If the Machine Does Not Operate ..................................................................................................................... 444

Cannot Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 446

Problems with Printing Results ........................................................................................................................ 447

Problems with the Network ............................................................................................................................. 450

Problems with Security ..................................................................................................................................... 454

Other Problems ................................................................................................................................................. 455

A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed ........................................................ 456

A Message Saying to Contact Your Dealer or Service Representative Is Displayed ....................................... 457

Countermeasures for Each Message ............................................................................................................ 458

Countermeasures for Each Error Code ......................................................................................................... 482

Clearing Paper Jams .......................................................................................................................................... 490

Paper Jams inside the Machine or in the Fixing Unit ..................................................................................... 492

Paper Jams in a Paper Source ....................................................................................................................... 496

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved .................................................................................................................. 501

Troubleshooting

442

Troubleshooting

7KKL-0EL

PMW-TROB

If a problem occurs while you are using the machine, check the following items rst. If the problem cannot be solved

or an inspection is required, contact your dealer or service representative.

◼What kind of problem do you have?

If the Machine Does Not Operate(P. 444) Cannot Print(P. 446)

Problems with Printing Results(P. 447) Problems with the Network(P. 450)

A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is

Displayed(P. 456)

Problems with Security(P. 454)

Other Problems(P. 455) Clearing Paper Jams(P. 490)

Troubleshooting

443

If the Machine Does Not Operate

7KKL-0ER

If a problem occurs while you are using the machine, check the following before contacting your dealer or service

representative.

Check This First(P. 444)

If the machine does not respond to computer operations(P. 444)

When the authentication screen (login screen) is displayed(P. 445)

Check This First

Is a message displayed on the screen?

●A message is displayed on the screen when an error or a problem occurs while operating the machine.

A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed(P. 456)

Is (Energy Saver) lit?

●If it is lit, press (Energy Saver) to cancel the Sleep mode.

Is the machine connected to a computer correctly?

●Check the network connection of the machine and the computer.

Setting up the Network Environment(P. 8)

If the machine does not respond to computer operations

Restart the machine.

●If the machine does not respond even though its power is turned ON, turn the power OFF ( Turning OFF

the Machine(P. 64) ). Conrm that the power cord is connected correctly, wait 10 or more seconds after

the main power is turned OFF, and then turn the power back ON ( Turning ON the Machine(P. 63) ).

Check whether the driver is installed correctly.

●For information on installing the driver, see Installing Drivers(P. 44) .

Check whether the IP address of the machine is correct.

●Check the IP address settings, and change them if they are incorrect. For information on the settings, see

Setting up Using the Setup Guide(P. 6) .

Troubleshooting

444

When the authentication screen (login screen) is displayed

●When the authentication screen (login screen) is displayed, you must log in as a registered user to

continue operating the machine.

Logging into the Machine(P. 92)

Troubleshooting

445

Cannot Print

7KKL-0ES

Check This First

Is the Processing/Data indicator (on the control panel) ashing or lit?

●If it is ashing or lit, there is a document that is being processed or waiting to be processed. Wait for the

processing to nish or select the document that you want to prioritize from the screen for checking the

printing status.

Checking the Printing Status and History(P. 116)

Printing Documents Held in the Machine(P. 118)

Is a message displayed on the screen?

●A message is displayed on the screen when an error or a problem occurs while operating the machine.

A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed(P. 456)

Is <Auto Select> set to <No>?

●To switch to the appropriate operation mode, change all items or the items you are using to <Yes>. For

more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via the online manual site.

Is forced hold printing enabled?

●If it is enabled, documents may not be printed, depending on their settings.

Conguring the Forced Hold Printing Settings(P. 257)

Are you printing via a print server using the LPR command?

●When continuously printing PDF data using the LPR command, execute one job at a time at the interval set

in <Timeout>. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via the online manual site.

Troubleshooting

446

Problems with Printing Results

7KKL-0EU

The printed image is displaced or skewed.(P. 447)

Images are uneven or faint.(P. 447)

Images are not printed on the intended side of the paper.(P. 447)

Images are not printed in the intended size.(P. 447)

The orientation does not match on both sides of the paper when using two-sided printing.(P. 448)

The printed image is displaced or skewed.

Are the paper guides misaligned?

●Match the paper guides with the paper loaded in the paper source.

Images are uneven or faint.

Is the paper damp?

●Replace the paper with paper that is not damp.

Are the gradation and density set appropriately?

●Perform gradation adjustment.

Adjusting Gradation(P. 428)

Images are not printed on the intended side of the paper.

Is the orientation of the loaded paper correct?

●Check the orientation and side of the paper that is facing up. Load the paper again if it is incorrectly

orientated.

Loading Paper(P. 65)

Images are not printed in the intended size.

Do the original size and size of the paper that is loaded match?

●Replace the paper that is loaded with paper of the size you want to print on.

●Match [Output Size] in the printer driver with the size of paper to print on.

Troubleshooting

447

The orientation does not match on both sides of the paper when using two-

sided printing.

Are the settings for two-sided printing correct?

●Follow the procedure below to check the print settings.

1Select the orientation of the original on the print settings screen of the application.

2On the [Basic Settings] screen of the driver, set [Orientation] to the same orientation you set in

step 1.

3While checking the print preview, set [Page Layout] [Page Order] [1-sided/2-sided/Booklet

Printing] [Binding Location].

Troubleshooting

448

●[Page Order] is displayed when [Page Layout] is set to [2 on 1] or higher.

Troubleshooting

449

Problems with the Network

7KKL-0EY

Problems with Connections(P. 450)

Problems with Wireless Connections(P. 451)

Problems with Connections

Cannot set up the network.

●Check whether <Conrm Network Connection> is set to <On>.

<Conrm Network Connection>(P. 365)

An unintended destination is dialed up.

●If a dial-up router is on the network to which the machine is connected, the machine connects to a

destination other than the intended destination, depending on the settings of the machine or dial-up

router. This may result in subscriber line charges and call charges. Check the following.

●If the dial-up router does not have to send packets via broadcast, change the router settings to ensure

that it sends packets via a method other than broadcast. If it is necessary to allow broadcasting with the

dial-up router, check whether an unnecessary destination is set.

●Check whether the host name and IP address of the le server and mail server, etc. set in the machine are

correct.

●If the DNS server is on an external server, use the IP address instead of the host name for the destination,

even when connecting to devices on the same network as the machine.

●If the DNS server is on the network that the machine is connected to, check whether the information for

devices connected to an external network is registered on the DNS server, and whether it is correct.

Cannot recognize the machine from a computer.

●If the IP address of the computer where the Remote UI and utility software are executed is not allowed for

sending and receiving in <Firewall Settings>, the information for the machine cannot be displayed on the

computer. Check whether the settings are correct.

Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

●When using device management software, set [Use Dedicated Community] to [On] and select [Read/Write]

for [MIB Access Permission]. Also set [Dedicated Port Settings] to [On].

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 34)

●The machine cannot be recognized when utility software is used to access the machine with a community

name other than the SNMP community name set in the machine. Check the SNMP community name.

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 34)

●If the message "An error has occurred." is displayed in the Web browser and the Remote UI cannot be

started, invalid cache data may remain. Clear the cache of the Web browser.

●If the machine enters the Sleep mode, it may not be able to be recognized from a computer. Cancel the

Sleep mode or change <Sleep Mode Energy Use> to <High>.

<Sleep Mode Energy Use>(P. 363)

Troubleshooting

450

Problems with Wireless Connections

Cannot connect wireless LAN and wired LAN at the same time.

●You cannot connect wireless LAN and wired LAN at the same time. USB and wireless LAN or USB and wired

LAN can be used at the same time.

The Remote UI is not displayed.

●Are <Use HTTP> and <Remote UI Settings> set to <On>?

<Use HTTP>(P. 368)

Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

●If you are connected with wireless LAN, restart the Remote UI after checking whether the IP address is set

correctly.

Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv4 Address(P. 24)

Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv6 Address(P. 26)

●If you are connected with wired LAN, restart the Remote UI after checking whether the IP address is set

correctly and the cable is connected correctly.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 12)

Starting the Remote UI(P. 265)

●Are you using a proxy server? If so, add the IP address of the machine in "Exceptions" (addresses to not

use a proxy for) in the proxy server settings of the Web browser.

●Is communication with computers restricted in the rewall? If the Remote UI cannot be displayed because

the settings are incorrect, set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to

<Off> from the control panel of the machine.

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 214)

Cannot connect to the network.

●The IP address may have failed to be set. Set the IP address again.

Setting an IP Address(P. 22)

●If you are connected with wireless LAN, check whether the machine can connect to the network.

If you cannot connect to a wireless LAN(P. 452)

If you do not know the IP address that was set.

●Press the (Status Monitor) key and check the IP address.

Control Panel(P. 60)

●If you want to know the details of the settings or change the settings, select <Set> on the <Home> screen

and congure the settings.

Setting an IP Address(P. 22)

Troubleshooting

451

Cannot change from wired LAN to wireless LAN or wireless LAN to wired LAN.

●Did you also switch the LAN setting from the control panel of the machine? You cannot change the

connection method of the machine unless you do so.

Selecting the Network Connection Method(P. 10)

If you do not know the SSID and network key of the wireless LAN router to

connect to or the SSID is not displayed on the screen.

●Check whether the SSID is displayed on the wireless LAN router or its box.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 21)

The SSID of the wireless LAN router to connect to is not displayed in the list of

access points.

●Check whether the SSID of the wireless LAN router that you made a note of is correct.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 21)

●If the SSID of the wireless LAN router is not disclosed (if it is using the stealth function*), set the wireless

LAN router to disclose the SSID.

* This function prevents the SSID of a wireless LAN router from being automatically detected.

●Check whether the machine is connected to the network.

If you cannot connect to a wireless LAN(P. 452)

If you cannot connect to a wireless LAN

Check the status of the computer.

●Is setup of the computer and wireless LAN router complete?

●Are any of cables of the wireless LAN router (power cable, LAN cable, etc.)

disconnected?

●Is the wireless LAN router turned ON?

If the problem is still not resolved:

●Turn all the devices off, and then on again.

●After waiting a while, check whether you can connect to the network.

Check whether the machine is turned ON.

If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF, and then ON again.

Check the installation location of the machine and wireless LAN router.

●Are the machine and wireless LAN router too far away from each other?

●Is there an obstacle such as a wall between the machine and wireless LAN

router?

●Are there any devices that emit electromagnetic waves nearby, such as a

microwave or digital cordless telephone?

Troubleshooting

452

: Within 50 m

Specify the following settings again.

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 16)

Setting Up the Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 17)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 18)

Setting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 19)

If settings require manual entry

●If the wireless LAN router is set as follows, perform manual entry ( Setting Up a Connection by

Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 19) ):

- ANY rejection* is enabled.

- An automatically generated WEP key (hexadecimal) is set.

- The stealth function is enabled.

* A wireless LAN router function for refusing connections if the device trying to connect has "ANY" or "blank" set for the SSID.

If it is necessary to change the settings on the wireless LAN router side

●If the wireless LAN router is set as follows, change the settings on the router side:

- MAC address ltering is set.

- WEP is selected or WPA/WPA2 encryption is set for the TKIP when communicating only with IEEE 802.11n.

Troubleshooting

453

Problems with Security

7KKL-0F0

The settings in <Set> are not restored even though the check box is deselected in the security policy settings.

(P. 454)

Cannot import security policy settings.(P. 454)

A security administrator password entry screen is displayed even though no password is set.(P. 454)

The settings in <Set> are not restored even though the check box is

deselected in the security policy settings.

●Items changed with security policy settings applied are not restored simply by deselecting the check box.

Deselect the check box, and change the corresponding settings from [Settings/Registration] in the Remote

UI.

Cannot import security policy settings.

●Have you set a different security policy password from the source device? Remove the password in the

destination device or set the same password as the source device.

Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy Settings(P. 165)

A security administrator password entry screen is displayed even though no

password is set.

●If you import security policy settings, the same password is set for the destination device if a security

policy password is set in the source device. Check the password of the source device.

Troubleshooting

454

Other Problems

7KKL-0F1

Cannot press a button, select an item, or an item is not displayed.(P. 455)

Some settings imported from another device are not reected.(P. 455)

Log les are garbled.(P. 455)

Log events are not recorded even though log collection was started.(P. 455)

The setting for K-size paper is not displayed.(P. 455)

Cannot press a button, select an item, or an item is not displayed.

●Some settings can only be used by the administrator. They cannot be used by general users.

Settings/Registration(P. 298)

●The system administrator limits the functions that general users can use to prevent unauthorized use, and

restricts the use of functions.

●The functions that can be used with User Authentication are managed by the administrator. These

functions can be used by logging in using an ID with access privileges.

Logging into the Machine(P. 92)

●Functions cannot be used because the optional equipment or system options that they require are not

installed.

●The settings are managed with security policy settings. To change the settings, it is necessary to log in to

the Remote UI with administrator privileges.

Conguring the Security Policy Settings(P. 167)

Some settings imported from another device are not reected.

●If a security policy is set, settings that violate the security policy cannot be imported.

Log les are garbled.

●When opening CSV les with Microsoft Excel, the content may not be recognized as text strings and may

become garbled as a result. If this happens, open the les with a CSV le editor or text editor.

Log events are not recorded even though log collection was started.

●Results may not be reected in a log le if it is retrieved immediately after log collection is started. Since it

takes some time to collect logs, retrieve the log le again after waiting a while.

The setting for K-size paper is not displayed.

●You can use K-size paper by changing the machine settings. For more information, contact your dealer or

service representative.

Troubleshooting

455

A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error

Code) Is Displayed

7KKL-0F2

0UUY-0KJ 0UW1-0JS 0YRY-0JR 0X7F-0RH 0X7H-0LR 1100-0JW 0X6E-0RH 0X6W-0LR 10XJ-0JW 0X7C-0RH 0X7A-0LR 1106-0JW 0WXY-0RJ 0X7E-0LR 10YY-0JW 10H3-0JS 0WR6-0RS 0WR7-0LY 108A-0JU 1116-0JU 10H4-0JS 0WR5-0RS 0WR8-0LY 0YWJ-0KK 0YWH-0LL 0YWR-0KC 0YWK-0LL 0YWE-0RH 0YWF-0LL 0YAS-0S4

If a message is displayed on the screen of the machine or the Remote UI, or a number starting with "#" (an error code)

is displayed on the details screen for job log or a communication management report, refer to the following to check

the remedy.

A Message Saying to Contact Your Dealer or Service Representative Is Displayed(P. 457)

Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 458)

Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 482)

Troubleshooting

456

A Message Saying to Contact Your Dealer or Service

Representative Is Displayed

7KKL-0F3

If the machine cannot operate normally due to a problem, a message is displayed on the screen. Check the reference

according to the displayed message.

When a message saying to contact your dealer or service representative is displayed(P. 457)

When a message saying to contact your dealer or service representative is

displayed

1Restart the machine.

●Press the power switch to turn the power OFF ( Turning OFF the Machine(P. 64) ), wait for longer than 10

seconds, and then turn the power ON again ( Turning ON the Machine(P. 63) ).

●Note that data waiting to be processed is erased when you turn the power OFF.

2If the message is still displayed, prepare the following information.

●Product name

●Your dealer or service representative where you purchased the machine

●The problem (the specic operation you performed and the result and symptom, etc.)

●Code displayed on the screen

3Turn the power of the machine OFF, pull out the power plug, and contact your dealer

or service representative.

●Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.

●Always grasp the power plug when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may expose

or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could

cause current to leak, resulting in a re or electrical shock.

Troubleshooting

457

Countermeasures for Each Message

7KKL-0F4

If an error occurs during printing, or if a problem occurs with the network connection or settings, a message appears

on the machine display or the Remote UI screen. For details about each message and solutions to the problems, refer

to the messages below. Also, if a six-digit number is displayed when you are logging in, see If a six-digit number is

displayed when you are logging in(P. 476) .

23 MEMORY FULL

There is insucient memory to register overlay forms and external characters, etc.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), initialize the printer to increase the free memory, and

then try printing again. However, note that initializing the printer will erase all the print data in the

memory of the machine. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via the online

manual site.

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, the data that could not be registered due to a lack of

memory will not be printed.

27 JOB REJECT

The specied emulation does not exist.

●Specify emulation that the machine supports. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II

Printer) via the online manual site.

●Select <Skip Error> to skip the printing that an error occurred for. You can perform the following printing.

33 WORK FULL

Could not print because the dedicated work memory was insucient.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), initialize the printer to increase the free memory, and

then try printing again. However, note that initializing the printer will erase all the data in the memory of

the machine. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via the online manual site.

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, the data for which an error was displayed will not be

printed correctly. Also note that registered data such as overlay forms and macros may be deleted.

52 IMAGEMODE REJECT

Data that cannot be processed was sent while printing an image.

●Select <Skip Error> to skip the printing that an error occurred for. However, the data for which an error

was displayed will not be printed.

●Perform printing again using a printer driver that supports the data format of the image.

Could not verify the CRL.

Could not conrm the CA certicate of the certicate authority that issued the certicate revocation list

(CRL).

●Register the CA certicate of the certicate authority that issued the certicate revocation list (CRL).

Registering a CA Certicate(P. 235)

Troubleshooting

458

D1 Replot Buffer Full

Could not redraw because data could not be registered to the replot buffer.

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, the data that caused the error will not be printed

correctly. For information on the replot buffer, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer).

D1 Div. Print. Bffr Full

Could not perform divided printing because data could not be registered to the buffer for divided

printing.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), set <Divide Mode> to <No> and <Enlarge/Reduce> to

<Auto> in the HP-GL setup menu, specify the output paper size, and perform printing again. However, the

data will be enlarged/reduced when printed. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II

Printer).

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, the data that could not be registered will not be

printed correctly. For information on divided printing, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer).

D1 Polygon Buffer Full

Could not draw because data could not be registered to the polygon buffer.

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, the data that could not be registered will not be

printed correctly. For information on the polygon buffer, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer).

D0-nn error (nn is two alphanumeric characters)

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. Press the power switch to turn the power OFF ( Turning OFF the Machine(P. 64) ),

wait for longer than 10 seconds, and then turn the power ON again ( Turning ON the Machine(P. 63) ).

If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the message and contact your

dealer or service representative.

FF FONT FULL

Could not register font information in the font table because there were too many fonts to register.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), initialize the printer to increase the free memory, and

then try printing again. However, note that initializing the printer will erase all the data in the memory of

the machine. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via the online manual site.

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, the data that could not be registered will not be

printed correctly.

FM DL SIZE ERROR n (n is a single alphanumeric character)

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

FM DL SCALE ERROR n (n is a single alphanumeric character)

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

Troubleshooting

459

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

FM DL FONT MEMORY FULL

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

FM FILE ACCESS ERROR

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

FM SC WORK MEM. ERROR n (n is a single alphanumeric character)

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

FM ALIGNMENT ERROR

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

FM FONT PARSE ERROR

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

FM FONT MEMORY FULL

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

FM WORK MEMORY ERROR

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Set the correct authentication

information.

The client authentication information is not set correctly.

Troubleshooting

460

●Check whether the authentication method and authentication information (key and certicate, user name

and password, and CA certicate) are set correctly.

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. No reply from the destination.

An error occurred while communicating with the authenticator.

●Check whether the authenticator (LAN switch) and RADIUS server are set correctly.

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Cannot analyze the certicate.

Failed to analyze the server certicate sent from the RADIUS server.

●Check the content of the server certicate of the RADIUS server.

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The certicate is incorrect.

An error occurred when using the server certicate sent from the RADIUS server as a CA certicate for

validation.

●Check the content of the server certicate of the RADIUS server and the CA certicate registered in the

machine.

Registering a CA Certicate(P. 235)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The certicate has expired.

The server certicate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.

●Check the expiration date of the server certicate of the RADIUS server.

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Change the authentication password.

The password has expired.

●Set a new password.

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Check the authentication settings.

The authentication method set in the machine and the authentication method set in the RADIUS server

do not match.

●Check the authentication method set in the machine and the RADIUS server, and set the correct

authentication method.

Cannot delete the default key because it is in use by TLS or other settings. Check the

settings.

The key and certicate you are trying to delete is being used in TLS encrypted communications.

●Set all TLS settings to <Off> to stop TLS encrypted communication.

TCP/IP error. Check the TCP/IP settings.

Could not automatically retrieve the address with DHCP and Auto IP.

●If the address cannot be automatically retrieved with DHCP and Auto IP, <IP Address> in <IPv4 Settings> is

set to 0.0.0.0. Set the correct IPv4 address. In addition, if you selected <Wired LAN + Wireless LAN> in

<Select Interface>, correctly congure the IPv4 address of the wireless LAN (sub line).

Troubleshooting

461

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

<IP Address Settings>(P. 365) (<Sub Line Settings>)

0.0.0.0 is set as a xed IPv4 address in <IP Address> in <IPv4 Settings>.

●Set the correct IPv4 address.

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

<IP Address Settings>(P. 365) (<Sub Line Settings>)

The IPv6 address is not set correctly.

Check the following. It may take several minutes until the stateless address is decided.

●Check whether <Use IPv6> is set to <On> in <IPv6 Settings>.

●When using a stateless address or DHCPv6, check whether each address has been retrieved.

●If the address has not been retrieved, check the settings of the router and the DHCPv6 server.

Setting an IPv6 Address(P. 25)

The address of the DNS server is not set correctly.

●Check whether the address of the DNS server is set correctly in <IPv4> or <IPv6>.

Making DNS Settings(P. 31)

Could not send to the TCP/IP protocol stack.

●Check whether the IPv4 address or IPv6 address is set correctly in <IPv4 Settings> or <IPv6 Settings>.

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

Setting an IPv6 Address(P. 25)

Check the TCP/IP settings.

The TCP/IP of the machine is not operating.

●Check the IP address, DHCP, and Auto IP settings in <TCP/IP Settings>.

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

●If you selected <Wired LAN + Wireless LAN> in <Select Interface>, check the settings for the IP address and

DHCP in <Sub Line Settings>.

<IP Address Settings>(P. 365) (<Sub Line Settings>)

Check the TCP/IP settings. (Main Line)

The IP address of the main line is set to "0.0.0.0".

●Set a different IP address.

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

Check the TCP/IP settings. (Sub Line)

The IP address of the sub line is set to "0.0.0.0".

●Set a different IP address.

Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line(P. 27)

Universal Print: Srvr. communication error

The machine is not connected to the network correctly.

●Check the machine and network settings, and try connecting again. Could not communicate because a

server error occurred.

Troubleshooting

462

●Check whether the server is operating normally. Communication with the server is blocked due to rewall

settings.

●Congure the rewall settings to allow communication.

Universal Print: Srvr. authentication error

An error has occurred during server authentication.

●Restart the machine. If the message still appears after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

Universal Print: Certicate expired.

The expiration date of the certicate has expired.

●Delete this machine from Azure Active Directory and the computer, re-register the machine, and then

update the certicate.

Universal Print: Internal error

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message still appears after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

Universal Print: Printer not registered

This machine was deleted from Azure Active Directory and could not be communicated with.

●Re-register this machine in Azure Active Directory.

Chk. wired LAN adapter connected to USB port.

Multiple USB-LAN adapters are connected, or the USB-LAN adapter is not connected/recognized.

●Check the connection of the USB-LAN adapter.

Connecting to a Wired LAN for the Sub Line(P. 12)

●If you reconnected the USB-LAN adapter, restart the machine.

Front Side(P. 52)

XPS Print Range Error

There are no pages that can be processed in the specied range for printing.

●Specify a correct page range.

XPS Image Data Error

Failed to extend the image data.

●Replace the image data in the XPS le and try printing again.

XPS Spool Memory Full

There is insucient memory to process the XPS data.

Troubleshooting

463

●Restart the machine and try printing again. If you still cannot print, divide the pages into multiple les and

print them separately.

XPS Data Error

An invalid command is specied due to corrupt data, etc. and processing cannot continue.

●Perform printing again using XPS data in a format supported by the machine.

XPS Unsupport Image Err

An unsupported data format is included.

●Convert the data to the TIFF or JPEG format and try printing again.

XPS Font Error

Failed to analyze the font data.

●Replace the font data in the XPS le and try printing again.

XPS Page Data Error

Cannot generate pages because the descriptions are incorrect.

●Perform printing again using XPS data in a format supported by the machine.

XPS Memory Full

There is insucient memory to process the XPS data.

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, pages that include the data that caused the error may

not be printed correctly.

Cannot nd the access point.

The access point could not be found.

●Check the wireless LAN settings.

Check the settings and information of the wireless LAN(P. 14)

Could not delete authentication information because an error occurred.

The authentication information could not be deleted because an unknown error occurred.

●Contact your dealer or service representative.

Could not set authentication information because an error occurred.

The authentication information could not be set because an unspecied error occurred.

●Contact your dealer or service representative.

An error occurred. Contact the system manager.

The selected user has already been deleted.

●Log in as the Administrator and register the button again.

Troubleshooting

464

An unexpected system error occurred.

●Check the operations and log in again. If you still cannot log in, consult your system administrator.

Prepare a new waste toner container. (Replacement not yet needed.)

The waste toner container is almost full.

●You can continue printing for a while, but you should have a new one available so that you can make

replacement as soon as it is needed. If you decide to replace the waste toner container at the time when

this message is displayed, press the icon at the bottom right of the screen to display a motion video to

give the instructions for waste toner container replacement. Follow these instructions to replace the waste

toner container.

Procedure for Replacing the Waste Toner Container(P. 418)

Replace the waste toner container.

The waste toner container is full, so printing is not possible any longer.

●Follow the instructions on the screen to replace the waste toner container.

Procedure for Replacing the Waste Toner Container(P. 418)

An error occurred during verication.

The certicate is invalid.

●Register the correct certicate and specify the settings again.

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

Registering a Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 234)

This CRL is invalid.

The certicate revocation list (CRL) may be corrupt, or a signing algorithm not supported by the machine

may be used.

●Register the correct certicate revocation list (CRL).

Registering a Certicate Revocation List (CRL)(P. 237)

This CRL has expired.

The start date for the certicate revocation list (CRL) may be set to a date in the future.

●Check the start date of the certicate registered in the machine. If the start date is set to a date in the

future, use the certicate on a day after that date.

Registering a Certicate Revocation List (CRL)(P. 237)

The date and time set on the machine may be incorrect.

●Check the date and time setting of the machine.

Setting the Date/Time(P. 7)

Cannot register because the algorithm of this key is not supported.

You tried to register the key and certicate le of an unsupported encryption algorithm.

●Register the key and certicate le of a supported encryption algorithm.

Registering a Key and Certicate(P. 234)

Troubleshooting

465

System Specications(P. 527)

Cannot set this key as the default key because it is corrupted or invalid.

The key specied for the machine cannot be set because it is corrupted.

●Register the key again.

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 229)

Registering a Key and Certicate(P. 234)

This certicate has been revoked.

The certicate is included in the certicate revocation list (CRL).

●Register a new certicate.

Registering a Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 234)

This certicate is invalid.

The certicate is invalid.

●Register the correct certicate and specify the settings again.

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

Registering a Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 234)

This certicate has expired.

The certicate may have expired.

●Check the expiration date of the certicate registered in the machine. If the certicate has expired, register

a valid certicate.

Registering a Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 234)

The date and time set on the machine may be incorrect.

●Check the date and time setting of the machine.

Setting the Date/Time(P. 7)

The appropriate paper size, A4, is not available.

Paper of the optimal size selected with Automatic Paper Selection has not been loaded.

●Load paper of the displayed size.

<Paper Source Auto Selection> is set to <Off>.

●Specify the paper source manually.

●Set a paper source loaded with the optimal paper size to <On> in <Paper Source Auto Selection>.

<Paper Source Auto Selection>(P. 388)

Paper of a type that cannot be selected with Automatic Paper Selection is loaded.

●Specify the paper source manually.

●If you are copying, select the <Consider Paper Type> check box in <Paper Source Auto Selection>.

<Paper Source Auto Selection>(P. 388)

Troubleshooting

466

Subnet Mask Conict

The network addresses of the main line and sub line conict.

●Check the IP address and subnet mask settings of the main line and sub line.

Setting an IP Address(P. 22)

The default key is not set.

The key and certicate (TLS server certicate) are not registered.

●To use TLS encrypted communication, rst register the key to be used.

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

An unusable wired LAN adapter was connected.

A USB-LAN adapter that cannot be used with the machine is connected.

●For information on the USB-LAN adapters that can be used, contact your dealer or service representative.

Connecting to a Wired LAN for the Sub Line(P. 12)

Could not verify the certicate.

The CA certicate of a certicate authority could not be conrmed.

●Register a CA certicate issued by a certicate authority.

Cannot change the settings because the selected key is being used.

The key and certicate you are trying to delete are being used in TLS encrypted communications.

●Set all TLS settings to <Off> to stop TLS encrypted communication.

Session timed out. Wait a moment, then try to access the database again.

The session timed out because the specied length of time elapsed.

●Try accessing again after waiting a while. If the session continues to time out, restart the machine.

Direct Connection ended due to an error.

Failed to connect to the mobile device, or no data was sent or received between the machine and the

connected mobile device for a certain period of time.

●Check the connection between the machine and the mobile device.

Cannot print because a non-Canon or counterfeit toner cartridge may be in use.

A toner cartridge for which the print quality cannot be guaranteed may be installed.

●It is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge.

●Printing cannot continue while this message is displayed.

<Canon Genuine Mode>(P. 400)

Troubleshooting

467

Could not register because the number of registered users has reached the limit.

Cannot register the user because the number of users has exceeded the upper limit.

●Delete any unnecessary users.

Insert the toner cartridge in the correct color slot.

The color of the inserted toner cartridge may be incorrect.

●Make sure to check the status of the inserted toner cartridge.

The entered PIN is incorrect.

An incorrect PIN was entered.

●Enter the PIN again.

●If you do not know the correct PIN, contact the administrator.

The authentication server is not running. Contact the system manager.

The LAN cable is disconnected.

●Connect the LAN cable.

The Active Directory server is not running.

●Start the Active Directory server.

The KDC service of Active Directory is stopped.

●Follow the procedure below to check the status of the service.

1 Start the "Service" management tool of Active Directory.

2 Check whether the Active Directory server is operating normally.

Communication with the Active Directory * server is blocked by the rewall.

●Stop blocking the default port 88.

* If Active Directory is set as the login destination, communication is normally performed with the UDP protocol using port 88, but

the data may be processed with the TCP protocol if it exceeds a certain size.

Cannot nd the authentication server. Contact the system manager.

The LAN cable is disconnected.

●Connect the LAN cable.

The primary/secondary DNS server settings of the machine are incorrect or not set.

●Check and adjust the DNS server settings of the machine.

The DNS server specied in the machine is not running or its service is stopped.

●Follow the procedure below to check the status and settings of the DNS server.

1 Check whether the DNS server specied in the machine is running.

2 Start the "Service" management tool of the DNS server.

3 Check the status in <DNS Server>, and if <Enable> is not displayed, right-click and select <Enable>.

Check whether the host record exists in the DNS server.

●Check whether a host record exists in the DNS server, and whether the forwarder settings are correct.

Troubleshooting

468

Cannot log in because anonymous access to the authentication server is not allowed.

Contact the system manager.

Anonymous access is not allowed on the LDAP server.

●On the information input screen of the LDAP server, select <Use authentication information>, and then

specify the user name and password according to what is registered in the LDAP server.

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

The account information necessary to log in to the authentication server is invalid.

Contact the system manager.

The user name or password is not set correctly.

●Conrm the authentication user ID and password, and whether the user has administrator privileges.

The attributes specied in the server settings are not set correctly.

●Conrm that the attributes are correct. Also, make sure that the elds (attribute names) do not contain

invalid values.

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

The administrator account information specied in the server settings is not set correctly. Alternatively,

the user could not log in as an administrator.

●Specify the correct administrator account information.

The information for the server settings is insucient.

●Conrm that the attributes necessary for logging in are set correctly.

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

IP address conict detected.

The IPv4 address set for the machine already exists in the same network as the machine.

●Change the IP address of the machine in <IP Address> in <IPv4 Settings> so that it does not conict with

the IP address of another device.

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

An IP address conict was detected on the network. (Main Line)

The IPv4 address set for the main line of the machine already exists on the same network as the

machine.

●Change the IP address of the main line of the machine so that it does not conict with the IP address of

another device.

Setting an IPv4 Address(P. 23)

An IP address conict was detected on the network. (Sub Line)

The IPv4 address set for the sub line of the machine already exists on the same network as the machine.

●Change the IP address of the sub line of the machine so that it does not conict with the IP address of

another device.

Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line(P. 27)

Troubleshooting

469

Check the network connection.

The cable is not connected to the machine correctly.

●Check whether the LAN cable is connected correctly. If you had to connect it again, restart the machine.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 12)

The machine is not connected to the network.

●If you want to use the machine without connecting to a network, set <Conrm Network Connection> to

<Off>.

<Conrm Network Connection>(P. 365)

Check the network connection.(Main Line)

The machine and the LAN cable of the main line are not connected correctly.

●Check whether the LAN cable is connected correctly. If you had to connect it again, restart the machine.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 12)

The machine is not connected to the network.

●If you want to use the machine without connecting to a network, set <Conrm Network Connection> to

<Off>.

<Conrm Network Connection>(P. 365)

Check the network connection. (Sub Line)

The machine and the LAN cable of the sub line are not connected correctly.

●Check whether the LAN cable is connected correctly. If you had to connect it again, restart the machine.

Front Side(P. 52)

The machine is not connected to the network.

●If you want to use the machine without connecting to a network, set <Conrm Network Connection> to

<Off>.

<Conrm Network Connection>(P. 365)

Cannot log in because an authentication error occurred in Department ID

Management. Contact the system manager.

When using User Authentication, Department ID Management is enabled but Department IDs have not

been assigned to users.

●If you are a general user, ask your administrator to assign you a Department ID.

●If you are an administrator user, ask the Department ID Management administrator to assign you a

Department ID. If no administrator users can log in, contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL Invalid DLG Input

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

Troubleshooting

470

PDL DLG Rendering Error

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL DLG Unknown Error

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL DLG Memory Full

The work memory was insucient when the system was processing data (in particular, graphic

processing and text processing).

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, pages that include the data that caused the error may

not be printed correctly.

PDL DLG Mem. Alloc. Err

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL GL Orig. Pt Unknown

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL GL Coord.Result

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL Invalid GL Input

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL GL Range Check

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

Troubleshooting

471

PDL GL Memory Full

The work memory was insucient when the system was processing data (in particular, graphic

processing and text processing).

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, pages that include the data that caused the error may

not be printed correctly.

PDL GL Mem. Alloc. Err

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL IMG Refer. Data Err

The TIFF or JPEG data includes data that cannot be processed with the machine.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), initialize the printer to increase the free memory, and

then try printing again. However, note that initializing the printer will erase all the data in the memory of

the machine. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via the online manual site.

PDL IMG Initial. Err

The memory for printing the TIFF or JPEG data was insucient.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), initialize the printer to increase the free memory, and

then try printing again. However, note that initializing the printer will erase all the data in the memory of

the machine. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via the online manual site.

PDL IMG Process. Error

An unknown problem occurred while processing the TIFF or JPEG data.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), initialize the printer, and try printing again. However,

note that initializing the printer will erase all the data in the memory of the machine. For more details, see

Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via the online manual site.

PDL IMG Invalid Data

The TIFF or JPEG data includes data that cannot be processed with the machine.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), and check the TIFF or JPEG data.

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, the data that caused the error will not be printed.

Data that cannot be processed by the machine because the machine has the same IP address as another

device, etc. was sent.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), check the IP address in <TCP/IP Settings>, and change

the IP address if necessary.

Setting an IP Address(P. 22)

PDL IMG Work Memory Full

The memory for processing the TIFF or JPEG data was insucient.

Troubleshooting

472

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), initialize the printer to increase the free memory, and

then try printing again. However, note that initializing the printer will erase all the data in the memory of

the machine. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via the online manual site.

●Select <Skip Error>, and continue printing. However, the data that caused the error will not be printed.

PDL nn Rendering Error (nn is the module name)

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL PDF Error

PDF data that cannot be processed with the machine was sent.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), optimize the PDF using Adobe Acrobat, and try printing

again.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), open the PDF le in an application, and try printing again

using the printer driver.

●If the above-mentioned remedies do not solve the problem, make a note of the message and contact your

dealer or service representative.

PDL PDF Data Decode Err

The password for printing the PDF le is incorrect.

●Enter the correct password, and try printing again.

Printing is not allowed in the security settings of the PDF le.

●Change the PDF le to allow printing in an application for editing PDF les.

If the PDF le is linked with a policy server, the policy server cannot be accessed.

●Check whether the policy server is turned on.

●Check whether the machine, policy server, and network are operating normally.

PDL PDF Memory Full

There is insucient memory to process the PDF data.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), optimize the PDF by adjusting settings such as the image

resolution using Adobe Acrobat (to reduce the size of the data to print at one time), and perform printing

again.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), divide the pages of the PDF data in Adobe Acrobat into

multiple les, and try printing again.

●Cancel printing ( Canceling Printing(P. 114) ), open the PDF le in an application, and try printing again

using the printer driver.

PDL RIP Process. Error

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

Troubleshooting

473

PDL XPS Error

An undened error occurred.

●Restart the machine and try again. If the message is still displayed, make a note of the message and

contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL XPS Initialize Error

An unknown error such as not being able to retrieve memory during initialization occurred.

●Restart the machine and try again. If the message is still displayed, make a note of the message and

contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL XPS Rendering Error

An error occurred in the rendering system.

●Restart the machine and try again. If the message is still displayed, make a note of the message and

contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL Image Comp. Error

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL Rendering Timeout

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL Data Transfer Error

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

PDL Reg. Access Error

The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem.

●Restart the machine. If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine, make a note of the

message and contact your dealer or service representative.

The password does not meet the policy requirements. Change the password.

The entered password violates the password policy.

●Enter a password that complies with the password policy. If you do not know the password policy, consult

your system administrator.

Troubleshooting

474

A toner cartridge that cannot be used with this device has been inserted, so printing is

currently unavailable.

A toner cartridge that can be used with the machine has not been loaded.

●Load the toner cartridge that can be used with the machine. For instructions on checking the model

number of the toner cartridge, see Replacement Parts(P. 423) .

●Printing cannot continue while this message is displayed.

Timer settings for this device and the authentication server may not be synchronized.

Contact the system manager.

The date and time settings of the machine and the authentication server are different.

●Synchronize the date and time settings of the machine and the authentication server.

No paper.

The paper in the paper source has run out.

●Load paper in the paper source displayed on the screen.

Loading Paper(P. 65)

The paper guides in the paper source are in the wrong position.

●Adjust the paper guides according to the edges of the paper. Depending on the cut edge of the paper,

multiple sheets of paper may be fed together when printing, which can cause paper jams. This can be

reduced by changing the orientation of the loaded paper.

The paper settings differ from the paper that is loaded.

●Press (Status Monitor) select <Device Status> <Paper Information> to check the paper setting. If

the paper settings are incorrect, match them with the paper that is loaded. The paper loaded in the paper

drawers and multi-purpose tray can be set in <Paper Settings> on the <Home> screen.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 93)

The paper settings of the driver or application differ from the paper that is loaded.

●Check the paper settings on the [Printing Preferences] screen of the printer driver, and if the paper

settings are incorrect, match them with the paper that is loaded.

system manager.

Anonymous access is not allowed in the LDAP server.

●Select the check box in [Use authentication information] on the screen for entering information on the

LDAP server, and set the user name and password according to the information registered in the LDAP

server.

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

invalid. Contact the system manager.

The user name or password is not set correctly.

Troubleshooting

475

●On the screen for entering the information for the LDAP server, set the correct settings according to the

settings registered in the LDAP server.

Registering Server Information(P. 190)

If a six-digit number is displayed when you are logging in

If an error occurs when you are logging in, a six-digit number may be displayed below the message. Take the

necessary measure depending on the six-digit number displayed.

310001

Communication with the authentication server failed.

●Check the network cables from the machine and the domain controller (Active Directory).

●Check whether the domain controller is down.

●Check whether name resolution is working correctly with the DNS server set for the machine on the

domain controller.

●Try again after augmenting the current value of [Period Until Timeout:] in the Active Directory settings.

310002

When [Use access mode within sites] is enabled on the machine, the site information of Active Directory

is not set correctly.

●Check whether the site setting on Active Directory is valid.

310003

The network environment is not yet ready.

●Check again after a while.

●Check whether name resolution to the specied domain name is working correctly (the address can be

identied) with the DNS server set for the machine, and then make adjustments as necessary.

●The DNS server set for the machine cannot be found, or it is currently unable to communicate. Check the

conguration and the communication environment.

322000

A server error has occurred during Kerberos authentication.

●In Active Directory, clear the check box for [Do not require Kerberos preauthentication], which is an

account option for the logged-in user account. Alternatively, check whether Active Directory is used

properly.

322006

The objective user does not exist on the authentication server.

●Check whether the authentication user or search user exists on the domain controller to authenticate.

322012

In Active Directory, the check box for [Smart card is required for interactive logon], which is an account

option for the logged-in user account, is selected.

Troubleshooting

476

●In Active Directory, clear the check box for [Smart card is required for interactive logon], which is an

account option for the logged-in user account. After clearing the check box, be sure to reset the password.

When resetting the password, you can use the same password instead of a new one.

322018

The validity period of the account has expired.

●Check the validity period of the account in question.

322023

The validity period of the password has expired.

●Change the password.

●In Active Directory, check the setting of the account options for the logged-in user account.

322024

The user name or password is wrong when keyboard authentication is performed.

●Check the password of the authentication user or search user.

322029

The attempt to communicate with the writable domain controller failed.

●Check the network cable from the writable domain controller.

●Check whether the writable domain controller is down.

●Check whether name resolution is working correctly with the DNS server on the writable domain

controller.

●Try again after augmenting the current value of [Period Until Timeout:] in the Active Directory settings.

322037

The date and time settings are not identical between the machine and the authentication server.

●Ensure that the date and time settings are identical between the machine and the authentication server.

322xxx

A Kerberos authentication error.

●A Kerberos error code is displayed in place of xxx.

323000

An error has occurred during LDAP server authentication.

●Check whether Active Directory or LDAP service is used properly.

323008

An LDAP server authentication error has occurred in relation to TLS/non-TLS communication.

●Check the communication settings (TLS/non-TLS) of the server.

Troubleshooting

477

●Check whether the communication settings on the device side are identical to those on the server side.

323048

You are attempting to log in as an anonymous user for LDAP server authentication.

●Check whether the LDAP service setting permits anonymous user authentication.

323049/323053

The user information for LDAP server authentication is not set correctly.

●Check the user name and password of the authentication user or search user.

●Check whether the authentication user or search user is invalid, whether their validity period has expired,

and whether they are account-locked.

323xxx

An LDAP server authentication (LDAPBind) error.

●An LDAPBind error code is displayed in place of xxx.

324000

An error has occurred during LDAP server search.

●Check whether Active Directory or LDAP service is used properly.

324xxx

LDAP server search (LDAPSearch) error.

●An LDAPSearch error code is displayed in place of xxx.

325000

An error has occurred during LDAP server authentication.

●Check whether Active Directory or LDAP service is used properly.

325010

You have attempted to perform registration to a read-only domain controller.

●If the domain controller congured in Active Directory is of the read-only type, no user information editing

functions (registering/deleting cards, changing PIN) are available. To use the user information registration

function, congure a writable domain controller.

325050

The search user set in the Administrator settings page does not have update authority (write access).

●Check whether the search user is granted write access to the user attribute that you are going to modify.

325067

You are attempting to modify an attribute of a Relative Distinguished Name (RDN) such as cn attribute.

Troubleshooting

478

●You are attempting to modify an attribute of a Relative Distinguished Name (RDN) such as cn attribute.

The information of such attribute cannot be modied, so specify another attribute.

325xxx

An LDAP server update error.

●An LDAPModify error code is displayed in place of xxx.

331000

User authentication failed.

●Check the user name and password. If the user name and password are correct, contact your system

manager.

331001

The user name has not been entered.

●Enter the user name.

331002

Cannot nd the user.

●Check the user name and password. If the user name and password are correct, contact your system

manager. The user may not exist on the LDAP server, or the search user may not have read access to

attribute information of the relevant account.

331003

You are using a card that is not registered on the authentication server.

●Check whether you are using a valid card.

331004

Card information is double registered on the authentication server.

●Contact your system manager.

331005

The validity period of the logged-in user has expired.

●Contact your system manager.

331006

The validity value of the card and that on the authentication server are different from each other.

●Check whether you are using a valid card. If you are using a valid card, contact your system manager.

331007

A validity value outside the range is set on the authentication server.

Troubleshooting

479

●Check whether the server is operated with the correct attribute of validity value.

331008

The account of the logged-in user is locked out.

●Contact your system manager.

331009

The user ID of the account you are using to log in to the machine is invalid. Or the Active Directory

settings may not be correct.

●Check whether all of the required attributes are set correctly.

●In Active Directory, clear the check box for [Do not require Kerberos preauthentication], which is an

account option for the logged-in user account.

331010

To perform authentication for a specic function, you have attempted to log in as a user who is not

permitted to use that function.

●Contact your system manager.

331011

●Check which functions the logged-in user is able to use.

331012

The PIN of the logged-in user is invalid.

●Enter the PIN again.

331013

The account of the logged-in user is invalid.

●Contact your system manager.

332000

User information updating failed.

●Updating the user information failed. Check whether the user information you used for updating is valid

and whether invalid information is not specied for updating.

332001

Already registered card information.

●The card of the logged-in user is already registered. Check whether you are using a valid card. Or contact

your system manager.

Troubleshooting

480

332002

An invalid attribute was specied for user information updating.

●When card information editing functions are used, it is not permitted to make registration with

sAMAccountName or userPrincipalName attribute in the Active Directory settings. One solution is to use

other attribute.

332003

An invalid login name was specied for user information updating.

●It is not permitted to register the name of the logged-in user (login name). Check the user name and

contact your system manager.

332004

An invalid display name was specied for user information updating.

●It is not permitted to register the display name of the logged-in user. Check the display name attribute

value on the server being referred to, and contact your system manager.

332005

An invalid domain name was specied for user information updating.

●It is not permitted to register the domain name for the logged-in user. Check the domain name you have

selected and contact your system manager.

332006

An invalid email address was specied for user information updating.

●It is not permitted to register the email address of the logged-in user. Check the email address attribute

value on the server being referred to, and contact your system manager.

332007

An invalid role was specied for user information updating.

●Check the attribute value for determining the privileges on the side of the server being referred to, and

contact your system manager.

332008

The maximum registerable number of users was exceeded during user information updating.

●Contact your system manager.

Troubleshooting

481

Countermeasures for Each Error Code
7KKL-0KE
0YRY-0JW 1100-0K0 10XJ-0K0 1106-0K0 10YY-0K0 10H3-0JX 108A-0JY 1116-0JY 10H4-0JX 0YAS-0K2
When printing is not completed normally, a number starting with "#" (an error code) is displayed on the details screen
for job log or a communication management report (  Printing Reports and Lists(P. 441)  ). Perform the
countermeasure required for the error code.
●Some error codes may not be displayed, depending on your machine.
#001 to #800
#009(P. 482)  #010(P. 482)  #037(P. 483)  #099(P. 483)  #701(P. 483) 
#749(P. 483)  #752(P. 483)  #753(P. 483)  #755(P. 484)  #772(P. 484) 
#801 to #999
#801(P. 484)  #802(P. 484)  #810(P. 484)  #813(P. 485)  #816(P. 485) 
#818(P. 485)  #819(P. 485)  #820(P. 485)  #821(P. 485)  #822(P. 486) 
#825(P. 486)  #827(P. 486)  #828(P. 486)  #829(P. 486)  #831(P. 486) 
#837(P. 486)  #843(P. 486)  #844(P. 487)  #851(P. 487)  #852(P. 487) 
#853(P. 487)  #856(P. 487)  #857(P. 487)  #858(P. 487)  #860(P. 488) 
#861(P. 488)  #862(P. 488)  #863(P. 488)  #865(P. 488)  #866(P. 488) 
#919(P. 488)  #923(P. 489)  #934(P. 489)  #939(P. 489)  #995(P. 489) 
◼#009
Paper has run out.
●Load paper.
Loading Paper(P. 65) 
The paper drawer is not inserted correctly.
●Insert the paper drawer in all the way.
Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66) 
◼#010
Paper has run out.
●Load paper.
Troubleshooting
482

Loading Paper(P. 65)

◼#037

Data containing more than 1,000 pages was received.

●The machine deletes any pages after the 999th page, and prints the remaining 999 pages. Tell the other

party to send the 1,000th and subsequent pages again.

◼#099

The operation was canceled before it was complete.

●Perform the operation again.

◼#701

The Department ID does not exist, or the PIN was changed.

●If you are using User Authentication, assign Department IDs to users. If you are using DepartmentID

Authentication, enter the new Department ID and PIN to log in again.

The reception setting in <Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> is set to <Reject>.

●Set <Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> in <Department ID Management> to <Allow>.

Setting the Department ID Management(P. 202)

◼#749

The operation could not be performed because a service call message is displayed.

●Turn the main power OFF, and turn the main power ON again. If the operation still cannot be performed

correctly, turn the main power switch OFF, remove the power plug from the outlet, and contact your

dealer or service representative.

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 64)

Turning ON the Machine(P. 63)

◼#752

The server is not running or the network is disconnected.

●Check whether the SMTP server is operating normally.

●Check the status of the network.

The SMTP server name setting for e-mail is incorrect or the e-mail address or domain name is not set.

●Check the SMTP server name, e-mail address, and domain name settings in <Communication Settings>.

Conguring E-Mail Print Settings(P. 45)

◼#753

A TCP/IP error (Socket or Select error, etc.) occurred when receiving an e-mail.

●Check the status of the network cable and connector. If there is still a problem, restart the machine.

Turning ON the Machine(P. 63)

Troubleshooting

483

◼#755

The IP address is not set.

●Check <TCP/IP Settings> in <Preferences>.

●If you selected <Wired LAN + Wireless LAN> or <Wired LAN + Wired LAN> in <Select Interface>, also check

<Sub Line Settings> in <Preferences>.

When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by DHCP or Auto IP.

When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by DHCP or Auto IP.

●Check <TCP/IP Settings> in <Preferences>.

●If you selected <Wired LAN + Wireless LAN> or <Wired LAN + Wired LAN> in <Select Interface>, also check

<Sub Line Settings> in <Preferences>.

When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by DHCP or Auto IP.

◼#772

The network is disconnected.

●Check the status of the network.

◼#801

A timeout error occurred due to a problem on the mail server side when communicating with the SMTP

server to receive an e-mail.

●Check whether the SMTP server is operating normally.

●Check the status of the network.

An error was returned from the SMTP server when connecting with SMTP. The address setting is

incorrect. An error occurred due to a problem on the server side when sending to a le server.

●Check whether SMTP is operating normally, the status of the network, the destination settings, and the

status and settings of the le server.

◼#802

The SMTP server name specied in <Communication Settings> is incorrect.

●Check the SMTP server name set in <Communication Settings>.

Conguring E-Mail Print Settings(P. 45)

The DNS server address specied in <DNS Settings> is incorrect.

●Check the DNS server address specied in the DNS settings.

Making DNS Settings(P. 31)

Connection to the DNS server failed.

●Check that the DNS server is functioning normally.

◼#810

Troubleshooting

484

A POP server connection error occurred when an e-mail was received.

●Check the POP server settings in <Communication Settings>.

Conguring E-Mail Print Settings(P. 45)

●Check whether the POP server is operating correctly. Check the status of the network.

An error was returned from the POP server when connecting to the POP server. Alternatively, a timeout

error occurred on the server side.

●Check the POP server settings in <Communication Settings>.

Conguring E-Mail Print Settings(P. 45)

●Check whether the POP server is operating correctly. Check the status of the network.

◼#813

A POP server authentication error (user account error or password error) occurred when an e-mail was

received.

●Check the POP server settings in <Communication Settings>.

Conguring E-Mail Print Settings(P. 45)

◼#816

Printing could not be performed because the maximum number of prints set in Department ID

Management was exceeded.

●Contact your System Manager.

◼#818

The received data was in a le format that cannot be printed.

●Tell the other party to change the le format and send again.

◼#819

Data that cannot be handled was received. The MIME information is invalid.

●Tell the other party to check the settings and send again.

◼#820

Data that cannot be handled was received. The BASE64 or uuencode is invalid.

●Tell the other party to check the settings and send again.

◼#821

Data that cannot be handled was received. A TIFF analysis error occurred.

●Tell the other party to check the settings and send again.

Troubleshooting

485

◼#822

Data that cannot be handled was received. The image cannot be decoded.

●Tell the other party to check the settings and send again.

◼#825

The Department ID and PIN of a job being executed or a reserved job were deleted, or the PIN was

changed.

●Execute the job again using the changed Department ID and PIN.

◼#827

Data that cannot be handled was received. Unsupported MIME information was included.

●Tell the other party to check the settings and send again.

◼#828

HTML data was received.

●Tell the other party to change to a format other than HTML and send again.

◼#829

Data containing more than 1,000 pages was received.

●The machine deletes any pages after the 999th page, and prints the remaining 999 pages. Tell the other

party to send the 1,000th and subsequent pages again.

◼#831

An e-mail document could not be received using SMTP because of the Receive Filter setting in Firewall

Settings.

●Reset the Receive Filter setting in Firewall Settings.

Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

◼#837

A connection request was received from a host whose connection is restricted by the Receive Filter

settings in Firewall Settings.

●Check the Receive Filter settings in Firewall Settings. This may also represent a hacking attempt via

unauthorized access.

Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings(P. 215)

◼#843

There is a great difference between the time of the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server and the time set

in the machine.

●Adjust the current date and time in <Date/Time Settings>.

Troubleshooting

486

Setting the Date/Time(P. 7)

●Adjust the current time set in the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server.

◼#844

Sending could not be performed because a validation error occurred when validating the TLS server

certicate when communicating with the POP server because <Conrm TLS Certicate for POP RX> is set

to <On>.

●Use the Remote UI to check whether the CA certicate used to sign the TLS server certicate on the POP

server side is registered in the machine.

●Check whether the TLS server certicate on the POP server side is correct.

●Check whether the TLS server certicate is a self-signed certicate.

◼#851

The printer job could not be stored because the memory is full.

●Check the amount of available memory, and execute the job again.

◼#852

The power was turned OFF while the job was being executed.

●Check that the power cable and plug are securely connected, and execute the job again.

◼#853

The memory is full.

●Reduce the number of pages or check that the number of jobs waiting to be processed has decreased, and

execute the job again.

◼#856

The executed operation was canceled because the memory area for temporarily saving data became full.

●Contact your administrator.

◼#857

Printing was canceled due to the job being canceled while being received, or due to timeout.

●If timeout has occurred, check the status of the network.

◼#858

The data is invalid.

●Check that the print protocol is supported by the machine, as well as the print settings.

Troubleshooting

487

◼#860

Recovery failed after a paper jam, or an incompatible page description language or settings which

cannot be combined were included.

●Check the paper or job settings.

◼#861

An error occurred while processing the print data or image data.

●Check the image size and paper size, as well as the color specication settings.

◼#862

Settings are included which are not supported, cannot be combined, or otherwise exceed the limits of

the machine.

●Check the job settings.

◼#863

The job was canceled because initialization operations were performed while the print data was being

processed.

●Execute the job again.

◼#865

The required functions for printing are currently restricted.

●Check the machine and the job settings.

◼#866

The job was canceled by the security related settings.

●If you are executing a job from the printer driver, use the user information of the appropriate privileges.

●If you are executing a job from the control panel, login as a user with the appropriate privileges.

The security related settings are as follows.

●[Restrict Job from Remote Device w/out User Authent.] is selected

●<Prohibit Authentication Using Department ID and PIN> is <On>

◼#919

A syntax error or a PostScript error that exceeds device restrictions, etc. was detected.

●Set <Print PS Errors> (Set) to <On>, submit the job again, conrm the contents of the PostScript error, then

execute the job after resolving the error. For more details, see Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) via

the online manual site.

Troubleshooting

488

◼#923

Could not print on the specied side of the cover, or body.

●Change to a paper type that is compatible with two-sided printing, and execute the job again.

◼#934

An error occurred for a print job, and the job was deleted because the specied time period elapsed.

●Resolve the error and execute the job again.

●You can also change the time period before deletion or disable automatic deletion from <Auto Delete

Suspended Jobs> (Set).

<Auto Delete Suspended Jobs>(P. 390)

◼#939

Printing was canceled due to an error that occurred while processing the image data.

●Execute the job again.

◼#995

Reserved communication jobs were cleared.

●Perform the operation again, as necessary.

Troubleshooting

489

Clearing Paper Jams

7KKL-0F6

If a paper jam occurs, a message, the location of the paper jam, and the procedure for clearing it are displayed on the

screen. If you do not know how to clear the paper jam from viewing the screen, see Paper Jam Locations(P. 491) to

clear the paper jam. For information on cautions when clearing paper jams, see the Important Safety Instructions.

●Do not forcibly remove the jammed paper from the machine. Forcibly removing the paper may result in

injury or damage parts of the machine.

- If you cannot remove the paper, contact your dealer or service representative.

●When all paper jams have been cleared, immediately remove your hands from the machine and optional

equipment so that your clothing and hands do not get caught in the rollers.

Cautions when clearing paper jams

●When clearing paper jams, do not turn the power OFF. Data being printed is erased when you turn the

power OFF.

●When the paper gets torn, be sure to remove the torn pieces so that they do not remain.

◼If Paper Jams Frequently Occur

If paper jams frequently occur even though there are no problems with the machine and its optional

equipment, check the following.

Are the paper guides misaligned?

●Match the paper guides with the paper loaded in the paper source.

Do sheets of paper overlap when being fed?

●If paper jams occur due to overlapping of sheets of paper when being fed, reload the paper by changing the

orientation.

Troubleshooting

490

Is the paper type correct?

●On the <Paper Type> display, check the paper type. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 93)

●If the paper loaded in a paper source differs from the paper type setting, see Loading Paper(P. 65) to set

the paper type again.

Do pieces of paper remain in the machine?

●Pieces of paper may remain in the machine after removing a paper jam. Open the location where the paper

was jammed, and remove any pieces of paper (Do not forcibly remove the jammed paper from the machine.

Forcibly removing the paper may result in injury or damage parts of the machine. If you cannot remove the

paper, contact your dealer or service representative.).

Paper Jam Locations

For information on the paper jam locations and the method for clearing paper jams, see the following diagram and

references.

Inside the main unit Paper Jams inside the Machine or in the Fixing Unit(P. 492)

Paper drawer Paper Jams in a Paper Source(P. 496)

●Paper may not actually be jammed in the location you check. Even in this case, follow the instructions

on the screen to check all the locations.

●The screen indicating that there is a paper jam is repeatedly displayed until you clear the paper jam.

●Do not remove paper from a location other than that displayed as a paper jam location on the screen.

This may cause paper jams in other locations or missing pages in output documents.

Troubleshooting

491

Paper Jams inside the Machine or in the Fixing Unit

7KKL-0F7

Check the paper jam location on the screen, and follow the procedure below to remove the paper.

1Gently pull out the paper.

2Close the tray.

3Open the right cover.

4Gently pull out the paper.

Troubleshooting

492

5Remove the jammed paper in the delivery unit.

1Lift up the delivery unit.

2Lower the green levers on both sides of the transport guide.

3Gently pull out the paper.

●Pull out the paper while holding it as horizontally as possible to prevent unxed toner from falling.

6Check whether there is a paper jam in the xing unit.

1Turn the delivery unit downward.

2Hold the handles on both sides of the xing unit, and pull out the xing unit straight toward you.

Troubleshooting

493

3Open the cover.

4Gently pull out the paper.

●Pull out the paper while holding it as horizontally as possible to prevent unxed toner from falling.

5Close the cover.

6Gently pull out the paper.

●Determine in which way you can pull out the jammed paper more easily, and try that way rst.

●Pull out the paper while holding it as horizontally as possible to prevent unxed toner from falling.

7Place the xing unit back into position.

●Fully push it in until it cannot go any further.

7Close the right cover.

Troubleshooting

494

When the message is still displayed

●Paper may be jammed in other locations. Check other locations, and remove jammed paper if any. If the

message is still displayed, check whether the right cover is securely closed.

Troubleshooting

495

Paper Jams in a Paper Source

7KKL-0F8

Check the paper jam location on the screen, and follow the procedure below to remove the paper.

Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawers 1(P. 496)

Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawers 2, 3 and 4 (Optional)(P. 497)

Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawers 1

1Open the right cover.

2Remove the jammed paper in the delivery unit.

1Lift up the delivery unit.

2Lower the green levers on both sides of the transport guide.

3Gently pull out the paper.

●Pull out the paper while holding it as horizontally as possible to prevent unxed toner from falling.

Troubleshooting

496

3Remove the jammed paper in the paper drawer.

1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

2Gently pull out the paper.

3Set the paper drawer.

4Close the right cover.

When the message is still displayed

●Paper may be jammed in other locations. Check other locations, and remove jammed paper if any. If the

message is still displayed, check whether the right cover is securely closed.

Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawers 2, 3 and 4 (Optional)

●Remove jammed paper in Paper Drawers 3 and 4 with the same procedure as Paper Drawer 2.

Troubleshooting

497

1Open the right cover.

2Remove the jammed paper in the delivery unit.

1Lift up the delivery unit.

2Lower the green levers on both sides of the transport guide.

3Gently pull out the paper.

●Pull out the paper while holding it as horizontally as possible to prevent unxed toner from falling.

3Close the right cover.

Troubleshooting

498

4Open the right cover of the paper feeder.

5Lower the green lever to open the transport guide.

6Gently pull out the paper.

7Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and gently pull out the paper.

8Set the paper drawer.

9Close the right cover of the paper feeder.

When the message is still displayed

Troubleshooting

499

●Paper may be jammed in other locations. Check other locations, and remove jammed paper if any. If the

message is still displayed, check whether the right cover is securely closed.

Troubleshooting

500

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved

7KKL-0F9

If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact your dealer or service

representative or the Canon help line.

Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself

●If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.

◼When Contacting Canon

When contacting us, have the following information ready:

●Product name (LBP722Cdw)

●Dealer where you purchased the machine

●Details about your problem (such as what you did, what happened as a result, and displayed messages)

●Serial number (10 alphanumeric characters long, found on the label on the back side of the machine)

Checking the serial number from the control panel

●You can also check by (Status Monitor) <Device Status> <Serial Number>.

Troubleshooting

501

Implementing Security Measures

Implementing Security Measures ........................................................................................................ 503

Various Security Functions ............................................................................................................................... 504

Implementing Security Measures

502

Implementing Security Measures

7KKL-0FA

Saving important data to the machine and sharing information via the machine enable the machine to be used more

effectively. It also raises the value the machine provides as an information asset.

The machine provides various functions for enhancing security, such as preventing information leaks, preventing

unauthorized access, and protecting condential information.

Using these security functions together enables you to use the machine securely.

Various Security Functions(P. 504)

Implementing Security Measures

503

Various Security Functions

7KKL-0JL

Do you feel uneasy about the following problems?

●Unattended output

●Unauthorized access

●Forgetting to erase condential data on the machine

The machine provides various security functions for minimize the risk of information leakage and unauthorized access.

This section describes functions that are effective in certain situations.

Preventing Documents Leaks(P. 504)

Preventing Unauthorized Access to the Network(P. 504)

Preventing Leaks of Condential Information during Operation of the Machine(P. 505)

●Implementing security measures does not guarantee that all information will be protected.

●Using the Import All function enables multiple devices to be managed with the same settings. Importing/

Exporting the Setting Data(P. 276)

Preventing Documents Leaks

When managing condential documents, it is necessary to handle problems

such as leaks and loss. The machine has a security function that prohibits

printing until the user logs in at the device, in order to prevent the leakage or

loss of documents.

Use the following functions as security measures for preventing document

leaks.

Force Hold

To avoid leaving printed material, accidental information leakage, misprinting, etc., the administrator can set to

store the document before printing. Printing Documents Held in the Machine(P. 118)

Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs

By using Encrypted Secure Printing, you can send encrypted printing data to a machine from your computer.

This enables you to reduce the risk of information leaks when sending printed data, and to print more safely.

Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 257)

Preventing Unauthorized Access to the Network

Implementing Security Measures

504

Although Cloud services have made it easier to exchange data via the

Internet, communication can still be intercepted or modied by malicious

third parties due to network vulnerabilities. The machine provides various

measures for increasing network security, such as only allowing

communication with specic IP addresses and encrypting data for

communication.

Use the following functions as security measures for preventing unauthorized

network access, etc.

Firewall Settings

Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and breaches, can be blocked by only allowing

communication with devices that have a specic IP address. Restricting Communication by Using

Firewalls(P. 214)

Proxy Settings

You can provide greater security by using a proxy server for connections outside the network. Setting a

Proxy(P. 223)

TLS Settings

TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web

browser or an e-mail application. TLS encrypted communication enables secure network communication when

accessing the machine using the Remote UI. Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 225)

IPSec Settings

While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application,

IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system

than TLS. Conguring the IPSec Settings(P. 246)

IEEE 802.1X Settings

If a device tries to connect and start communicating on an 802.1X network, the device must go through user

authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information

is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication to the network depending

on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the

outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. Conguring the

IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 253)

Preventing Leaks of Condential Information during Operation of the

Machine

Implementing Security Measures

505

The machine generates value as an information asset by storing important

data. Preventing condential information from remaining on the machine

after disposal is another important security measure. The machine provides

various measures for increasing security of operation, such as preventing

unregistered users from operating the machine, and completely erasing

temporary job data when the machine is started.

Use the following functions as security measures for preventing leaks of

condential information during operation of the machine.

Verify System at Startup

The integrity of the rmware, system, and AddOn applications in the machine is veried during startup.

<Verify System at Startup>(P. 405)

McAfee Embedded Control

When the machine is operating, the McAfee Embedded Control function is used to prevent unauthorized

program modication and the execution of unauthorized programs, for improved system reliability. <McAfee

Embedded Control>(P. 405)

Personal Authentication Management

A user name and password can be used to perform personal authentication of users. Preventing unauthorized

access by third parties and setting usage restrictions can maintain a higher level of security and enable more

ecient operation of the machine. Managing Users(P. 174)

Initialize All Data/Settings

You can restore all of the machine settings to the factory default values. Since data remaining in the memory is

overwritten with meaningless values, this prevents external leaks of condential data when disposing of the

machine. Initializing Settings(P. 294)

Security Policy Settings

A security policy describes company-wide rules regarding information security. With this machine, multiple

settings related to a security policy can be set together. Applying a Security Policy to the Machine(P. 164)

Allow Use of Default Password for Remote Access

You can set the machine to not allow users to log in to the Remote UI using the default password (7654321) of

the "Administrator" user for security reasons. Setting an Authentication/Password Policy(P. 209)

Implementing Security Measures

506

Appendix

Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 508

Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 510

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 511

Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 515

Productivity .................................................................................................................................................. 516

Image Quality ............................................................................................................................................... 517

Manageability ............................................................................................................................................... 518

Building a Dual Network Environment ................................................................................................... 519

Oce Compatibility ...................................................................................................................................... 522

Basic Windows Operations ............................................................................................................................... 523

System Specications ....................................................................................................................................... 527

Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 528

Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 531

System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 535

Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 536

System Options ............................................................................................................................................ 538

Hardware Specications ................................................................................................................................... 539

Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 540

Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 542

Paper Feeder PF-D ........................................................................................................................................ 549

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV ............................................................................................................................. 550

Options .............................................................................................................................................................. 551

Optional Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 552

Paper Feeder PF-D ................................................................................................................................. 553

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV ....................................................................................................................... 554

Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 555

Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 556

Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 557

Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 560

Appendix

507

Appendix

7KKL-0FC

This chapter contains the technical specications of this machine, descriptions of options, instructions on how to use

the User's Guide, disclaimers, copyright information, and other important information for customers. Read this

chapter as necessary.

◼Machine Specications

You can check the specications of the machine, network environment, etc.

Hardware Specications(P. 539)

System Specications(P. 527)

◼Using Optional Equipment

See this section to check the optional equipment and the system options to use the machine more eciently.

Options(P. 551)

Optional Equipment(P. 552)

System Options(P. 538)

◼Referencing the Manual of This Machine

See the following section(s) to read instructions on how to use the various manuals and the User's Guide (this manual)

that help you understand machine's functions and operating procedures.

Manuals and Their Contents(P. 555)

Using User's Guide(P. 556)

◼Others

This section describes basic OS operations and includes disclaimers, copyright information, and other information.

Appendix

508

Third Party Software(P. 510)

Feature Highlights(P. 515)

Basic Windows Operations(P. 523)

Notice(P. 511)

Appendix

509

Third Party Software

7KKL-0FE

For information related to third-party software, click the following icon(s).

Third-Party Services

THIRD PARTY LICENSE README

Third-Party Software Included in This Manual

Appendix

510

Notice

7KKL-0FF

◼IPv6Ready Logo

The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2

established by the IPv6 Forum.

◼Product Information required by COMMISSION REGULATION (EU) No 801/2013 amending

Regulation (EC) No 1275/2008

Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless

network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).

Model Name Power consumption of the product in networked standby

LBP722Cdw 3.0 W or less

●The above value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from

the value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the

measurement.

◼WEEE and Battery Directives

Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE

Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this

indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a

concentration above an applicable threshold specied in the Battery Directive.

This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when

you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic

equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible

impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated

with EEE.

Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.

Appendix

511

For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city oce, waste authority,

approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/sustainability/approach/.

◼Environmental Information

Reducing your environmental impact while saving money

Power Consumption and Activation Time

The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set

in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can

print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode.

The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.

If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please

consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.

Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.

Energy Star ®

The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy ecient

models, which help to minimise environmental impact.

Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental benets and

the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.

Paper types

This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certied to an environmental stewardship

scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media

down to a weight of 64g/m2.

Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.

Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)

Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of

valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.

The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends

that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental

impact of your work with this product at all times.

◼When disposing of used toner cartridges

●To protect the environment and make more effective use of resources, Canon promotes the recovery and recycling

of used toner cartridges. Please cooperate in the recovery of toner cartridges (resource reuse). For details on

resource reuse, see the Canon website:

global.canon/ctc

When disposing of toner cartridges, pack them in their original packaging to prevent toner dispersal and dispose of

the cartridges in accordance with your local government instructions.

◼Installation

●If you nd the machine's operation to be noisy in some operating modes or due to your surroundings, we

recommend setting up the machine in a separate location from your oce.

●Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine if the room where the machine is installed is heated

rapidly, or if the machine is moved from a cool, dry location to a warm, humid location. Using the machine under

these conditions may result in problems such as paper jams, poor print quality, or faults. Let the machine adjust to

the ambient temperature and humidity for at least two hours before use.

●Machines with storage devices such as hard disks may not operate properly when used at high altitudes (3,000

meters above sea level or higher).

Appendix

512

◼Trademarks

Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria

Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.

UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions.

Adobe, Acrobat and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or

other countries.

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Safari, Mac, macOS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Windows Phone, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, Excel and

PowerPoint are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other

countries.

Google Chrome and Android are trademarks of Google LCC.

Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and /or its aliates.

Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems

Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;

6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.

All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems

Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'

implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item

refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript

language.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

All brand names and product names appearing on this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of their

respective owners.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Appendix

513

◼Disclaimers

●The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

●CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL

NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR

EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

●If you are unable to view the manual in PDF format, download Adobe Acrobat Reader from the Adobe Systems

website (https://get.adobe.com/reader/).

◼Copyright

Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.

Appendix

514

Feature Highlights

7KKL-0FH

This section highlights six ways in which you can use the machine to its fullest potential.

Superior productivity to help your business' daily operations run more smoothly

Productivity(P. 516)

Clearer images thanks to high-quality image printing and corrective functions

Image Quality(P. 517)

Expanded capabilities and easier management

Manageability(P. 518)

An energy-saving design that's environmentally friendly

Oce Compatibility(P. 522)

Appendix

515

Productivity

7KKL-0FL

This section describes how to use the machine's superior productivity to help your daily business operations run more

smoothly.

Using the Machine Immediately after Turning it ON

(Quick Startup)

Specifying <Quick Startup Settings for Main Power> reduces the time required

for the machine to start up after turning the main power ON, enabling

smoother operations.

<Quick Startup Settings for Main Power>(P. 361)

Appendix

516

Image Quality

7KKL-0FR

This section describes functions that help to produce crisp and clear images, such as high-quality image printing and

corrective functions.

Adjusting Print Quality

You can achieve more satisfying print results by using corrective functions such

as gradation adjustment and density correction.

Adjusting Print Quality(P. 427)

Appendix

517

Manageability

7KKL-0FS

This section describes how to expand the capabilities of the machine and make management easier.

Dual Network Environment Connecting to the Wireless LAN

A dual network environment using wired LAN and

wireless LAN or wired LAN and another wired LAN

can be used.

Building a Dual Network Environment(P. 519)

A wireless LAN is built into the machine, enabling you to

connect a computer or mobile device to the machine, as

well as install it in a separate location.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 14)

Linking with Mobile Devices Operating an Oce Security Policy

You can directly print data saved in a mobile device from

the machine. You can also use your mobile device to

specify settings for forced hold printing in the machine.

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 144)

A security policy describes company-wide rules

regarding information security. With this machine,

multiple settings related to a security policy can be set

together.

Applying a Security Policy to the Machine(P. 164)

Appendix

518

Building a Dual Network Environment

7KKL-0FU

Do you have separate machines in each department or oor of the same oce for security purposes?

In addition to single connections with a wired LAN or wireless LAN, this machine enables dual network environments

with both a wired LAN and wireless LAN or a wired LAN and another wired LAN via a USB-LAN adapter*. This makes it

easy to build network environments where employees use the main line and customers use a sub line with restricted

functionality. It also contributes to reduced costs as it is not necessary to install a machine for each network

environment.

* For information on the supported USB-LAN adapters, contact your dealer or service representative.

This machine and the User's Guide refer to the main wired LAN in a dual network as the "main line". The sub wireless

LAN or another wired LAN in a dual network is referred to as the "sub line."

Flow of Settings Required for a Dual Network(P. 519)

Cautions When Using the Sub Line(P. 520)

Flow of Settings Required for a Dual Network

In a dual network, the main line and sub line have separate settings. This section describes the settings required for

the sub line network.

●Specify the wired LAN/wireless LAN settings common to the main and sub lines, as required.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 12)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 14)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 12)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 14)

Step 1 Selecting the Network Connection Method(P. 10)

●Select <Wired LAN + Wireless LAN> or <Wired LAN + Wired LAN>.

Appendix

519

Step 2 Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line(P. 27)

●Specify the IPv4 address settings from <IP Address Settings> in <Sub Line Settings>. When

using static routing, also set a gateway address.

Step 3 Making Ethernet Settings(P. 29) *

●Set this when using a wired LAN via a USB-LAN adapter for the sub line.

* Specify the required settings according to your environment.

Step 4 Conguring the Firewall of the Sub Line(P. 220) *

●Register the port numbers of the functions to use/restrict in the rewall settings of the sub

line.

* Specify the required settings according to your environment.

Step 5 Setting Static Routing(P. 38) *

●Set static routing when connecting to another network via a router.

* Specify the required settings according to your environment.

Step 6 Conguring System Data Communication(P. 43) *

●Set this when performing specic system data communication, such as accessing a rmware

distribution server in environments where DNS name resolution or network connections via

a proxy cannot be used.

* Specify the required settings according to your environment.

Cautions When Using the Sub Line

The network functions set in the machine can all be used for the main line. However, the functions that can be used

with the sub line are limited.

Appendix

520

●The DNS server and WINS server settings cannot be used at the same time as the main line.

●<DNS Server Address Settings> and <Proxy Settings> in <Settings for System Data Communication> can only

be used for specic system data communication, such as using the sub line to access a rmware distribution

server. When using a DNS server or proxy server for the sub line for applications other than system data

communication, register the addresses and port numbers to use with the sub line in the settings of the main

line.

Making DNS Settings(P. 31)

Setting a Proxy(P. 223)

◼Functions Restricted for the Sub Line

The following network functions cannot be used with the sub line.

●IPv6 address settings

●IEEE802.1X authentication

●IPSec

●NetBIOS

●FTP (ACTIVE mode)

●DHCP Option Settings

●DNS Dynamic Update Settings

●Multicast Discovery Settings

●Setting the IP address via AutoIP

●Firewall settings via MAC address lter

●Browsing using the SMB protocol

The following functions and services cannot be used, due to the above limitations.

●Building a printing/accounting system that performs server connections via an AddOn application

●Building an authentication system for an Active Directory server

●File sending using DNS name resolution or NetBIOS name resolution from the SMB or WebDAV protocol*1

●Automatic discovery of other multifunction printers on the sub line side using multicast discovery*1

●Functions such as the following that use the IP address of the main line

- [Security Policy Settings]

- Batch importing/batch exporting

●Universal Print

*1 Specify the IP address directly.

Appendix

521

Oce Compatibility

7KKL-0FX

This section describes how to use the machine in an environmentally-friendly manner.

Using the Sleep Mode to Save Power During Standby

The machine saves power by switching to the Sleep mode or Energy Saver mode when not in use. Users can also

save power by only starting up the functions they require when the machine recovers from the Sleep mode.

Entering Sleep Mode(P. 106)

<Timer/Energy Settings>(P. 361)

Appendix

522

Basic Windows Operations

7KKL-0H9

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 523)

Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 523)

Checking the LPR/RAW Printer Port(P. 525)

When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 526)

●Depending on the computer that you use, the operation may differ.

◼Displaying the Printer Folder

Wi ndows Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windows 10

[] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers].

Windows Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].

◼Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server

1Open Windows Explorer.

Windows Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].

Windows 10/Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer]

2Select [Network] or [My Network Places] and double-click the computer set up as a

print server.

●To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for

computers.

Appendix

523

➠The shared printer is displayed.

Appendix

524

◼Checking the LPR/RAW Printer Port

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 523)

2Right-click your printer icon of the machine and click [Printer properties] (or

[Properties]).

3Check the port settings.

●Click the [Ports] tab.

●Make sure that the correct port is selected for the printer.

Appendix

525

◼When Printing from the Windows Store App

Windows Server 2012

Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] The driver that you use [Print].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] [Print] The driver that you use

[Print].

Windows 10

Tap or click [Print] on the application The driver that you use [Print].

●If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings are available.

●If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed,

go to the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when

the machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.

Appendix

526

System Specications

7KKL-0HA

This section presents the system specications for this product. Specications are subject to change without notice for

product improvement or future release.

◼Functional Specications

Printer Functions(P. 528)

Management Functions(P. 531)

◼Environment To Use the Machine

System Environment(P. 535)

Network Environment(P. 536)

System Options(P. 538)

Appendix

527

Printer Functions

7KKL-0HF

◼UFR II Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 542)

Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 540)

Data Processing Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 1200 dpi x 1200 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II

Protocol Supported TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100/IPP/IPPS/FTP/WSD)

Compatible OS ●Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server

2016/Windows Server 2019

●Mac OS X (10.11 and later)

Resident Fonts None

Interface USB2.0High・Speed, 1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

◼PCL Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 542)

Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 540)

Data Processing Resolution ●PCL5: 600 dpi x 600 dpi

●PCL6: 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 1200 dpi x 1200 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) PCL5, PCL6

Protocol Supported TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100/IPP/IPPS/FTP/WSD)

Compatible OS Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server2012/Windows Server2012 R2/Windows

Server2016/Windows Server2019

Resident Fonts 93 Roman, 10 Bitmap fonts, 2 OCR fonts, Andalé Mono WT J/K/S/T*1 (Japanese, Korean,

Simplied Chinese, and Traditional Chinese) , Barcode fonts*2

Appendix

528

Interface USB2.0High・Speed, 1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

*1 Requires optional PCL International Font Set

*2 Require optional Barcode Printing Kit

◼PS Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 542)

Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 540)

Data Processing Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 1200 dpi x 1200 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) Adobe PostScript 3

Protocol Supported TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100/IPP/IPPS/FTP/WSD)

Compatible OS Driver

●Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server2012/Windows Server2012 R2/Windows

Server2016/Windows Server2019

●Mac OS X (10.11 and later)

PPD

●Windows 8.1/Windows 10

●Mac OS X (10.11 and later)

Resident Fonts 136 Styles

Interface USB2.0High･Speed, 1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

◼E-Mail Print Function

Compatible Mail Receiving Server Software ●Microsoft Exchange Server 2013

●Microsoft Exchange Server 2016

●Microsoft Exchange Server 2019

●Qpopper 4.1.0

Protocol Supported POP3 (receive*1), SMTP (receive*2)

Supported Attachment File Decoding Formats uuencode, x-uuencode, base64

Printable Format of Attached Image Files TIFF

*1 Supports APOP and encrypted communication (TLS) during POP RX.

Appendix

529

*2 Supports encrypted communication (TLS) during SMTP RX.

Appendix

530

Management Functions

7KKL-0HH

◼Information Registered in User Authentication

Up to 5,001 users can be registered.

◼Registering Department IDs

Up to 1,000 Department IDs can be registered.

◼Authentication Functions

●When an Active Directory server is specied as an authentication server, the following system environment is

required.

Software (operating system): Windows Server 2008 SP2*1/Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1/Windows Server 2012*2/

Windows Server 2012 R2*2/Windows Server 2016*2/Windows Server 2019*2

*1 64-bit operating systems are not supported.

*2 Users cannot log in with Active Directory authentication if Kerberos Armoring is enabled for KDCrelated policies (group policies). Make

sure to disable Kerberos Armoring.

●Kerberos encryption methods for the Active Directory authentication supported by the current version of User

Authentication are as follows.

Encryption method

●128-bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)

●256-bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)

●DES (Data Encryption Standard)

●RC4

●The available encryption methods may vary, depending on the Active Directory settings.

●Of the available encryption methods, the one with the highest cipher strength is automatically selected.

●When specifying an Active Directory server as an authentication server, use the following ports*1 on the server.

To communicate with a DNS server: port number 53

To communicate with a KDC (Key Distribution Center): port number 88

To communicate with a server for LDAP directory service (can be changed to an arbitrary port

number for the LDAP service): port number 389

*1 The above port numbers are default values. These numbers may vary depending on the selected settings.

●When specifying an LDAP server as an authentication server, the following system environment is required.

Appendix

531

Software: OpenLDAP

Operating system: Requirements are pursuant to the product specications of the LDAP server.

●When specifying an LDAP server as an authentication server, use the following ports*1 on the server.

To communicate with the LDAP server using LDAP (when TLS is enabled): port number 636

To communicate with the LDAP server using LDAP (when TLS is disabled): port number 389

*1 The port numbers can be changed according to the LDAP server settings.

◼Firewall Settings

●When specifying IP addresses in rewall settings, up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied

for both IPv4 and IPv6.

●When specifying MAC addresses in rewall settings, up to 100 MAC addresses can be specied.

●The exception addresses and exception port numbers that can be used for communication using the sub line and

are registered by default are indicated below.

Exception addresses: 0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.255

Exception port numbers: 53, 67, 68, 80, 161, 443, 515*, 631*, 3702, 5353, 5357, 5358, 8000*, 8080, 8443*, 9013,

9100*, 10443*, 20010*, 47545

* Inbound lter only

◼Registration of Keys and Certicates

●If you install a key or CA certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:

Format ●Key: PKCS#12*1

●CA certicate: X.509 DER/PEM

File extension ●Key: ".p12" or ".pfx"

●CA certicate: ".cer" or ".pem"

Public key algorithm

(and key length)

●RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)

●DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)

●ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)

Certicate signature algorithm

●RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384*2, SHA-512*2, MD2, MD5

●DSA: SHA-1

●ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512

Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA-1

*1 Requirements for the certicate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certicates.

*2 SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.

Appendix

532

◼Registration of Certicate Revocation Lists (CRL)

Up to 50 certicate revocation lists (CRL) can be registered. Note, however, that CRL cannot be registered in the

following cases.

●The data size of the CRL exceeds 1 MB.

●An unsupported signature algorithm is being used.

●The number of revoked certicates registered in one CRL le exceeds 1,000.

◼Denition of "Weak Encryption"

When [Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption] is selected, the use of the following algorithms is prohibited.

Hash: MD4, MD5, SHA-1

HMAC: HMAC-MD5

Common key cryptosystem: RC2, RC4, DES

Public key cryptosystem: RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits), RSA signature (512 bits/1024 bits), DSA (512 bits/1024

bits), DH (512 bits/1024 bits)

●Even when [Prohibit Use of Key/Certicate with Weak Encryption] is selected, the hash algorithm SHA-1,

which is used for signing a root certicate, can be used.

◼FIPS 140-2 Standard Algorithm

When [Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2] is selected, the following algorithms are prohibited from use.

Hash: MD4, MD5, SHA-1 (for a purpose other than TLS)

Common key cryptosystem: RC2, RC4, DES, PBE

Public key cryptosystem: RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits), RSA signature (512 bits/1024 bits), DSA signature (512

bits/1024 bits), DH (512 bits/1024 bits)

◼Log Management

●The following types of logs can be managed on the machine. Collected logs can be exported in the CSV le format.

Log Type

Number

Indicated as

"Log Type" in

the CSV File

Description

User Authentication

Log 4098

This log contains information related to the authentication

status of user authentication (login/logout and user

authentication success/failure), the registering/changing/

Appendix

533

deleting of user information managed with User

Authentication.

Job Log 1001 This log contains information related to the completion of

print jobs.

Receive Log 8193 This log contains information related to reception.

Machine Management Log 8198

This log contains information related to the starting/shutting

down of the machine and changes made to the settings using

<Set>. The Machine Management Log also records changes in

user information or security-related settings when the

machine is inspected or repaired by your dealer or service

representative.

Network Authentication Log 8200 This log is recorded when IPSec communication fails.

Export/Import All Log 8202

This log contains information related to the importing/

exporting of the settings by using the Export All/Import All

function.

Application/Software Management

Screen Operation Log 3101 This is an operation log for software registration/updates, and

AddOn application installers, etc.

Security Policy Log 8204 This log contains information related to the setting status of

the security policy settings.

System Maintenance Log 8206 This log contains information related to rmware updates and

backup/restoration of the AddOn application, etc.

Authentication Print Log 8207 This log contains information and the operation history

related to the forced hold print jobs.

Log for Audit Log Management 3001

This log contains information related to the starting and

ending of this function (the Audit Log Management function),

as well as the exporting of logs, etc.

●Logs can contain up to 40,000 records. When the number of records exceeds 40,000, they are deleted, with

the oldest records rst.

◼Import/Export of the Setting Data

See Settings/Registration Table(P. 299) .

◼SCEP Server Support

Only the Network Device Enrollment Service (NDES) of Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows

Server 2016 is supported.

Appendix

534

System Environment

7KKL-0HJ

System requirements for the Remote UI *1 Windows

●Internet Explorer 11

●Microsoft Edge

●Google Chrome

Mac OS

●Safari 11 or later

●Google Chrome

System requirements for the User's Guide Windows

●Internet Explorer 9 and later

●Microsoft Edge

●Firefox

●Firefox ESR

●Chrome (Online browsing only)

Linux

●Firefox

Mac OS

●Safari

●Firefox

●Chrome (Online browsing only)

iOS

●Safari (Online browsing only)

Android

●Chrome (Online browsing only)

*1 Before changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.

Appendix

535

Network Environment

7KKL-0HK

◼Wired LAN Specications

Interface (Primary line/Secondary line) 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T (RJ-45)

Protocol Supported TCP/IP

●Frame type: Ethernet II

●Print applications: LPD/Raw/IPP/IPPS/FTP/WSD/Mopria/AirPrint/Windows 10

Mobile Print

●For precautions related to the sub line, see Cautions When Using the Sub Line(P. 520) .

◼Wireless LAN Specications

Standard IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Transmission Scheme ●IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)

●IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)

●IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)

Frequency Range 2.412 to 2.472 GHz

Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitted +14.08 dBm

Security (encryption method) Infrastructure Mode

●128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP

●WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

●WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

●WPA-EAP (AES-CCMP)

●WPA2-EAP (AES-CCMP)

Access Point Mode

WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)

Wi-Fi Direct Mode

WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)

Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup

Appendix

536

Port Numbers Available for Direct Connection

Type Port Number Protocol

TCP

515 LPD

9100 RAW

80, 8000, 8080 HTTP

631 IPP

443, 10443 IPPS

443, 8443 HTTPS

9013 CPCA (unique Canon protocol)

5357, 5358 WSD

UDP

161 SNMP

5353 mDNS

67, 68 DHCPv4

3702 WSD

47545 CPCA (unique Canon protocol)

Appendix

537

System Options

7KKL-0HL

By installing system-related options, you can further enhance the performance of the machine.

◼Barcode Printing Kit

This option enables you to print barcodes. For more details, see Bar Code Printing via the online manual site.

◼PCL International Font Set

This option enables you to add the following fonts for a PCL printer. As a result, you can output using multiple

languages in a SAP Unicode environment.

●Andale® and WorldType® Collection J (Japanese Version)

●Andale® and WorldType® Collection K (Korean Version)

●Andale® and WorldType® Collection S (Simplied Chinese Version)

●Andale® and WorldType® Collection T (Traditional Chinese Version)

In order to support differences in character design depending on the region, four font versions are enabled.

Appendix

538

Hardware Specications

7KKL-0HR

This section presents the specications of the main unit and optional equipment of this product. Note that the

specications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.

◼Machine Specications

Main Unit(P. 540)

Available Paper(P. 542)

◼Specications of Optional Equipment

Paper Feeder PF-D(P. 549)

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV(P. 550)

Appendix

539

Main Unit

7KKL-0HS

Name Canon LBP722Cdw

Type Desktop

Resolution for Writing 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Number of Tones 256

Acceptable Paper Stock Paper Sizes

Paper Drawer

●Max: 216.0 mm x 297.0 mm

●Min: 101.6 mm x 148.0 mm

Multi-Purpose Tray

●Max: 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm

●Min: 76.2 mm x 127.0 mm

Paper Weight

●Paper Drawer: 60 g/m² to 163 g/m²

●Multi-Purpose Tray: 60 g/m² to 216 g/m²

Paper Type Available Paper(P. 542)

Warm-Up Time *1 After Powering ON

●When <Quick Startup Settings for Main Power> is set to <On>: 2 seconds or less*

●When <Quick Startup Settings for Main Power> is set to <Off>: 50 seconds or less

*Depending on the situations, the machine does not startup quickly.

Returning from the Sleep mode

6 seconds or less

First Print Time ●Color: 6.3 seconds or less

●Black and White: 5.3 seconds or less

Print Speed *2(Plain A4/LTR, 100%) ●38 sheets/minute (A4)

●40 sheets/minute (LTR)

Paper Feeding System/Capacity

Paper Drawer

●550 sheets (80 g/m² / 75 g/m²)

●640 sheets (64 g/m²)

●Paper other than above: height 60 mm or less

Multi-Purpose Tray

●100 sheets (80 g/m² / 75 g/m² / 64 g/m²)

●Paper other than above: height 11 mm or less

Appendix

540

Inner Tray Capacity 200 sheets (80 g/m² / 75 g/m² / 64 g/m²)*3

Power Source 220 V - 240 V a.c., 50/60 Hz, 3.7 A

Power Consumption *1 Maximum Power Consumption

1,500 W

When the machine is in the Sleep mode

1.1 W

When the main power switch is turned OFF

●When <Quick Startup Settings for Main Power> is set to <On>: 1.1 W

●When <Quick Startup Settings for Main Power> is set to <Off>: 0.4 W

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

458 mm x 464 mm x 443 mm

Weight

(Toner cartridges excluded)

Main Unit

Approximately 25 kg

Consumables

Consumables(P. 423)

Installation Space

(W x D)

696 mm x 764 mm (When the paper drawer is pulled out and the multi-purpose tray is

opened.)

*Provide a space of 100 mm or more around the machine.

Memory Capacity RAM: 2 GB

eMMC: 15 GB

Environmental Conditions Temperature: 10 °C to 30 °C

Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

*1 May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.

*2 Print speed is measured based on internal testing using A4/LTR size paper printed with 100% print ratio to original on

one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously printing the same one page of content on plain paper. Print

speed may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.

The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of

a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous printing.

*3 May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.

Appendix

541

Available Paper

7KKL-0HU

The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.

Also, conrm the precautions regarding paper use.

Supported Paper Sizes(P. 542)

Supported Paper Types(P. 546)

Precautions Regarding Paper(P. 547)

Storing Paper Printed With the Machine(P. 548)

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper Sizes Paper Source (Standard) Paper Source (Optional)

Paper Drawer 1 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Feeder PF-D Cassette Feeding Unit-AV

A5R

16K

LTR

LGL -

STMT

EXEC

FOOLSCAP/FOLIO -

OFICIO -

OFICIO (Mexico) -

LETTER

(Government)

OFICIO (Brazil) -

Appendix

542

Paper Sizes Paper Source (Standard) Paper Source (Optional)

Paper Drawer 1 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Feeder PF-D Cassette Feeding Unit-AV

LEGAL (India) -

LEGAL

(Government)

FOOLSCAP

(Australia)

F4A -

Free Size

(76.2 mm x 127.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

*1 *2 *2

Custom Size

(76.2 mm x 127.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

*1 *2 *2

Postcard -- -

Reply Postcard - - -

4 on 1 Postcard - - -

No.10 (COM10) - - -

ISO-C5 - - -

DL - - -

Monarch - - -

Nagagata 3 - - -

Yougatanaga 3 - - -

*1 You can use custom size settings ranging from 101.6 mm x 148.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 297.0 mm.

*2 You can use custom size settings ranging from 101.6 mm x 148.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm.

Paper sizes supported by this machine

●The following table shows most of the sizes of paper and envelope that can be used with the machine.

Appendix

543

Appendix

544

●Other supported paper sizes are as follows.

FOOLSCAP/FOLIO (215.9 mm x 330.2 mm)

OFICIO (215.9 mm x 317.5 mm)

OFICIO (Mexico) (216.0 mm x 341.0 mm)

LETTER (Government) (203.2 mm x 266.7 mm)

OFICIO (Brazil) (216.0 mm x 355.0 mm)

LEGAL (India) (215.0 mm x 345.0 mm)

LEGAL (Government) (203.2 mm x 330.2 mm)

FOOLSCAP (Australia) (206.0 mm x 337.0 mm)

F4A (215.9 mm x 342.9 mm)

Postcard (100.0 x 148.0 mm)

Reply Postcard (148.0 x 200.0 mm)

4 on 1 Postcard (200.0 x 296.0 mm)

"Vertical" side and "Horizontal" side of paper

●In the User's Guide, regardless of the paper orientation, the side of paper perpendicular ( ) to the front of the machine is

referred to as the "vertical" side while the side parallel ( ) to the front of the machine is referred to as the "horizontal" side.

Appendix

545

Supported Paper Types

Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.

Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Source (Standard) Paper Source (Optional)

Paper Drawer 1 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Feeder PF-D Cassette Feeding Unit-AV

Thin 60 g/m²

Plain 1 61 to 74 g/m²

Plain 2 75 to 90 g/m²

Plain 3 91 to 105 g/m²

Heavy 1 106 to 119 g/m²

Heavy 2 120 to 128 g/m²

Heavy 3 129 to 163 g/m²

Heavy 4 164 to 200 g/m² - - -

Heavy 5 201 to 216 g/m² - - -

Color 61 to 74 g/m²

Recycled 1 *1 61 to 74 g/m²

Recycled 2 *1 75 to 90 g/m²

Letterhead 1 61 to 74 g/m²

Letterhead 2 75 to 90 g/m²

Letterhead 3 91 to 105 g/m²

Letterhead 4 106 to 119 g/m²

Letterhead 5 120 to 128 g/m²

Letterhead 6 129 to 163 g/m²

Letterhead 7 164 to 200 g/m² - - -

Labels 118 to 130 g/m² -

Appendix

546

Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Source (Standard) Paper Source (Optional)

Paper Drawer 1 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Feeder PF-D Cassette Feeding Unit-AV

Bond 1 60 to 74 g/m²

Bond 2 75 to 105 g/m²

Envelope 80 to 100 g/m² - - -

Postcard *2 190 g/m² - - -

*1 You can use 100% recycled paper.

*2 The inkjet printable postcard or reply postcard can not be used.

◼Paper Available for Two-Sided Printing

●When performing 2-sided printing, use paper that meets the following requirements.

Paper size: A4, B5, A5R, LGL, LTR, EXEC, 16K, FOOLSCAP/FOLIO, OFICIO, OFICIO (Mexico), LETTER (Government), OFICIO (Brazil), LEGAL

(India), LEGAL (Government), FOOLSCAP (Australia), F4A, Free Size (148.0 mm x 210.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm), Custom

Size (148.0 mm x 210.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

Paper type: Thin, Plain 1, Plain 2, Plain 3, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Heavy 3, Recycled 1, Recycled 2, Letterhead 1, Letterhead 2, Letterhead 3,

Letterhead 4, Letterhead 5, Letterhead 6, Bond 1, Bond 2 and Color

Paper weight: 60 g/m² to 163 g/m²

If using other paper, select <Yes> for <Enable settings for 2nd side of 2-sided page?> to print on the back side of printed paper.

Precautions Regarding Paper

Do not use the following types of paper

Doing so may cause a paper jam or other printing problems.

●Wrinkled or creased paper

●Curled or rolled paper

●Torn paper

●Damp paper

●Very thin paper

●Thin straw paper

●Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

●The reverse side of paper which has been printed by a thermal transfer printer

●Highly textured paper

●Glossy paper

●Inkjet printable postcard

Appendix

547

When using paper

●Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which this machine is installed. Using paper that has been stored

under different temperature or humidity may cause paper jams or result in poor print quality.

Paper handling and storage

●We recommend using the paper immediately after opening the package. Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store

it on a at surface.

●Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.

●Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.

●Do not store the paper vertically or stack too much paper.

●Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes in temperature or humidity.

When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture

●Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area. There is nothing unusual

about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from xing toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to

evaporate (most likely to occur at low room temperatures).

Storing Paper Printed With the Machine

Be aware of the following precautions when handling and storing paper printed using the machine.

◼Storing Printed Paper

●Store the paper on a at surface.

●Do not store paper together with items made from PVC (polyvinyl chloride), such as clear folders. The toner may melt, causing paper to

become stuck to PVC-based material.

●Store paper so that it does not become folded or wrinkled. Doing so may cause the toner to come off.

●If you intend to store paper for long periods (two or more years), preserve them in a binder, etc.

●Long-term storage may cause paper to discolor, which in turn may cause print to appear discolored.

●Do not store paper in places with high temperatures.

◼Precautions when sticking printouts with adhesive

●Be sure to use insoluble adhesive.

●Test the adhesive on an unneeded printout before using.

●Before stacking printouts that stuck with adhesive, check that the adhesive completely dried.

Appendix

548

Paper Feeder PF-D

7KKL-0HW

Paper Size/Weight/Type Available Paper(P. 542)

Paper Drawers Capacity ●550 sheets (80 g/m² / 75 g/m²)

●640 sheets (64 g/m²)

●Paper other than above: 60 mm in height or less

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

458 mm x 464 mm x 130 mm

Weight Approximately 6.1 kg

Appendix

549

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV

7KKL-0HX

Paper Size/Weight/Type Available Paper(P. 542)

Paper Drawers Capacity ●550 sheets (80 g/m² / 75 g/m²)

●640 sheets (64 g/m²)

●Paper other than above: 60 mm in height or less

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

597 mm x 635 mm x 225 mm

Weight Approximately 15.5 kg

Appendix

550

Options

7KKL-0HY

The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing options to the machine.

◼Available Options

Optional Equipment(P. 552)

System Options(P. 538)

◼Finding Options According to Your Purposes

To add paper drawers

Paper Feeder PF-D(P. 553)

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV(P. 554)

●Some of the settings may not be displayed depending on the conguration of optional equipment installed

on the machine.

Appendix

551

Optional Equipment

7KKL-0J0

By combining options, you can use functions more eciently.

Paper Feeder PF-D

Load frequently used paper in the paper drawer of this product. Paper Feeder PF-D(P. 553)

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV

Load frequently used paper in the paper drawer of this product. Cassette Feeding Unit-AV(P. 554)

Appendix

552

Paper Feeder PF-D

7KKL-0J1

Enables you to add a paper drawer. Loading different sized paper in the optional paper drawer enables reduced work

for switching paper.

Paper drawer Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66)

Load Paper.

Right cover

Open this cover when clearing a paper jam inside the machine. Paper Jams in a Paper Source(P. 496)

●Up to three units of the Paper Feeder PF-D can be attached. When the Cassette Feeding Unit-AV is attached,

up to two units of the Paper Feeder PF-D can be attached.

●See the Setup Guide for the attaching procedure of the Paper Feeder PF-D.

Appendix

553

Cassette Feeding Unit-AV

7KKL-0J2

Enables you to add a paper drawer. Loading different sized paper in the optional paper drawer enables reduced work

for switching paper.

Paper drawer Basic Paper Loading Method(P. 66)

Load Paper.

Right cover

Open this cover when clearing a paper jam inside the machine. Paper Jams in a Paper Source(P. 496)

●Up to two units of the Paper Feeder PF-D can be attached on top of the Cassette Feeding Unit-AV. Up to

three paper sources can be added.

●See the Setup Guide for the attaching procedure of the Paper Feeder PF-D and the Cassette Feeding Unit-AV.

Appendix

554

Manuals and Their Contents

7KKL-0J3

The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Important Safety Instructions The content described in this manual is for the prevention of damage

to property and injury to users of the machine and others.

Setup Guide This manual describes basic setup procedures, from removing the

packing materials to setting up the machine.

User's Guide (This Manual) This manual describes all the functions of the machine. You can

browse information by category or enter a keyword to search for

pages on a specic topic. Using User's Guide(P. 556)

Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II

Printer)

This manual describes how to use the PS/PCL/UFR II printer.

V_201012

For the manuals with , access here .

Appendix

555

Using User's Guide

7KKL-0J4

The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or smartphone, etc. This section describes the

screen layout of the User's Guide and how to view the User's Guide. It also describes how to make settings for the

display of the User's Guide.

◼Screen Layout of User's Guide

This section explains the User's Guide screen layout and how to use the buttons on the screen. Screen Layout of

User's Guide(P. 557)

◼Viewing User's Guide

This section describes what you should be familiar to when viewing the User's Guide, including the meanings of the

marks used in the User's Guide and how the keys on the control panel and the buttons on the computer screen are

represented in the User's Guide. Viewing User's Guide(P. 560)

◼Setting the Display of the User's Guide

You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to one that is appropriate to

the device on which the User's Guide is displayed.

●If you are unable to view the manual in PDF format, download Adobe Acrobat Reader from the Adobe

Systems website (https://get.adobe.com/reader/).

How to nd the topic you are looking for

Search the contents

●You can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the Contents on the left side of the

screen.

Search by keyword

●Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing

the keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter

phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for

multiple keywords. For the details of the search screen and how to operate the screen, see

Search(P. 558) .

Appendix

556

Screen Layout of User's Guide

7KKL-0J5

The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.

Top Page

Appears when the User's Guide starts.

Click to display all items underneath chapters. Click to return to the original list.

Click to switch between the table of contents and the search display. When the table of contents is displayed,

each click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each

click on switches between hiding and showing the display.

Click to specify settings such as text size, layout, and display method for the User's Guide.

Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other

information.

Appendix

557

Click to display the previous or following topic.

[Notice]

Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.

Topic Page

Contains information about how to congure and use the machine.

Navigation

See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.

Click to go to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web browser.

Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.

Click to return to the page top.

Click to display the search screen. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page

you are looking for.

Appendix

558

[Enter keyword(s) here]

Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages

containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for

pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.

Search result

Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the

page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.

●The keywords appear in bold in the pages displayed as search results.

Appendix

559

Viewing User's Guide

7KKL-0J6

This section describes the marks, buttons, screens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and

cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" included with the machine. See also these instructions.

Marks

Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and

other information are indicated using the marks below.

Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or serious

personal injury if not performed correctly. To ensure that you use the machine

safely, always observe these warnings.

Indicates a precaution for preventing the risk of personal injury or property

damage other than a product fault due to improper use of the machine. To

ensure that you use the machine safely, always observe these cautions.

Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items

carefully, and make sure not to perform the described operations.

Indicates important operational requirements and restrictions that should

always be observed when using this machine. Always observe these

important items to avoid malfunctions, faults or property damage due to

improper machine operation.

Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations

for a procedure.

Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.

Keys and buttons

Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:

Type Example

Keys on the control panel

Settings displayed on the control panel <Function Settings>

<Cancel?>

Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]

[OK]

/ /

, , and on the operation panel are used to select the target item in settings, but their description is

omitted in the User's Guide. The operation for selecting <XXXXX> using or and pressing is

represented as shown below in the User's Guide.

1Select <XXXXX>.

Appendix

560

Screen

Depending on the operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may

slightly differ from the actual displays. Also, the appearance of the printer driver and software may differ

depending on their version.

Illustrations

Illustrations used in the User's Guide are from "LBP722Cdw" unless otherwise specically noted.

Appendix

561

Third-Party Services

If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions

below.

When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or

software) through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by

applicable law, you may not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such

content, or keep cached copies longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify,

create a derivative work of, sell, lease, lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any

third party; (c) misrepresent the source or ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright,

trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify or delete any author attributions, legal notices

or other labels of the origin or source of material.

The Software Subjected to Other License Conditions

Please refer to Contents of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and

corresponding license conditions.

Contents of Software

Names of Software page

1.Adobe PostScript 3 ....................................................................................................................... 5

2.Apache Commons Logging ......................................................................................................... 12

3.Apache Commons Net ................................................................................................................ 17

4.Apache log4j .............................................................................................................................. 22

5.AWS IoT Device SDK ................................................................................................................... 26

6.AWS SDK for Java ....................................................................................................................... 31

7.Crypto API .................................................................................................................................. 36

8.expat ......................................................................................................................................... 37

9.fontconfig .................................................................................................................................. 39

10.freetype2 ................................................................................................................................. 40

11.HarfBuzz .................................................................................................................................. 45

12.HttpClient2.0 Alpha1 Release ................................................................................................... 46

13.iw ............................................................................................................................................ 48

14.Jackson JSON Processor ..................................................................................................... ....... 49

15.JAVA SE .................................................................................................................................... 54

16.JSEncrypt .................................................................................................................................. 55

17.libcurl ...................................................................................................................................... 58

18.libjingle ................................................................................................................................... 71

19.libpcap .................................................................................................................................... 72

20.libpng ...................................................................................................................................... 73

21.memcached ............................................................................................................................. 76

22.Net-SNMP ................................................................................................................................ 77

23.OpenSSL .................................................................................................................................. 85

24.OSGi Release 5 ......................................................................................................................... 96

25.Paho MQTT Client .................................................................................................................. 102

26.pango (part of OpenTypeCode) .............................................................................................. 103

27.pixman .................................................................................................................................. 104

28.Protocol Buffers ..................................................................................................................... 106

29.servlet.jar .............................................................................................................................. 107

30.Wi-Fi Test Suite ...................................................................................................................... 111

31.wpa_supplicant-2.6 ............................................................................................................... 112

32.X Window System ................................................................................................................... 114

33.XKCP ...................................................................................................................................... 205

34.xkeyboard-config .................................................................................................................. 206

35.compat-wireless .................................................................................................................... 212

36.Device Driver for REALTEK RTL8153 ....................................................................................... 212

37.fusermount ............................................................................................................................ 212

38.Linux ..................................................................................................................................... 212

39.WLAN USB Driver .................................................................................................................... 212

40.atk ......................................................................................................................................... 220

41.cairo ...................................................................................................................................... 220

42.glib ........................................................................................................................................ 220

43.glibc ...................................................................................................................................... 220

44.GTK+ ..................................................................................................................................... 220

45.json-glib ................................................................................................................................ 220

46.libfuse ................................................................................................................................... 220

47.Libnl ...................................................................................................................................... 220

48.libusb .................................................................................................................................... 220

49.pango (except OpenTypeCode) .............................................................................................. 220

50.iproute ................................................................................................................................... 229

51.Squid ..................................................................................................................................... 239

The software after No. 35 and downwards in the Contents of Software described above, please see

the followings.

(1) Please access <https://global.canon/en/oss/scd/index.html> to fill the request form so that you

receive an e-mail with the URL to download the source code; or

(2) Please send us a letter in writing with the following information, so that you receive the source

code via postal mail.

In case you have chosen this (2), WE MAY CHARGE YOU no more than the cost of performing this

distribution.

(i) Your Address (Country/Region, ZIP code, Address, Your name) [mandatory]

(ii) Your e-mail address (for the purpose of possible communication with us) [optional]

(iii) Name of the model that you purchased [mandatory].

(iv) Platform Version. Please see the <Check Device Configuration> display on the control panel.

[mandatory]

(v) Product ID number labeled on the back of the main unit. [mandatory]

- Addressee:

Open Source Promotion Division, Canon Inc.

30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku,

Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

- Please see Privacy Notice at Canon Global <https://global.canon/>.

1.Adobe PostScript 3

Portions include software under the following terms:

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.

______________________________________________________________________________________

The Apache Software License, Version 1.1

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation

(http://www.apache.org/).

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following

acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation

(http://www.apache.org/)."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party

acknowledgments normally appear.

4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please

contact apache@apache.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their

name, without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION

OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,

EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache

Machines, Inc., http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation,

please see <http://www.apache.org/>.

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following

acknowledgement:

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,

OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

______________________________________________________________________________________

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original

work by Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright

notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising

materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software

was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used

to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and

associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including

without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell

copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to

the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial

portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE

FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER

DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or

otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written

authorization from the X Consortium.

______________________________________________________________________________________

NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON

March 27, 2003

Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the

"Sablotron XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License

Version 1.1 (the "License"). You may obtain a copy of

the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/

Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and

limitations under the License.

The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.

The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance

Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems

Incorporated are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet

from:

http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp

The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:

https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following

acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California,

Berkeley and its contributors.